TM 9-747 (1945)

,V
DEPARTMENT
26 FEBRUARY 1945
MOTOR CARRIAGE T89
Generated on 2013-07-07 11:55 GMT / http://hdl.handle.net/2027/uc1.b3243745
T83 AND 8-INCH HOWITZER

155-MM GUN MOTOR CARRIAGE
WAR DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL
Public Domain, Google-digitized / http://www.hathitrust.org/access_use#pd-google
WAR DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL
TM 9-747
155-MM GUN MOTOR CARRIAGE
T83 AND 8-INCH HOWITZER
MOTOR CARRIAGE T89
WAR DEPARTMENT 26 FEBRUARY 1945
RESTRICTED DISSEMINATION OF RESTRICTED MATTER NO person is entitled solely
by virtue of his grade or position to knowledge or possession of classified matter. Such
matter is entrusted only to those individuals whose official duties require such knowledge or
possession. (See also paragraph 23b, AR 380-5, 15 March 1944.)

TM 9-747
WAR DEPARTMENT
Washington 25, D. C., 26 February 1945
TM 9-747, 155-mm Gun Motor Carriage T83 and 8-inch Howitzer
Motor Carriage T89, is published for the information and guidance of
all concerned.
[A.G. 300.7 (23 Feb. 45)]
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF
J...1, \'\ G. C. MARSHALL,
Chief of Staff.
OFFICIAL:
J. A. ULIO,
Major General,
The Adjutant General.
DISTRIBUTION: AAF (10); AGF (10); ASF (10); Depts (10); AAF
Comd (2); Arm & SvBd (2); S Div ASF (1); Tech Sv (2); Sv C
(2); PC & S (1); PE (ORD O) (5); Dist O, 9 (5); Dist Br O, 9
(3); Reg O, 9 (3); Establishments, 9 (5); Decentralized Sub
O, 9 (3); Gen & Sp Sv Sch (10); USMA (20); A (10); CHQ
(10); D (2); AF (2); T/O & E: 6-125 (2), 6-127 (3), 6-129
(3), 9-7 (3), 9-9 (3), 9-37 (3), 9-57 (3), 9-65 (3), 9-67
(3), 9-76 (2), 9-127 (3), 9-197 (3), 9-317 (3), 9-325 (2), 9-327
(3), 9-328 (3), 9-377(3).
(For explanation of symbols, see FM 21-6).

TM 9-747
"V
CONTENTS
PART ONE— GENERAL
..-7
""1
Paragraphs Pages
SECTION I. Introduction ............. 1-2 5-8
II. Description and data ....... 3-5 8-11
III. Tools, spare parts, and ac-
cessories .............. 6-9 11-21
PART TWO— OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION IV. General ---- ............ 10 22
V. Service upon receipt of
equipment ............ 11-13 22-27
VI. Controls and instruments ... 14-15 27-33
VII. Operation under ordinary
conditions ............. 16-17 34-37
VIII. Operation under unusual
conditions ............. 18-21 37-41
IX. Demolition to prevent
enemy use ............. 22-23 41-42
PART THREE— MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION X. General ................ 24 43
XI. Special organizational tools
and equipment ......... 25 43-45
XII. Lubrication .............. 26-27 46-53
XIII. Preventive maintenance
services ............... 28-34 53-82
XIV. Troubleshooting .......... 35-47 82-97
XV. Engine description and data . 48-49 97-99
XVI. Engine removal and
installation ............ 50-51 99-108
XVII. Engine maintenance ....... 52-53 108-111
XVIII. Engine lubrication system. . 54-62 111-120
XIX. Ignition system ........... 63-69 121-132
XX. Fuel and air intake and
exhaust systems ........ 70-80 133-141

TM 9-747
PART THREE—MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS (Cont'd)
Paragraphs Pages
SECTION XXI. Starting system 81-83 142-143
XXII. Battery and lighting system. 84-93 143-154
XXIII. Clutch 94-100 154-167
XXIV. Instruments and horn 101-102 167-172
XXV. Propeller shaft and universal
joints 103-104 172-173
XXVI. Transmission and final drive
assembly 105-115 173-200
XXVII. Horizontal volute spring
suspension 116-123 201-220
XXVIII. Hull 124-127 220-221
XXIX. Vehicle wiring 128-130 221-224
XXX. Radio interference
suppression 131-136 224-226
XXXI. Auxiliary equipment 137-138 226-227
PART FOUR—ARMAMENT
SECTION XXXII. Introduction 139-143 228-230
XXXIII. Operating instructions 144-152 230-238
XXXIV. Sighting and fire control
equipment 153-161 238-249
XXXV. Ammunition 162-164 249-260
APPENDIX
SECTION XXXVI. References 165-167 260-264
INDEX 265
TM 9-747
1-2
RESTRICTED
PART ONE—GENERAL
Section I
INTRODUCTION
1. SCOPE.
a. These instructions* are published for information and guidance
of personnel charged with the operation and maintenance of this equip-
ment, and are supplemented by descriptions of major units and tneir
functions in relation to other components of this vehicle. They apply
only to the 8-inch Howitzer Motor Carriage T89, and to the 155-mm
Gun Motor Carriage T83, and are arranged as follows: Part One, Intro-
duction; Part Two, Operating Instructions; Part Three, Maintenance
Instructions; and Part Four, Armament.
6. The Appendix at the end of the manual contains a list of refer-
ences including standard nomenclature lists, technical manuals, and
other publications applicable to the vehicle.
2. RECORDS.
a. Forms and records applicable for use in performing prescribed
operations are listed below, with a brief explanation of each.
(1) W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 7360, ARMY MOTOR VEHICLE
OPERATOR'S PERMIT. This form will be issued by commanding
officers of posts, camps, stations, or organizations to all operators of mili-
tary vehicles who have passed the driver's examination (TM 21-300 )
and are qualified to drive the particular vehicles noted on the permit.
(2) WAR DEPARTMENT LUBRICATION ORDER. War De-
partment Lubrication Order No. 9-747 prescribes lubrication mainte-
nance for this vehicle. A Lubrication Order is issued with each vehicle
and is to be carried with it at all times.
(3) STANDARD FORM NO. 26, DRIVER'S REPORT—ACCI-
DENT, MOTOR TRANSPORTATION. One copy of this form will
be kept with the vehicle at all times. In case of an accident resulting in
injury or property damage, it will be filled out by the driver on the spot,
or as promptly as practical thereafter.
(4) WAR DEPARTMENT FORM NO. 48, DRIVER'S TRIP
TICKET AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SERVICE REC-
ORD. This form, properly executed, will be furnished to the driver
when his vehicle is dispatched on nontactical missions. The driver and

official user of the vehicle will complete in detail appropriate parts of

this form. These forms need not be issued for vehicles in convoy or on
*To provide operating instructions with the materiel, this technical manual has
been published in advance of complete technical review. Any errors or omissions
will be corrected by changes or, if extensive, by an early revision.

TM 9-747
General
A—155-mm Gun Motor Carriage J83
RA PD 342321
B—8-Inch Howitzer Motor Carriage T89
Figure I—155-mm Gun Motor Carriage T83, and
8-Inch Howitzer Motor Carriage T89

TM 9-747
Introduction
RA PD 342330
Figure 2—Rear View of 8-inch Howitzer Motor Carriage 789
tactical missions. The reverse side of this form contains the driver's
daily and weekly preventive maintenance service reminder schedule.
(5) W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 478, MWO AND MAJOR UNIT
ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT RECORD. This form, carried with the
vehicle, will be used by all personnel completing a modification or
major unit assembly (engine, transmission, transfer case, tracks, etc.)
replacement to record clearly the description of work completed, date,
vehicle hours and/or mileage, and MWO number or nomenclature of
unit assembly. Personnel performing the operation will initial in the
column provided. Minor repairs, parts, and accessory replacements will
not be recorded.
(6) W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 6, DUTY ROSTER. This form,
slightly modified, will be used for scheduling and maintaining a record
7
TM 9-747
2-4
General
of vehicle maintenance operations. It may be used for lubrication
records.
(7) W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 462, PREVENTIVE MAINTE-
NANCE SERVICE AND TECHNICAL INSPECTION WORK
SHEET FOR FULL-TRACK AND TANK-LIKE WHEELED
VEHICLES. This form will be used for all 50-hour (500 mile) or 100-
hour (1,000 mile) services, and for technical inspections of these
vehicles.
(8) W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 9-70, SPOT-CHECK INSPECTION
REPORT FOR ALL MOTOR VEHICLES. This form may be used
by all commanding officers or their staff representatives in making spot-
check inspections on all vehicles.
(9) W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 468, UNSATISFACTORY EQUIP-
MENT REPORT. This form will be used for reporting manufacturing,
design or operational defects in materiel with a view to improving and
correcting such defects, and for use in recommending modifications on
materiel. This form will not be used for reporting failures, isolated
materiel defects, or malfunctions of materiel resulting from fair wear
and tear or accidental damage; nor for the replacement, repair, or the
issue of parts and equipment. It does not replace currently authorized
operational or performance records.
(10 ) W.D., A.G.O. FORM NO. 9-81, EXCHANGE PART OR UNIT
IDENTIFICATION TAG. This tag, properly executed, may be used
when exchanging unserviceable items for like serviceable assemblies,
parts, vehicles, and tools.
Section II
DESCRIPTION AND DATA
3. DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS (figs. 1 and 2).
a. Difference Between Models. The 155-mm gun motor carriage
T83 and the 8-inch howitzer motor carriage T89 are identical vehicles
except for gun tubes and sighting equipment. Both vehicles have uni-
versal type ammunition carrying racks to carry 155-mm or 8-inch
ammunition. The gun tube may be changed from the 155-mm to the
8-inch howitzer, or vice versa, and the recoil and equilibrator mecha-
nism adjusted accordingly. The tube installed is, therefore, the only fac-
tor which determines whether the vehicle carries a T83 or T89 desig-
nation.
4. DESCRIPTION (figs. 1 and 2).
a. The motor carriage is an armored, full-track laying vehicle
which mounts the 155-mm gun Ml or M1A1, or the 8-inch howitzer Ml
or M2, with seats provided for a crew of 8 men. The 155-mm gun or the
8-inch howitzer, is mounted on the rear of the gun motor carriage similar
TM 9-747
4-5
Description and Data
to the 155-mm gun motor carriage M12. The T83 or T89 vehicle is in
effect an improved version of the M12, based on the major components
of the medium tank M4A1. The vehicle is designed with the driver's
compartment at the front, the engine compartment in the middle, and
the fighting compartment at the rear.
b. Hatch Doors. Turret-type hatch doors are mounted on top and
at the front of the vehicle, and provide access to the driver's and assist-
ant driver's seats.
c. Emergency Escape Door. The vehicles are equipped with an
escape door located in the hull floor behind the assistant driver's seat.
d. Vision Devices. When both hatches are closed, direct vision
is provided by vision blocks in the hatch cupola, and indirect vision is
provided through the hatch door.
e. Communication. The vehicles are equipped with radio for
intertank, and telephone for intratank, communication.
/. Engine, T83 or T89 Vehicle. The vehicles are powered by a
485-horsepower, 9-cylinder, radial gasoline engine. The engine is
mounted in the center of the vehicle, and is accessible through a hinged
section of the top armor and two inspection plates in the floor of the
hull under the engine compartment.
g. Tank Serial Numbers. The tank serial number is located on
a plate in front and above the driver's seat.
h. Spade Assembly. The spade assembly is anchored to the rear
of the hull on the rear idler bracket. When the spade is in "UP" position
the ramp forms the rear of the fighting compartment in the vehicle. The
spade assembly (fig. 2) in lowered position forms a ramp assembly and
also acts as an anchor to keep the vehicle in position when the gun is
fired. It is raised and lowered by a hand-operated winch, located in the
left rear corner of the vehicle.
i. Hand-operated Winch. The hand-operated winch is used to
raise and lower the spade assembly.
5. DATA (T83 AND T89).
a. General.
Purpose Gun carriage
Type Full-track laying
Crew 8 men
Fighting weight 83,000 Ib (T83)

83,000 Ib (T89)
Length 357 in. (T83)
289 in. (T89)
Width, over-all 124 in.
Height, over-all 129% in.
Ground clearance , . . 19 Vi in.

TM 9-747
General
b. Engine.
Manufacturer Continental
Model R975-C4
Type Single-row, static radial, air-cooled
Number of cylinders 9
Bore and stroke 5:00x5:50
Piston displacement 973 cu in.
Compression ratio 5.7 to 1
Rated bhp 485 at 2,400 rpm
Governor speed 2,300 rpm
Cruising speed 2,100 rpm
Crankshaft rotation (from rear) Clockwise
Crankshaft spline size SAE 30
Clutch assembly:
Manufacturer Borg & Beck
Mounting bracket:
Diameter of circle 23% in.
Number of bolts 9
Size of bolts %e in.
Dry weight of engine 750 Ib
Weight, with accessories 1,550 Ib
c. Fuel and Oil Capacity.
Fuel capacity, gallons 215
Number of miles without refueling 107
Octane rating of fuel 80 or higher
Oil consumption (approximate quarts per hour) 2
Engine oil capacity 52 qt
Transmission and differential oil capacity 38 gal
d. Performance.
Maximum sustained speed on hard road 24 mph
Cruising speeds:
First speed 2 mph
Second speed 5 mph
Third speed 9 mph
Fourth speed ,. . 14 mph
Fifth speed 21 mph

Maximum allowable engine speed 2,400 rpm

Minimum engine idling speed 800 rpm
Maximum grade ascending ability 60%
Maximum grade descending ability 60%
Maximum fording depth 36 in.
Maximum turning diameter 83 ft
Maximum vertical obstacle (forward and backward) 34 in.
Maximum width of ditch (forward and backward) 92 in.
10
TM 9-747
5-7
Tools, Spare Parts, and Accessories
e. Suspension.
Type Horizontal volute
Track shoe width 23 in.
Track pitch 6 in.
Ground contact area of both tracks 7,544 sq in.
Number of blocks per track 86
Weight of track 3,698 Ib
Ground pressure (pounds per square inch) 10.2
/. Power Train (One-piece Differential).
Manufacturer Iowa Transmission
Section III
TOOLS, SPARE PARTS, AND ACCESSORIES
6. PURPOSE.
a. The lists in this section are for information only and must not
be used as a basis for requisition.
fe. These lists are for the T83 only, the lists for the T89 will vary
for those items peculiar to the 8-inch howitzer.
7. ON-VEHICLE TOOLS.
Quantity
per
Vehicle Item Name and Stock Number Stowage Location
a. Pioneer.
1 Ax,handled,4-lb (41-A-1277) On engine deck
left sponson
1 BAR, crow, pinch pt, 1 Vi x On engine deck
60 in. (41-B-175) center
1 HANDLE, mattock, 36 in , On engine deck
(41-H-1286) right sponson
1 MATTOCK, pick, w/o handle On engine deck
5-lb (41-M-722) left sponson
1 SHOVEL, D-handle (41-S-3170) On engine deck
right sponson
1 SLEDGE, blacksmith, dble On engine deck
faced, 10-lb (41-S-3726) right sponson
b. Vehicle.
1 BAG, tool (41-B-9-250) In ass't. driver's

compartment
1 BAR, cross, socket wrench, In tool bag
round, 7/io x 8 in. (41-B-154)
1 BAR, socket wrench, ext.,"
V2 in. sq drive, 5 in. long
(41-B-307)
11
TM 9-747
General
Quantity
per
1 BAR, socket wrench, ext., In tool bag
V2 in. sq drive, 10 in. long
(41-B-309)
1 BAR, socket wrench, ext., % in"
sq drive, 8 in. long (41-B-309-20)
1 CHISEL, machinist's, hand, cold,"
3/4in. (41-C-1124)
1 CORD, light, ext, 15-ft, 12-V,
S.C. w/fuse (17-C-35079-32 )
1 FILE, A.S., 3-in. sq, smooth cut,"
10-in. (41-F-1030)
1 FILE, A.S., 3-in. sq, smooth cut,"
6-in. (41-F-1572)
1 HAMMER, mach., ball peen, 2-lb"
(41-H-527)
1 HAMMER, mach., ball peen, 1-lb"
(41-H-523)
2 HANDLE, file, wood (41-H-1115)
1 HANDLE, socket wrench, hinged"
V2-in. sq drive, 18-in. (41-H-1502)
1 HANDLE, socket wrench, ratchet, Va-in"
sq drive, 10-in. (41-H-1505)
1 HANDLE, socket wrench, ratchet,"
3/4-in. sq drive (41-H-1506)
1 HANDLE, socket wrench, speeder"
18-in. (41-H-1508)
1 HANDLE, socket wrench, T-sliding,"
1/2 -in. sq drive, 10-in. ( 41-H-1509-54)
1 JOINT, socket wrench, universal,"
Vi-in. sq drive (41-J-380)
1 PLIERS, comb, slip joint, wire-cut-"
ting, 6-in. (41-P-1650)
1 PLIERS, lineman's, side-cutting"

8-in. (41-P-1839)
1 SCREWDRIVER, close quarter, 1 Va-in"
blade (41-S-1062-90)
1 SCREWDRIVER, close quarter"
1%-in. blade (41-S-1063)
1 SCREWDRIVER, common, normal duty,"
6-in. blade (41-S-1104)
1 SCREWDRIVER, mach., extra-heavy"
duty, 5-in. blade (41-S-1385)
12
TM 9-747
Tools, Spare Parts, and Accessories
Quantity
per
1 WRENCH, adj., crescent, 8-in In tool bag
(41-W-486)
1 WRENCH, adj., crescent, 12-in"
(41-W-488)
1 WRENCH, box, 3-in. hex., 44 s/8-in On engine deck
length (41-W-640-400) center
1 WRENCH, engr., 15-deg dble. head, In tool bag
O.E., %« x ys-in. (41-W-990)
1 WRENCH, engr., 15-deg dble. head,"
O.E., Vic, x 1/2-in. (41-W-1000)
1 WRENCH, engr., 15-deg dble. head"
O.E., %e x "/w-in. (41-W-1005-5)
O.E., s/8 x 3/4-in. (41-W-1008)
O.E., »%« x ys-in. (41-W-1015)
O.E., i-lir, x 1-in. (41-W-1021)
1 WRENCH, engr., 15-deg dble. head"
O.E., li/s x 13/s-in. (41-W-1028-10)
1 WRENCH, set screw, hex. %2-in"
(41-W-2451)
1 WRENCH, set screw, hex., Vi-in"
(41-W-2454)
1 WRENCH, socket, V2-in. sq drive,"
12-pt, %6-in. (41-W-3005)
1 WRENCH, socket, 1/2-in. sq. drive,"
12-pt, V2-in. (41-W-3007)
1 WRENCH, socket, Va-in. sq. drive"
12-pt, n/i«-in. (41-W-3009)
1 WRENCH, socket, Va-in. sq. drive"
12-pt, s/s-in. (41-W-3013)
1 WRENCH, socket, i/2-in. sq. drive,"

12-pt, Hio-in. (41-W-3015)

1 WRENCH, socket, V2-in. sq. drive"
12-pt, 3/4-in. (41-W-3017)
12-pt, 7/8-in. (41-W-3023)
12-pt, ô-in. (41-W-3025)
1 WRENCH, socket, »/2-in. sq. drive,"
12-pt, 1-in. (41-W-3027)
13
TM 9-747
GeneraI
Quantity
per
Vehicle Item Name and Stock Number . Stowage Location
1 WRENCH, socket, Va-in. sq drive, In tool bag
12-pt, 1tte-in. (41-W-3029)
1 WRENCH, socket, V2-in. sq drive,"
12-pt, 1Vs-in. (41-W-3031)
1 WRENCH, socket, %-in. sq drive,"
12-pt, l%«-in. (41-W-3037)
1 WRENCH, socket, %-in. sq drive"
12-pt, lV2-in. (41-W-3046)
c. Gun.
1 BAR, jimmy, 24-in. long (41-B-225) In gun chest
1 DRIFT, brass, tapered, 4-in. long"
(41-D-1530)
1 DRIFT, brass, tapered, 6-in. long"
(41-D-1S33)
1 GAGE, head space (41-G-200-700)
1 HAMMER, hide-faced, 2-lb (41-H-473)
1 PUNCH, drive pin, Vi-in. pt (4 l-P-3606) . ..."
1 ROLL, tool, M4 (w/o contents)"
(41-R-2705-5)
1 ROLL, tool, M16 (w/o contents)"
( 4 l-R-2 705-41)
1 SCREWDRIVER, offset, 0.046 x %"
1 SCREWDRIVER, jeweler's wood handle"
2-in. blade (41-S-1399)
1 WRENCH, ratchet, 3/4-in. sq drive,"
18-in. long (41-W-1989-320), con-
sisting of:
1 Gear, wrench, ratchet, %-in.
sq drive (41-G-586-40)
1 Handle, wrench, 18-in. long
(41-H-1548-400)
1 WRENCH, set screw, hex., %2-in"
(41-W-2449)
1 WRENCH, set screw, hex., Vi-in"

(41-W-2450)
1 WRENCH, set screw, hex., %6-in"
(41-W-2452)
1 WRENCH, socket, pintle bolt head,"
2%6-in. open (41-W-1637)
1 WRENCH, socket, recoil rod nut, 4 V2-in"
hex. open (41-W-2625)
14
TM 9-747
"Tools, Spare farts, and Accessories
Quantity
per
1 TOOL, vent cleaning drill bit type In gun chest
(No. 3 drill) (41-T-3081-120)
1 WRENCH, crankshaft nut"
1 WRENCH, firing mech. (4l-W-3248-251) . ..
1 WRENCH, fuse, M7A1 (41-W-1596-50)
8. ON-VEHICLE EQUIPMENT (T83 ONLY).
a. Gun.
1 BELT,primer,M8 (7225490)
1 BRUSH, bore, M13 (38-B-992-659)
1 BUCKET, water, galv, 14 qt (42-B-25520) In bracket on
spade
1 CHEST, oil pump, M16 w/contents In bracket—left
composed of: rear corner of
1 Adapter (metric thd) (oil hose engine compart-
to filling valve) (41-A-26-500) mentroof
1 Cap, thread protector (4l-C-395-625 )
1 Chest, oil pump, M16 (w/o contents)
(41-C-738-550)
1 Funnel, cap, w/strainer, % pt
(41-F-3570)
1 Hose, rubber, 10-ft (oil)
(33-H-535)
1 Pump, oil, M3 (ll-P-576-300)
1 Release, filling and drain valve
(41-R-3650)
1 Rule, steel flexible, 30 cm
(41-R-2909)
1 Wrench, engr's, dble. head,
O.E., 3/4 x ifte-in. (41-W-1012)
1 COVER, bore brush (24-C-1058-875) On bore brush
M13
1 COVER, clutch On clutch on
mount T14
1 COVER, muzzle, M314 (24-C-1847-367) . . .On muzzle

1 HEAD, rammer, cleaning and unloading,... In gun chest

M7 (41-H-1826-600)
1 HEAD, rammer, loading (41-H-1826-360) . ."
4 HOOK, lifting shell (B280389)
1 LANYARD,M12, assembly (21-L-106-200). .
1 LANYARD, firing (B109018)"
1 REAMER, cleaning, primer seat
(41-R-501-80)
is
TM
9-747
General
Quantity
per
1 REFLECTOR, muzzle (8-R-184-240) On muzzle over
muzzle cover
1 SETTER, fuse, M14 (B176535) In gun chest
1 SETTER, fuse, M22 or M23 (73-3A44)
8 STAFF, cleaning, section (41-S-4658-120) . ."
1 TRAY, loading (155-mm howitzer Ml) . .. ."
(41-T-3851-260)
1 FORM, W.D., Artillery Gun Book, O.O In pamphlet box
Form 5825 (28-F-67990) (D75994)
2 OIL, recoil, heavy, gal (D167298) In right rear hull
compartment
b. Armament and Ammunition.
(1) AMMUNITION (SEPARATE LOADING) FOR 155-MM
GUN Ml OR M1A1.
20 CHARGE, propelling, N.H. powder— 8 in powder compt,
155-mm gun Ml (stowed in container) right side hull
M16 12 in powder compt,
left side hull
.Inbox (76-7-620)
(76-7-623)
stowed in right
rear corner of
hull
In boxes (D703-
2913) to right
and left of 155-
mm gun base
10 in shell rack
left sponson
10 in shell rack
right sponson
(2) GRENADES, HAND.

4 FRAGMENTATION, Mk. II (82-0-41)

2 OFFENSE, Mk. Ill (w/Fuze det. H.G. M6)
(82-0-70)
4 SMOKE, M8 (82-0-11)
2 THERMITE, incendiary (C13-17-3)
(3) GRENADES, RIFLE.
10 GRENADE, rifle, M9A1 In boxes (07032-
913) to right
and left of gun
base
25 FUZE, P. D., M51 A3 w/Booster M21A2.
50 PRIMER, percussion, 21-grain, Mk. IIA4.
20
SHELL, H. E., unfuzed, 155-mm gun M101.
or M101B
TM 9-747
Tools, Spore Ports, and Accessories
Quantity
per
(4) ARMAMENT.
8 CARBINE, cal. .30, Ml (42-36-1A) 4 on lids of powder
compartment, 2
on top carriage,
2 in driver's
compartment
1 LAUNCHER, grenade, M8 In box (D7032-
913) under sub-
floor
1 GUN, 155-mm Ml or M1A1 In mount T14
r. Sighting Equipment.
1 BINOCULAR, M13, complete, composed. ... In bracket (7055-
of: 706)—ass'tdriv-
1 Binocular, M13 (22-382) er's compart-
1 Case, carrying, M17 (D44160) ment
1 CASE, carrying, gunner's quadrant, On rear of right
M18 (38-8-26) gun shield
1 CASE, carrying, M66 (T28) (for In gun chest
fuze setter M22 or M23) (7691403)
1 CASE, carrying, T16 (for telescope In brackets on rear
M69E1) of left and right
gunner's shield
1 CASE, panoramic telescope (D40871) On mount T14
1 LIGHT, instrument, M12 (for quadrant. .. . In chest M21
Ml)
1 LIGHT, instrument, M19 (for panoramic..."
telescope) (D43648)
2 LIGHT, instrument, M33 (for telescope. ..."
M69E1) (7690132)
1 LIGHT, instrument, M36 (for telescope. ..."
M16A1F)
1 MOUNT, quadrant, Ml On mount T14
1 MOUNT, telescope, T122 (left) (telescope"

M69E1 and panoramic telescope M12)

1 MOUNT, telescope, T124 (right)"
(telescope M16A1F)
2 PERISCOPE, M6 (22-331) 1 in driver's cupola
1 in asst. driver's
cupola
17
TM 9-747
General
Quantity
per
1 POST, aiming, Ml, complete, composed.. .Vertical rack on
of: right shell rack
1 Cover, aiming post, M401 (D3 7993 )
2 Post, aiming, Ml (D2472)
1 QUADRANT, gunner's, Ml (15-12M) In bracket on right
shield
1 SET, lights, aiming post, M14, com- In chest M21 in
posed of: gun chest
8 Battery, flashlight (BA-30)
1 Chest, light, M21 (D45472 )
2 Lamp, electric, 3 V ( A179389 )
2 Light, aiming post, M14
1 SIGHT, bore, 155-mm gun Ml or M1A1,.. .In gun chest
complete, composed of:
Sight, bore, breech, w/Cord (RF-ll-ED)
Sight, bore, muzzle (RF-ll-WB)
1 TABLE, firing (155-S-l) -"
1 TARGET, testing (set of 4) (l-T-283-375)"
1 TELESCOPE, elbow, M16 A 1F In case (D40871)
on top carriage
1 TELESCOPE, M69E1 (91-222) In case T16 on left
shield
1 TELESCOPE, panoramic, M12 (91-92) In case (D40871)
on mount T14
d. Publications.
1 CATALOG, Ord, standard nomenclature ... In pamphlet box
list(SNLG-232)
1 FORM No. 478, W.D., A.G.O. (in container"
W.D. 478-1) (TM 9-1725)
1 MANUAL, technical, for 155-mm gun Ml"
(TM 9-350)
1 MANUAL, technical, R975-C4 engine"
1 MANUAL, technical, vehicle (for operator)"

(TM 9-747)
1 ORDER, Lubr., War Department, No. 9-747. . In technical man-
(LO 9-747) ual TM 9-747
i'. Communications.
1 ANTENNA, complete" w/cover
1 INTERPHONE, equipment RC 99 In right sponson,
asst. driver's
compartment
II
TM 9-747
TeoIf, Spare Parts, and Accessories
Quantity
per
Vehicle Item Name and Stock Number Stowage location
5 MICROPHONES, TD-45 Shipped loose with
vehicle
1 RADIO, set ( SCR-608, SCR-610, SCR-619,. . In right sponson,
SCR-628, or BR No .19) asst. driver's
compartment
5 SET, chest, TD-4 Shipped loose with
vehicle
5 SET, head, H-16/u Shipped loose with
vehicle
/. Fire Extinguishers.
2 EXTINGUISHER, fire, CO2, 4-lb 1 in driver's com-
(58-E-200-65) partment, 1 in
left rear corner
of hull
g. Miscellaneous.
2 APPARATUS, decontaminating, 1 Vi-qt 1 in bracket, asst.
driver's com-
partment, 1 in
bracket below
winch
1 BAG, spotlight arm (C123777) In asst. driver's
compartment
26 BATTERY (BA-30) In chest, lighting,
6 in flashlights M21
11 in instrument lights ,
9 spares
8 BELT, safety (B154723) On crew seats
1 BUCKET, canvas, folding, 19-qt Rear of engine
(34-B-1500) compartment
bulkhead
between air
cleaners
5 CONTAINER, water, 5-gal, std On hull floor under

(64-C-281) chests
1 CRANK (engine) Right corner front
engine compart-
ment roof
1 EXTENSION, lubr., gun, hose type,
12-in. long (41-E-485-12)
if
TM 9-747
GeneraI
Quantity
per
3 FLASHLIGHT (17-F-13485) 2 in brackets in
driver's com-
partment, 1 in
brackets in
fighting com-
partment
1 GREASE, general purpose, No. 2, In gun chest
5-lb, w/container (14-G-1230-5 )
1 GUN, lubr., hand oper., 15-oz cap In tool bag
(41-G-1344-40)
3 KIT, first aid, motor vehicle, 12 unit 2 in bracket right
sponson, 1 in box
on left rear
fender
3 LAMP (spare for flashlight) (LM-35A) . . .In tool bag
1 NET, camouflage, 45 ft x 45 ft On gun tube be-
tween trunnion
caps
1 OILER, steel, dump, 9 in. spout, In bracket on floor
1 pt (13-0-900) of driver's com-
partment
10 OIL, engine, in container, 1 qt Right rear hull
compartment
2 PAULIN, 12 ft x 12 ft (24-P-29) On top of left shell
rack
1 STOVE, cooking, gasoline, 1 burner, In bracket under
consisting of: winch
Coleman, military burner, No. 520
w/accessory cups
1 TAPE, friction, 3/4-in. wide, 30-ft In tool bag
roll (17-T-805)
2 TUBE, flexible nozzle (42-T-13600)"
1 WIRE, steel, annealed, black, 14-ga.,

10-ft (22-W-1633-160)
h. Rations.
48 TYPE "K"—16 (2 days for 8 men) or Left front chest
96 TYPE "C"—16 (2 days for 8 men) Left rear chest
2 TYPE "D"—8 (1 day for 8 men) Left front chest

TM 9-747
Tools, Spate Paris, and Accessories
9. ON-VEHICLE SPARE PARTS.
Quantity
per
a. Spart Parts—Vehicle.
6 BLOCK, direct-vision (for driver's In box (B82340)
cupola) (B300790) left of driver
6 BOLT, center guide (T80 track) (7069543)In right front chest
4 BULB, lamp, 3 cp. 2,4—28 volts, In tool bag
M21251 (190877)
6 CAP, center guide (T80 track) (7069545) . In right front chest
6 CENTER, guide (T80 track) (7069549)
12 CONNECTOR, end (T80 track) (C139817)
3 FITTING, lubr., straight, Vs-in In tool bag
(504208)
4 HEAD (for periscope M6) (7669401) In box (D82340)
left of driver
2 PERISCOPE, M6 (22-331) In driver's com-
partment
b. Spare Parts—Gun.
8 LAMP, bulb (for telescope reticle In chest, light, M21
light) (A179389)
2 MECHANISM, firing, assembly, Ml In gun chest
(C70485)
3 PAD, gas check (obturator) (C70484)"
ii
TM 9-747
10-12
PART TWO—OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section IV
GENERAL
10. SCOPE.
o. Part Two contains information for guidance of personnel re-
sponsible for operation of this equipment. It contains information on
operation of equipment, with description and location of controls and
instruments.
Section V
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF EQUIPMENT
11. GENERAL.
a. Purpose. When a new or reconditioned vehicle is first received
at the using organization, it is necessary for second echelon personnel to
determine whether or not the vehicle will operate satisfactorily when
placed in service. For this purpose, inspect all accessories, subassem-
blies, assemblies, tools, and equipment to see that all are in place and
correctly adjusted. In addition, they will perform a run-in test of at
least 50 miles as directed in AR, 850-15, paragraph 25, table III,
according to procedures in paragraph 12 below.
b. Correction of Deficiencies. Deficiencies disclosed during the
course of the run-in test will be treated as follows:
(1) Correct any deficiencies within the scope of the maintenance
echelon of the using organization before the vehicle is placed in service.
( 2 ) Refer deficiencies beyond the scope of the maintenance echelon
of the using organization to a higher echelon for correction.
(3 ) Bring deficiencies of serious nature to the attention of the supply-
ing organization.
12. SPECIFIC PROCEDURES.
a. Preliminary Service.
(1) FIRE EXTINGUISHER. See that portable and fixed tanks are
fully charged, that tanks, lines, and nozzles are securely mounted, and
that all nozzles are properly aimed, and not clogged.
( 2 ) FUEL AND OIL. Check fuel in tank, and see that oil is at proper
level. If there is a tag attached to the tank filler cap concerning con-
tents, follow the instructions on the tag before starting the engine, when
item 22 is reached.
TM 9-747
12
Service Upon Receipt of Equipment
(3) BATTERIES. Make hydrometer test, and add clean water to
V2 inch above plates, if needed. Inspect terminal connections and bolts
to be sure they are clean and secure.
(4) AIR CLEANERS AND BREATHER CAPS. Examine crank-
case breather cap and carburetor air cleaners to see if they are in good
condition and secure. Remove oil cups, wash cup and elements in dry-
cleaning solvent, and refill reservoirs to proper depth with fresh engine
oil (par. 27). Be sure air ducts and air horn connections are tight.
(5 ) ACCESSORIES AND BELTS. See that accessories such as car-
buretor, magnetos, starting motor, generator, and filters are securely
mounted. See that generator belt is adjusted to Va-inch deflection
under finger-pressure. Remove silica gel bags from engine compart-
ment.
(6) ELECTRICAL WIRING. Examine all accessible wiring and
conduits to see if they are in good condition, securely connected, and
properly supported.
(7) TRACKS (TIRES, BLOCKS, CONNECTORS, WEDGES,
AND LOCK PINS). See that these items are in good condition, cor-
rectly assembled, and secure. On vehicles equipped with horizontal
volute springs, there should be no bulge in tracks between the idler
wheels and the rear suspension wheels. CAUTION: Do not adjust
tracks on vehicles equipped with horizontal volute springs too tightly.
(8) SPROCKETS, IDLERS, AND FLANGE NUTS. Examine
these items for good condition, proper assembly, and security.
(9) FENDERS. Examine fenders for good condition and secure
mounting.
(10) TOWING CONNECTIONS. Inspect pintle hook, cables, and
all connections for good condition and proper operation.
(11) SIDE AND BOTTOM ARMOR PLATE (ENTRANCE AND
ESCAPE HATCHES, DRAINS, PAINT, AND MARKING). Inspect
these items to see that armor plate is securely welded, that entrance
and escape hatches operate properly, and that they are well lubricated.
CAUTION: Do not fully open escape hatch latch during inspection.
See that hull drains open and close freely, that there are no bright spots
to cause glare or to rust, and that markings are legible.
(12) RAMPS, SPADE, AND WINCH. Inspect these items to see

that they are in good condition and that all attaching mechanism is
securely mounted. Examine the winch cables to see that they are not
frayed or worn and that the cables, sheaves and roller are properly
alined. Be sure the loading ramp slides freely when ramp is in lowered
position and that the locking pins hold ramp securely when in raised
position.
TM 9-747
12
Operating Instruct/ons
(13 ) GUN, TARPAULIN, AND BOWS. Be sure that all protective
tape and rust and corrosion material has been removed from gun and
mount. With gun traveling lock released test traversing and elevating
mechanism to see that it operates properly. Be sure to lock gun securely
in traveling lock after testing. If in use, see that bows are properly
mounted and that the tarpaulin is securely fastened, if not in use, tar-
paulin and bows must be properly stowed.
(14) VISION DEVICES. Be sure all protective tape has been re-
moved and see that periscopes are securely mounted in their holders,
and that spares are in good condition and properly stowed. CAUTION:
Prisms should be cleaned only with a soft cloth or brush.
(15) LUBRICATE. Perform a complete lubrication of the vehicle,
covering all intervals according to instructions on Lubrication Order,
paragraph 26, except gear case oil levels. Add oil to gear cases as neces-
sary to bring to correct levels. Change only if condition of oil indicates
the necessity, or if oil is not of proper grade for existing atmospheric
temperature. NOTE: Perform items (16) to (19) during lubrication.
(16) SPRINGS AND SUSPENSIONS. Inspect volute springs,
mounting brackets, suspension wheels, support wheels, and wheel tires
for looseness and damage. On vehicles equipped with horizontal volute
springs, inspect the shock absorbers, and see that the above items are
in good condition, correctly assembled, and securely mounted. See
that oil seals and gaskets are not leaking excessively.
(17) STEERING BRAKES. Apply the levers together and inde-
pendently; free travel should be 4 to 4 l/z inches, and levers should meet
resistance slightly before the vertical position. Check released position
of levers. Levers are correctly positioned when horizontal distance
from face of brake drum housing cover to front edge of lever is 7 to 7 Vi
inches. Examine the linkage and connections for good condition and
security.
(18) PROPELLER SHAFT, UNIVERSAL JOINTS, AND
VENTS. Inspect propeller shaft and universal joints to see that they
are in proper alinement, securely mounted, and that vents are present
and not clogged.
(19) ENGINE WARM-UP. Turn crank 50 times to check for
hydrostatic lock. Operate primer, if necessary, and start engine,

observing if starting motor has satisfactory speed and engages and

disengages properly. Set hand throttle to run engine at a fast idle.
(20) PRIMER. While starting engine, observe if primer action is
satisfactory, and look for leaks at pump or connections.
(21) INSTRUMENTS.
(a) Oil Pressure Cage. Engine oil pressure must be indicated
when engine is idling. Oil pressure must be 40 to 70 pounds at 1,800
to 2,400 revolutions per minute. Stop engine immediately when "low
oil" red light comes on.

TM 9-747
12-13
Service Upon Receipt of Equipment
(b) Ammeter. After starting, ammeter may show high charge
until current used in starting is restored to batteries; then, if battery
is full, and lights and accessories are turned off, a zero, or slight charge
reading is normal.
(c) Engine Oil Temperature Gage. Reading should rise gradually
during warm-up period, to normal range, which should not exceed
190°F. CAUTION: Do not move vehicle until temperature is 100°F
to 120°F as indicated by gage.
(d) Tachometer. Tachometer should register engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute, and record accumulating revolutions.
(e) Fuel Gage. Operate selector switch in relative position; gage
should indicate approximate amount of fuel in each tank. Ordinarily,
tanks will have been filled and gage should register "FULL."
(22) ENGINE CONTROLS. Observe whether or not engine
responds to hand throttle and accelerator promptly and properly, and
if there is excessive looseness or binding in controls.
(23) SIREN. Test siren for tone and operation.
(24) LAMPS (LIGHTS) AND REFLECTORS. Be sure all pro-
tective tape has been removed and observe whether or not all lights,
including blackout and stop lights, respond to the switches in both the
"OFF" and "ON" positions.
(25) LEAKS (GENERAL ). Examine the inside of engine compart-
ment and under vehicle, and check all accessible lines and seals for fuel
and oil leaks.
(26) TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT. Check tools and On-vehicle
Stowage List, section III, to be sure all items are present, and see that
they are serviceable and properly mounted or stowed.
13. RUN-IN TEST.
«. Perform the following procedures (1) to (10) inclusive, during
the road test of the vehicle. On vehicles which have been driven 50
miles or more in the course of the delivery from the supplying to the
using organization, reduce the length of the road test to the least mile-
age necessary to make observations listed below. CAUTION: Con-
tinuous operation of the engine at speeds approaching the maximum
indicated on the caution plate should be avoided during the test.
(1) DASH INSTRUMENT AND GAGES. Do not move vehicle

until engine oil temperature reaches 110°F. Observe readings of oil

pressure gage, ammeter, fuel gage, and tachometer to see if they register
the proper function of the units to which they apply. With the vehicle
in motion, the speedometer should register vehicle speed, and the
odometer should register accumulating mileage.
(2) BRAKES: STEERING AND PARKING. Steering brakes
must stop vehicle effectively with Va ratchet travel in reserve. With
25
TM 9-747
13
Operating Instructions
vehicle on incline, trip parking brake lock, depress clutch, and pull
back on brake levers. Parking brake must hold vehicle with V2 ratchet
travel in reserve and levers remain in applied position. Apply steering
brakes independently and notice whether or not they steer the vehicle
properly.
(3) CLUTCH. Clutch must not drag, and should engage without
unusual noise, grab, or chatter. Test clutch for slippage under load.
Pedal free travel should be approximately 13A inches. Shoe to release
bearing clearance should be Vs inch.
(4) TRANSMISSION. Gearshift mechanism should operate easily
without unusual noise, and not slip out of mesh.
(5) ENGINE. The engine must respond to controls, and have
maximum pulling power without unusual noise, stalling, overheating,
or exhaust smoke.
(6) UNUSUAL NOISES. Be on the alert continually for unusual
noises that would indicate looseness of tracks, bogies, sprockets, or idler
wheels.
(7) HALT VEHICLE AT 10-MILE INTERVALS FOR SERV-
ICES (8) AND (9) BELOW.
(8) TEMPERATURES. Place hand cautiously on each support
wheel and suspension wheel hub, to feel whether or not they are abnor-
mally hot. If wheel hubs are too hot to touch with the hand, bearings
may be inadequately lubricated, damaged, or improperly adjusted. On
vehicles equipped with horizontal spring suspension, shock absorbers
should feel warm when the vehicle is being operated. If shock absorb-
ers do not become warm during operation, it is an indication that the
fluid is low or that shock absorbers are not functioning. Check trans-
mission and final drives for overheating or excessive oil leaks.
(9) LEAKS. Inspect within engine and fighting compartments,
underneath the vehicle, and all visible lines, for fuel or oil leaks. Trace
any leaks to their sources, and remedy or report them.
(10) TRACK TENSION. Inspect tracks for satisfactory tension.
On vehicles equipped with horiontal volute springs, there should be no
track bulge between the idler wheels and rear suspension wheels, and
between the sprockets and the forward suspension wheels. CAUTION:
Tracks should not be adjusted too tightly on vehicles equipped with

horizontal volute springs. Be sure adjustment locking devices are

secure.
b. Vehicle Publications and Reports.
(1) PUBLICATIONS. See that vehicle technical manuals, Lubrica-
tion Order, Standard Form No. 26 (Driver's Report—Accident, Motor
Transportation) and W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 478 (MWO and Major
TM 9-747
13-14
Controls and Instruments
Unit Assembly Replacement Record), are in the vehicle, legible, and
properly stowed. NOTE: U.S.A. registration number and vehicle
nomenclature must be filled in on Form No. 478, for new vehicles.
(2 ) REPORTS. Upon completion of the run-in test, correct or report
any deficiencies found. Report general condition of the vehicle to
designated individual in authority.
Section VI
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
14. CONTROLS.
«. Fuel Shut-off Valves (fig. 3). Two fuel shut-off controls are
mounted on the right and left sides of the front bulkhead in the driver's
compartment. These controls are connected by linkage to the fuel shut-
off valves located near the bottom of the vertical fuel tanks in the engine
compartment. "OFF" and "ON" positions are indicated on the valve
handle flange.
6. Priming Pump. A plunger-type priming pump is bracket-
mounted to the final drive at the right, and in front of the driver. The
pump draws fuel from the fuel tank, and forces it to the primer distribu-
tor on the engine, where a charge of fuel is distributed to the top seven
cylinders to facilitate starting.
c. Hand Throttle. The push-pull type hand throttle is bracket-
mounted with the priming pump, and connected by a cable to an arm
on the cross shaft to control the carburetor throttle, which opens manu-
ally. The control button is equipped with a spring catch so that the
carburetor throttle opening can be set in a fixed position.
d. Foot Accelerator (fig. 4). The foot accelerator is mounted on
the subfloor to the right of the driver, and is connected by linkage to the
cross shaft, through which the carburetor throttle is regulated to control
the speed of the engine.
e. Clutch Pedal. The clutch pedal, which is mounted on the sub-
floor, is connected by adjustable linkage to the cross shaft, through
which the engine clutch can be disengaged to disconnect the engine
from the drive line when shifting gears. A linkage connection with the
accelerator allows the engine to idle more slowly than normal to reduce
gear clashing when shifting. The pedal is spring-loaded and will return
to the engaged position when foot pressure is relieved. An overcenter

(booster) spring is provided for easier operation of the clutch pedal.

/. Transmission Gearshift Lever. The gearshift lever is mounted
on the left rear side of the transmission. It is used to change gear ratios
in the transmission during operation of the vehicle. The lever is

i
i
2
n
u
I/I
14
TM 9-747
TM 9-747
14
ControIs and Imlrumenls
STEERING LEVER S
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
FOOT THROHLE PEDAL
RA PD 329245
Figure 4—Parking Brake Controls
equipped with a safety latch to prevent accidental shifting into first, or
reverse gear.
g. Steering Levers (fig. 4). Two hand-operated levers mounted on
the subfloor are connected by linkage to the brake shafts which operate
the brake shoes in the final drive. The right lever controls the right
track, and the left lever controls the left track. When one lever is pulled
back, the track is slowed down and the speed of the other track is in-
creased. The vehicle can be slowed down, or stopped, by pulling both
levers back simultaneously.
h. Parking Brakes (fig. 4). When the parking brake pedal is
kicked forward, the steering brake levers are held in any set position. To
release the parking brake, kick the pedal to the rear.
i. Battery Switches. The 24-volt and 12-volt battery switches are
located on the face of the master switch box which is mounted on the
forward end of the battery box on the left sponson. Operating instruc-
tions and identification information appear on the face of the switch
box.
j. Starter and Magneto Switch Assembly (fig. 5). This assembly
is located on the lower right corner of the instrument panel.

14
TM 9-747
i
i
I
I
I
I
!
t
r
z
o
o
T
8
u
2
u
$
1
O
O
Q
O
^
»i
to
UJ
UJ
UJ
3"
u_
Q-
ac
31
Ai
63
14
LU
TN
-Nl
OS
£n
TN!
^—
LU O
B— TNI
SWITNT-
TM 9-747
TOMETER
NKING MO"
. GAGE-B2C
FNT— G104-0.
Controlt and Instruments

TM 9-747
14
(1) The upper lever controls the magnetos, and is marked "OFF,"
"L" for left magneto, "R" for right magneto, and "BOTH" for both
magnetos.
(2) The lower levers, which are marked "BOOSTER" and
"STARTER," control the operation of the booster coil and the cranking
motor (starter) when starting the engine. NOTE: The booster is used
only with Scintilla magneto-equipped engines.
(3) Both switches are spring-loaded, and will return to the "OFF"
position when released. The booster switch is operated in conjunction
with the switch marked "STARTER" to produce sufficient ignition
during cranking to start the engine.
k. Fuel Cut-off Switch (fig. 5 ). The fuel cut-off switch is controlled
by a push button mounted on the lower center of the instrument panel.
It operates the idle cut-off (degasser) solenoid valve on the carburetor
to cut off the fuel to stop the engine.
I. Main Light Switch (fig. 5). The main light switch is mounted in
the upper right corner of the instrument panel. A safety button is pro-
vided to prevent accidental lighting of unwanted lights under certain
tactical maneuvers. The switch has five positions marked as follows:
"BO DR"—blackout driving light
"BO-MK"—blackout markers
"OFF"—off position
"STOP LT"—stop light (not used)
"HD LTS"—headlights
m. Panel Light Switch (fig. 5). This switch is located in the upper
left corner of the instrument panel and has an "OFF" position and four
positions from "DIM" to "BRIGHT," to control the indirect lighting of
the instrument panel and the compass.
n. Circuit Breakers (fig. 5). Circuit breakers are provided for the
various circuits of the vehicle to protect the wiring and equipment from
damage caused by grounds or short circuits. The circuit breakers are
mounted on the inside of the instrument panel, with five reset buttons
exposed at the upper center of the panel. Identification of the circuit is
plainly marked above each button.
o. Utility Outlet (fig. 5). An outlet is located at the upper left of
the instrument panel, and is protected from dirt and damage by a plug
latched into the bayonet-type socket. The outlet is used for connecting
windshield wipers, trouble lights, etc.
p. Emergency Stop Switch. An emergency stop switch is located
in the bulkhead terminal box and its function is to ground the magnetos
and bring the engine to an immediate stop.
12
TM 9-747
15
Controls and Instruments
15. INSTRUMENTS.
a. Fuel Gage (fig. 5). The fuel gage is mounted to the extreme
right of the group of gages in the center of the instrument panel. The
selector switch which connects the gage to the right or left fuel tanks is
mounted to the right of the gage. The gage will indicate the amount of
fuel in the right or left tanks, when the selector switch is turned to "R"
or "L" respectively.
b. Oil Pressure Gage (fig. 5 ). The oil pressure gage is mounted on
the instrument panel immediately to the right of the ammeter, and
records the oil pressure electrically through a varying resistance, con-
trolled by the engine oil pressure against the end of the oil pressure
sending unit, mounted in the oil passage on the engine.
c. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light (fig. 5 ). A ruby warning light
is located in the lower left corner of the instrument panel to indicate
low oil pressure. This light is connected to a switch-type sending unit
installed on the engine. When the 2 4-volt battery switch is turned on,
the low oil pressure warning light will burn until the engine starts and
oil pressure is built up. If the trouble exists in the oiling system, allow-
ing the oil pressure to drop, the warning light will burn.
d. Engine Oil Temperature Gage (fig. 5). The engine oil tem-
perature gage is mounted on the instrument panel between the oil pres-
sure and the fuel gages. This gage is marked in degrees Fahrenheit from
60 to 260, and indicates the temperature of the engine oil. The gage is
electrically operated by a resistance-type sending unit mounted on the
engine. The sending unit is actuated by the temperature of the engine
oil, and causes the gage to indicate the oil temperature.
e. Ammeter (fig. 5.) The ammeter is calibrated to a shunt located
in the battery switch box and reads directly in amperes on a zero center
scale. The scale is marked from 50 to 100 on each side of the center
zero. The figures are identified as negative (—) to the left of zero, and
positive ( + ) to the right of zero. The amount of charge ( + ) or dis-
charge(—) applied to the battery is indicated on the meter, depending
on the speed of the generator, condition of the batteries, or the number
of electrical accessories in use.
/. Speedometer (fig. 5 ). The speedometer is mounted on the lower
left face of the instrument panel. It indicates the speed of the vehicle
and records total miles and trip mileage. The speedometer is driven by
a cable mounted on an adapter in the transmission.
g. Tachometer (fig. 5). The tachometer is located on the lower
right face of the instrument panel. It indicates the revolutions per min-
ute, and also records the total revolutions of the engine when the clutch
is engaged. The tachometer is driven by a cable from an adapter con-
nected to the input shaft of the transmission.

TM 9-747
16
Operating Instructioiis
Section VII
OPERATION UNDER ORDINARY CONDITIONS
16. USE OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS IN VEHICULAR
OPERATION.
a. Service Upon Receipt of Equipment. Before a new or a recon-
ditioned vehicle is placed in service, be sure the new vehicle run-in test
described in paragraphs 11, 12 and 13 has been performed.
6. Be fore-operation Service. Perform the services in items 1 to 6
in paragraph 29 before attempting to start the engine. Start and warm
up engine (subpar. c below) and complete the Before-operation
Service.
c. Starting the Engine.
(1) If the engine is cold, or has stood for 6 hours or more, test for
hydrostatic lock before attempting to start the engine. Attempt to
crank the engine with hand crank. If the engine will not turn, refer to
paragraph 36.
(2 ) Place the gearshift lever in neutral.
(3) Place both the fuel shut-off valve controls on the bulkhead in
the "ON" position.
(4) Close the 24-volt battery switch.
( 5 ) Pull the hand throttle out about l/z inch.
(6) Pull the primer pump handle out slowly, and push it in briskly
several strokes to prime the engine. The number of strokes required will
depend on the temperature of the engine.
( 7 ) Depress the clutch pedal all the way down.
(8) Place the magneto switch in position marked "BOTH" (fig. 5).
(9) Press the switch handles (fig. 5) marked "STARTER" and
"BOOSTER" together to the "ON" position and hold them in this posi-
tion until the engine starts, but for not longer than 10 seconds. If the
engine fails to start, release the switches and allow the cranking motor
to cool, then pull the hand throttle all the way out, turn off the magneto
switch, and press the switch marked "STARTER." Crank the engine
several revolutions to eliminate the possibility of flooding or over-
priming and then attempt to start the engine again. After the engine has
started, operate the primer as required until the engine runs smoothly.
(10 ) Release the clutch pedal.

(11) Run the engine for 5 minutes at 800 revolutions per minute
and check the oil pressure gage. The oil pressure should be 40 pounds.
If the pressure does not come up immediately after the engine starts, or
M
TM 9-747
Operation Under Ordinary Condition,
16
RA PD 313295
Figure 6—Gearshift Lever Positions
does not show 40 pounds on the gage, stop the engine and report the
condition to higher authority. CAUTION: Do not rim the engine with
improper oil pressure.
(12) Increase the engine speed to 1,000 revolutions per minute and
note whether or not the oil pressure remains at 40 pounds. If the pres-
sure drops off when the speed is increased, reduce the speed and allow
the engine to warm up more thoroughly.
(13 ) When the engine is warmed up, try operating first on one mag-
neto and then on the other, by placing the magneto switch lever in "R"
and then "L" positions. CAUTION: Do not operate the engine on one
magneto for long periods. If the engine runs properly on the individual
magnetos, place the switch in the position marked "BOTH."
(14 ) Observe all instruments to see that they are indicating properly
(par. 15).
Operation of Vehicle.
(1) GENERAL. The engine is equipped with a governor to limit the
road speed of the vehicle in all gears as shown on the plate on the left
hull wall. CAUTION: Do not permit the vehicle to exceed these speeds
when driving down grade, to avoid damage to power train and engine.
TM 9-747
16
(2 ) PLACING VEHICLE IN FORWARD MOTION (fig. 6 ).
(a) With the engine running, release the parking brake, depress
the clutch pedal, and shift into second gear. NOTE: Under ordinary
driving conditions, such as over hard-surfaced roads, start in second
speed gear. However, if the vehicle is to be operated over obstacles,
rough or extremely soft terrain, or in confined areas, start in low-speed
gear.
(b) Engage the clutch gradually and, at the same time, depress the
accelerator pedal.
(c) Accelerate to governed speed, release the accelerator, dis-
engage the clutch, and shift to the third gear.
(d) Repeat this procedure through each shift to higher gears.
(3) REVERSING VEHICLE (fig. 6). Depress the latch button on
the end of the gearshift lever and shift to the reverse gear. Engage the
clutch gradually and, at the same time, depress the accelerator pedal.
(4) STOPPING THE VEHICLE. Release the accelerator and pull
back on both steering brake levers to slow the vehicle down to about
3 miles per hour. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into neutral. Kick
the parking brake pedal forward, and pull the steering brake levers
back as far as possible to hold the vehicle.
e. Stopping the Engine. If the engine is overheated or thoroughly
heated during operation, idle for 5 minutes at 800 revolutions per min-
ute and then press the fuel cut-off switch on the instrument panel. Hold
the switch closed until the engine stops, then turn the magneto switch
to the position marked "OFF." CAUTION: Do not stop the engine
with the magneto switch. Shut off the fuel valves and open the 24-volt
battery switch.
/. Driving Precautions.
(1) Shift to a lower gear, if the engine speed drops below 1,800
revolutions per minute, to avoid unnecessary strain on the engine and
drive line.
(2) Keep the power up when making a turn; shift to a lower gear if
necessary.
(3) Do not turn while climbing or just after shifting to a higher gear
without allowing the engine to regain speed, as a slight turn will reduce
vehicle speed.
(4) Shift to the proper gear before starting down grade, and do not
allow the engine to exceed 2,400 revolutions per minute.
(5) Remove the foot from the clutch when driving, except during
shifting. Do not disengage the clutch while going down grade, to avoid
losing control of the vehicle.

TM 9-747
16-18
Operation Under Unusual Conditions
(6) When driving into, or out of, a trench or ditch, select the proper
gear and allow the vehicle to settle gradually to the bottom and then
apply full power to drive out.
(7) When driving over an obstacle, select the proper gear and apply
sufficient power to negotiate the climb; then allow the vehicle to roll
gradually over the obstacle.
(8) Do not operate the vehicle at maximum speed except in an
emergency. Operate at maximum sustained speed of 21 miles per hour.
(9) Do not idle the engine at less than 800 revolutions per minute
except when shifting gears.
(10) Do not stop the engine by turning off the magneto switch. Press
the stop button and hold it until the engine stops; then turn off the
magneto switch.
17. TOWING THE VEHICLE.
a. General. Cables or tow bars can be attached to the towing lugs
mounted on the front and rear of the vehicle. If cables are used, a driver
must operate the steering brake levers in the vehicle being towed, to
steer and stop the towed vehicle as required.
6. Towing Precaution*.
(1) When using a cable, see that it does not become fouled with the
tracks.
(2) Do not tow a vehicle more than a few lengths without following
the preparation procedure described in subparagraph c below.
(3) If the tracks are off, use a tow bar if the vehicle is to be moved
more than a short distance.
c. Towing a Disabled Vehicle.
(1) If the vehicle is to be moved a considerable distance, block the
clutch pedal down with a piece of wood or remove the bolts from the
front universal joint companion flange, slide the universal joint and
generator drive pulley back as far as possible, and block the pulley
away from the companion flange. Place the gearshift lever in fifth gear
position. This will assure circulation of the lubricant and avoid damage
to the transmission and final drive.
(2) Start the towing vehicle in first gear and accelerate until both
vehicles are moving freely—then, and then only, shift to higher speeds.
(3 ) Do not tow a disabled vehicle above 12 miles per hour.

Section VIII
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
18. GENERAL.
o. This section of the manual contains information pertaining to the
operation of the vehicle under conditions which involve factors that do
not exist in usual operation.

TM 9-747
18-20
Operating Instrucfions
6. For further information, refer to FM 31-25, Desert Operation;
and FM 31-15, Operation in Snow and Extreme Cold.
19. SAISD, DEEP MUD, AND SLIPPERY TERRAIN.
a. Tracks and Suspension. Inspect volute springs, suspension
wheels and arms, track support rollers, pins, wedges, and track shoes for
worn or damaged parts. Remove all mud, ice, or sand which might cause
the tracks to be thrown, or damage to the suspension mechanism.
ft. Track Tension. Inspect track tension and adjust slack to Vz to
3/i-inch between track support rollers. Make sure that the track idler
apd adjusting mechanism are in good condition and locked securely.
c. Air Cleaners and Air Intake Tubes. Clean air cleaners more
frequently when operating under dusty conditions. Inspect all car-
buretor intake tubes and clamps; replace damaged tubes and clamps.
If the vehicle is camouflaged, be sure that the air inlet grille is not
covered or obstructed.
d. Lubrication. Check lubrication record and see that all points
are lubricated frequently in accordance with the Lubrication Order
(par. 26).
e. Operation of Vehicle. Select the proper gear for the existing
condition and operate the engine at a speed to insure a steady pull.
Make gear changes in accordance with the instruction plate on the left
hull wall, using the tachometer as a guide rather than the speedometer.
If the tank is equipped with rubber shoe tracks, install the grousers to
insure positive traction when needed.
20. COLD WEATHER OPERATION.
a. Fuel. Use winter grade gasoline procured under U. S. Army
Specifications 2-103 (grade C) latest issue. To reduce the possibility of
condensation forming ice in the fuel lines, add Va pint of grade 3 dena-
tured alcohol to each tank when filled.
h. Storage and Handling of Fuel.
(1) CONDENSATION. Rapid and extreme changes in temperature
cause condensation in fuel tanks and containers. Keep the fuel tanks
full when not in use to reduce the air space on top of the fuel, and to
avoid condensation of moisture in the air. Drain fuel tank sumps daily
to remove water and dirt.
(2) CLEANLINESS. Be sure all containers are clean. Before filling

vehicle fuel tanks from storage containers that have been moved, allow
the containers to set long enough so that any sediment in the fuel will
settle to the bottom. Clean all dirt, snow, and ice from and around the
fuel tank caps before removing them. Strain or filter the fuel when fill-
ing the tanks.

TM 9-747
20
Operation Under Unusual Conditions
(3) FIRE HAZARD. Keep containers closed and avoid exposure to
open flame when pouring or handling fuel. Fuel flowing over a surface
generates static electricity which will cause a spark. Keep the filler hose
or the container in good metallic contact with the hull when filling the
fuel tanks.
c. Lubrication.
(1) ENGINE OIL. Use SAE 30 engine oil for temperatures con-
sistently below 0°F. Three methods of keeping the engine oil suffi-
ciently fluid for proper starting below 0°F are listed below. Give prefer-
ence in the order listed according to available facilities:
(a) Keep Vehicle Warm. If possible, keep the vehicle in a heated
enclosure when it is not in operation.
(b) Remove Engine Oil. When the engine is stopped, drain the
engine oil and store it in a warm place until vehicle is to be operated
again. If warm storage is not available, heat oil before installing it
(subpar. e (1) below). CAUTION: Attach a tag to the vehicle instru-
ment panel to warn personnel that the engine oiling system is empty.
(c) Dilute Engine Oil.
1. Remove the oil level gage and check the oil level. Add 2*/2
pints of gasoline for each gallon of oil contained in the system, immedi-
ately after operation.
2. Run the engine 5 to 10 minutes to mix the oil and gasoline
thoroughly.
3. Stop the engine and remove the oil level gage. Note that the
oil level is above the level determined in step 1 above. Record the
amount of gasoline and oil contained in the system for future reference.
4. The presence of gasoline in the oiling system will increase oil
consumption; therefore, check the oil level frequently. Use SAE 30
engine oil to maintain the oil level during operation.
5. If the vehicle is operated 4 hours or more at operating tem-
perature, redilute the engine oil, if it is anticipated that the vehicle will
be left standing 5 hours or more, by following the same procedure out-
lined in steps 1 through 4 above.
(2) TRANSMISSION AND FINAL DRIVE. Use SAE 30 engine
oil for temperatures below 0°F. If the transmission and final drive con-
tains heavier engine oil (SAE 50), drain the unit immediately after
operation, while the oil is still warm, and refill with SAE 30 engine oil.
(3) TRACK SUPPORT ROLLERS, IDLER AND SUSPENSION
WHEELS. When operating in temperatures below 0°F, use No. 0
general purpose grease at intervals specified on the Lubrication Order
(par. 26).
TM 9-747
20
(4) ALL OTHER LUBRICATION POINTS. Use lubricants speci-
fied on the Lubrication Order (par 26).
d. Electrical System.
(1) BATTERIES. Do not try to start the engine when the batteries
have been chilled in temperatures below —30°F until the batteries
have been heated, unless warm slave batteries are available. A fully
charged battery will not freeze at temperatures likely to be encountered
even in arctic climates, but a discharged battery will freeze at temper-
atures above zero. Battery freezing temperatures are shown below:
Specific Freezing
Gravity Temperatures
1.160 +1.5°F
1.200 —17°F
1.240 —50°F
1.280 —96°F
Do not add water to the batteries unless they are immediately put on
charge, as the water will freeze on top of the plates.
(2) IGNITION. Make sure that all ignition wires are secure and not
damaged. Check the spark plugs frequently to see that they are clean
and adjust the gap to 0.017 to 0.019-inch. Replace if necessary. Test
booster coil (if so equipped) before cranking the engine by depressing
the booster switch on the instrument panel and listening for a buzzing
sound at the coil. Crank the engine with the magneto switch off. The
engine will fire unevenly on booster current if the coil is functioning.
(3) WIRING. Inspect, clean, and tighten all cable connections and
inspect all "AN" connectors to see that they are dry and properly
tightened.
e. Preparation for Starting and Operation.
(1) HEAT ENGINE OIL. If the engine oiling system has been
drained (subpar. c above), heat the engine oil before filling the system.
Do not allow the oil to get too hot; heat only to the degree that the bare
hand can be inserted in the oil without burning.
(2) CHANGE OIL IN AIR CLEANERS. Remove the engine oil in
the air cleaners and refill with hydraulic oil (U. S. Army Specification
No. 2-79A) for operation from 0°F to —40°F. For operation below
—40 °F, remove oil and operate dry.

(3) START ENGINE. Start the engine, as described in paragraph

16 c, with the clutch released to relieve the load of turning the trans-
mission with the cranking motor. Keep the engine compartment cover
on until the engine temperature rises.
(4) WARM UP LUBRICANT IN ENGINE AND TRANSMIS-
SION. When the engine runs smoothly at approximately 1,000 revolu-
40
TM 9-747
20-23
Demolition to Prevent Enemy Use
tions per minute, make sure the gearshift lever is in neutral, then en-
gage the clutch. Operate the engine until it is thoroughly warmed up.
This will actuate the pump in the transmission and circulate the lubri-
cant. When the transmission lubricant has been warmed sufficiently to
allow engagement of the gears, drive the vehicle in first gear for a short
distance to warm up the lubricant in the final drive. When gear changes
can be made normally, proceed to operate the vehicle in the usual
manner (par. 16 rf).
21. FLOOD AND SUBMERSION.
a. If it becomes necessary to ford streams, or unexpected flooding
occurs, move the vehicle to a higher level, and open all floor drain
valves. Dry out the interior of the tank and clean out all mud and sedi-
ment accumulation. Make a thorough inspection of wiring, ignition, and
fuel systems.
b. If such units as the engine, clutch, or electrical apparatus have
been obviously damaged, notify higher authority.
Section IX
DEMOLITION TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
22. GENERAL.
a. Destruction of the vehicle when subject to capture or abandon-
ment in the combat zone will be undertaken by the using arm only
when, in the judgment of the military commander concerned, such
action is necessary.
b. The instructions which follow are for information only. Certain
of the methods of destruction outlined require TNT and incendiary
grenades which may not be normal items of issue. The issue of these
materials, and the conditions under which destruction will be effected
are command decisions in each case, according to the tactical situation.
c. If destruction is resorted to, the vehicle must be so badly dam-
aged that it cannot be restored to a usable condition in the combat zone
either by repair or cannibalization. Adequate destruction requires that
all parts essential to the operation of the vehicle be destroyed or dam-
aged beyond repair. Equally important, the same essential parts must
be destroyed on all like vehicles so that the enemy cannot construct
one complete operating unit from several partially damaged ones.
23. DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS.

o. Methods. The following instructions apply to the 155-mm

Gun Motor Carriage T83 and 8-inch Howitzer Motor Carriage T89.
41
TM 9-747
23
6. Destruction of 155-mm Gun or 8-inch Howitzer.
(1) Place unfuzed M14 incendiary grenades on their sides, one on
top of another in the chamber. NOTE: Use six to eight grenades in
destroying the 155-mm gun and 10 to 12 grenades in destroying the
8-inch howitzer. Close the breech. Equip another incendiary grenade
with a 15-second Bickford fuze, ignite, and toss it in the muzzle. Quickly
elevate the gun to its maximum elevation. Elapsed time: 3 to 5 minutes.
(2) The metal from the grenades will fuze with the interior of the
breechblock, making it impossible to open the breech.
c. Destruction of Vehicle. Two methods of destroying the ve-
hicle are given below in their order of effectiveness.
(1) METHOD NO. 1—BY EXPLOSIVES.
(a) Remove and empty portable fire extinguishers. Discharge fixed
fire extinguisher system. Puncture the fuel tanks. Place a 3-pound TNT
charge against the right vertical fuel tank, between engine and bulk-
head. Place a 2-pound TNT charge against left side of transmission as
far forward as possible. Insert tetryl nonelectric caps with at least 5
feet of safety fuze in each charge. Ignite the fuzes and take cover.
(b) If sufficient time and materials are available, additional de-
struction may be accomplished by placing a 2-pound TNT charge at
about the center of each track assembly. Detonate these charges in the
same manner as the others.
(c) If charges are prepared beforehand and carried in the vehicle,
keep the caps and fuzes separated from the charges until used.
(2) METHOD NO. 2—BY GUN FIRE.
(a) Remove and empty the portable fire extinguishers. Discharge
fixed fire extinguishers. Puncture the fuel tanks. Open all tank doors
and hatches if time is available. Fire on the vehicle, using adjacent
tanks, antitank or other artillery, or antitank rockets or grenades. Aim
at the engine, suspension, and armament in the order named. If a good
fire is started, the vehicle may be considered destroyed.
(b) Destroy the last remaining vehicle by the best means available.
TM 9-747
24-25
PART THREE—MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section X
GENERAL
24. SCOPE.
a. Part Three contains information for the guidance of the per-
sonnel of the using organizations responsible for the maintenance (first
and second echelon) of this equipment. It contains information for the
performance of the scheduled lubrication and preventive maintenance
services, as well as description and maintenance of the major systems
and units and their functions in relation to other components of the
equipment.
Section XI
SPECIAL ORGANIZATIONAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
25. SPECIAL TOOLS.
a. Purpose. The list of tools in this section is for information only.
It is not to be used as a basis for requisition.
b. Special Tool List.
41-T-3568-345 Tool-set, 2nd echelon, special, set A, Tank, medium, M4, 75-mm
gun (dry); M4A1, 75-mm gun (dry) M4A1, 76-mm gun (wet);
Carriage, motor, 105-mm howitzer, M7; Carrier, cargo, M30; Car-
riage, motor, 155-mm gun, M12; Vehicle, tank recovery, M31;
M32; M32B1.
41-T-3569-345 Tool-set, 2nd echelon, special, set B, Tank, medium, M4, 75-mm
gun (dry); M4A1, 75-mm gun (dry); M4A1, 76-mm gun (wet);
Carriage, motor, 105-mm howitzer, M7; Carrier, cargo, M30; Car-
riage, motor, 155-mm gun; M12, Vehicle, tank recovery, M31;
M32; M32B1.
Federal Stock Mfr's. Tool Tod-
Name Number Number Setl
BAR, socket wrench, extension, 3/g-in.
sq drive, 3 in 41-B-304-800 SN-F-2 B
CABLE, extension, rubber covered, two
conductor, stranded, No. 1 gage, with
plug on each end 17-C-568 B-257839 A B
DISK, timing engine 41-D-1265-35 TEC-50-29 B
DRIVER, stud, *A in.—28 41-D-2984 MTM-M3-386 B
FIXTURE, removing and replacing, power

train assembly. (Use with 41-P-555-600

and 41-P-647) 41-F-2997-220 MTM-M3-165 B
4*
TM 9-747
25
Maintenance Instructions
Federal Stock
Name Number
Mfr's. Tool
Number
Tool.
Sets
GAGE, thickness, special, thickness 0.006
in. and 0.070 in., length 5-11/16 in.. . . 41-G-412-77
MTM-M3-563
NBM-NB-85
NBM-NB-70
HANDLE, socket wrench, speeder, brace
type, 3/s-in. sq drive, length 17 in. . . . 41-H-1507-95
HANDLE, socket wrench, T-sliding, Vs-in.
sq drive, length over-all 8 in 4 1-H- 1509-53
HOLDER, coupling 41-H-2269-200
TSE-5275
AB
INDICATOR, piston, top dead center,
dial type 41-1-73-110
MTM-M3-237
PIN, alining, tapered, bolt holes to power
train and hull, point diameter % in.,
over-all length 7 in. (Use with
41-F-2997-220) 41-P-555-600
MTM-M3-164
PIN, holding, tapered, power train as-
sembly, point diameter % in., length
over-all 7 in. (Use with 41-F-2997-220) 41-P-647
MTM-M3-163
MTM-M3-499
B
PLATE, lifting, clutch spindle and
cover assembly . 41-P-1542-200
POINTER, engine timing 41-P-2219-50
TEC-50-30
PULLER, magneto gear, screw type 41-P-2941-800
MTM-M3-231
SCREWDRIVER, valve clearance adjusting. 41-S-1725
SLING, battery lifting 41-S-3829-50
MTM-M3-239
SLING, engine 41-S-3832-19
MTM-M3-494
TOOL, dressing, breaker point, complete. . 41-T-3092-77
TSE-5229
MTM-M3-506
WRENCH, box, generator attaching,
V2-in., special 41-W-636-550
WRENCH, box, oil relief valve body check
nut and cap. (Formerly
41-W-1577-400) 41-W-636-620
MTM-M3-341
WRENCH, box (split), single end, double

TM 9-747
25
Special Organizational Fools and Equipment
Federal Stock Mfr's. Tool Tool-
Name Number Number Sets
Bar, socket wrench, extension, 8 in.
long, 1-in. sq drive 41-B-310 SN-L-63
Bar, socket wrench, sliding, 22-in 41-B-312-200 MTM-M3-16L
Handle, tubular, 36-in. long, IVs-in.
I.D. 1-7/16-in. O.D 41-H-1498-50 MTM-M3-16C
Head, square, 1-in. male 41-H-1779-50 MTM-M3-16E
Head, ratchet, socket wrench 1-in. sq
drive 41-H-1838 MTM-M3-16M
Wrench, socket, hex. 1-in. sq drive,
IVa-in 41-W-3058-200 MTM-M3-16J
1-13/16-in 41-W-3058-300 MTM-M3-16N
ZVi-in 41-W-3058-430 MTM-M3-16F
23/8-in 41-W-3058-450 MTM-M3-16H
25/8-in 41-W-3058-480 MTM-M3-16K
WRENCH, socket, (detachable), %-in. sq
drive, 12-point opening, size 7/16-in.,
universal joint. (Formerly
.41-W-2610-15.) 41-W-2999-90 IMC-101823 B
WRENCH, socket, .(detachable), %-in. sq
drive, 12-point opening, size Va-in.,
universal joint. (Formerly
41-W-2610-20.) 41-W-2999-120 IMC-101217 B
WRENCH, socket, tubular, single end, octa-
gon opening, size of opening l3/s-in.,
length 25/8-in 41-W-3126 MTM-M3-558 B
41-T-3569-175 Tool-set, 2nd echelon, special, set B, supplemental (for vehicles
having horizontal volute spring suspension).'
ADAPTER, removing and replacing suspen-
sion arm bushing and shock absorber
pins 41-A-18-298 B
ADAPTER, volute spring, removing 41-A-30-650 B

BLOCK, riser, bogie wheels 41-B-1411-200 B
LOCK, riser block, horizontal suspension 41-L-1616 B
REPLACES, bearing cups, inner bogie and
13-in. idler wheels, inner and outer
10-in. idler wheels 41-R-2384-965 B
REPLACES, bearing cups, track rollers
(inner and outer) 41-R-2385-350 B
WRENCH, pipe, chain, flat link, pipe ca-
pacity 5/g-in. to 4V2-in., length I'/g-in. 41-W-1781-100 TEC-50-54 B
45
TM 9-747
26-27
Section XII
LUBRICATION
26. LUBRICATION ORDER.
a. Reproduction of War Department Lubrication Order 9-747
(figs. 7 and 8) prescribes first and second echelon lubrication main-
tenance above 0°F. For lubrication below 0°F, refer to paragraph 20.
Lubrication to be performed by ordnance maintenance personnel is
covered in paragraph 27.
b. A Lubrication Order is issued with each item of materiel and
is to be carried with it at all times. In the event the materiel is received
without a copy, the using arm shall immediately requisition a replace-
ment from the closest Adjutant General Depot. See lists in FM 21-6.
c. Instructions on the Lubrication Order are binding on all echelons
of maintenance and there shall be no deviations.
d. Service intervals specified on the Lubrication Order are for
normal operating conditions during active service above 0°F. These
intervals will be reduced under extreme conditions such as excessively
high or low temperatures, prolonged periods of high-speed operation,
continued operation in sand or dust, immersion in water, or exposure
to moisture, any one of which may quickly destroy the protective
qualities of the lubricant. Calendar intervals may be extended when
the materiel is not in use.
e. Lubricants are prescribed in the "Key" in accordance with three
temperature ranges, above +32°F, +32°F to 0°F, and below 0°F.
When to change grades of lubricants is determined by maintaining a
close check on operation of the materiel during the approach to change-
over periods, especially during initial action. Sluggish starting is an
indication of lubricants thickening, and the signal to change to grades
prescribed for the next lower temperature range. Ordinarily it will be
necessary to change grades of lubricants only when air temperatures
are consistently in the next higher or lower range.
27. DETAILED LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS.
a. Lubrication Equipment. Each piece of materiel is supplied
with lubrication equipment adequate to maintain the materiel. This
equipment will be cleaned both before and after use. Lubrication guns
will be operated carefully, and in such a manner as to insure a proper

distribution of the lubricant.

6. Points of Application.
(1) Lubrication fittings, grease cups, oilers, and oilholes are readily
located by reference to the Lubrication Order. Wipe these devices and

TM 9-747
27
Lubrication
the surrounding surfaces clean before lubricant is applied.
(2) Where relief valves are provided, apply new lubricant until
the old lubricant is forced from the vent. Exceptions are specified in
notes on the Lubrication Order.
c. Cleaning. Dry-cleaning solvent or diesel fuel oil will be used to
clean or wash all parts. Use of gasoline for this purpose is prohibited.
After washing, parts will be thoroughly dried before applying lubricant
(For exceptions see gun bore note).
d. Lubrication Notes on Individual Units and Parts (figs. 7 and
8)- .
(1) AIR CLEANERS AND BREATHERS.
(a) Oil Bath Type. Fill oil reservoir to bead level. Every 500 miles,
remove and wash all parts. Replace and refill.
(b) Mesh Type. Wash, dry, and reoil the elements of the crankcase
breather and the transmission, differential, and final drive breather at
intervals indicated on the Lubrication Order. Drain excess oil thor-
oughly before reinstalling.
(2) CLUTCH PILOT AND HUB BEARINGS. When the engine
is removed, clean and repack bearings.
(3) CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING. When the engine is removed,
remove plug, install fitting, and lubricate. Replace plug after lubricating.
(4) GEAR CASES. Weekly, before operation, check the level with
vehicle on level ground and, if necessary, add lubricant to the full
mark. Fill through transmission filler to mark on bayonet gage with
fill cap resting on top of fill pipe. Every 3,000 miles, drain and refill.
Drain only after operation when gear lubricant is warm. The trans-
mission, differential, and final drives are combined in one unit. Drain
through transmission differential and final drive drain plug holes. To
completely drain transmission lubrication system, also remove oil cooler
drain plugs.
(5 ) ENGINE OIL TANK. Check level before operation. Every 500
miles, drain and refill. Drain only after operation when oil is hot. Refill
to full mark on bayonet gage located under fill cap.
(6) WINCH CABLE. After each use, clean and oil. Weekly, if cable
has not been used, coat outer coils. Monthly, unwind entire cable, clean
and oil.
( 7 ) EQUILIBRATOR CASE AND PLUNGER. To lubricate, place

gun at 0 degree elevation, unscrew cover from front of equilibrator, and
slide toward narrow end of case. Wipe all surfaces and apply a thin
film of lubricant to all exposed parts including outer surface of both
plunger and case.
(8) BREECH AND FIRING MECHANISM. Immediately after
firing and on 3 consecutive days thereafter, disassemble the gas check

27
TM 9-747
i
I
I
27
"IlMi!
1! spi
TM 9-747
lubrication
27
TM 9-747
51
27
TM 9-747
lubrication
TM 9-747
27
pad from the obturator spindle and clean all parts of the breech and
firing mechanism, except the gas check pad, with bore-sponging solu-
tion. Rinse with clear water, dry thoroughly, and apply a film of oil.
Daily, when the gun is not being fired, clean with dry-cleaning solvent,
wipe dry, and oil. When disassembled, the gas check pad will be wiped
clean (do not use dry-cleaning solvent or bore-sponging solution).
Apply thin film of engine oil (SAE 30) or SAE 10 for all temperatures
below+32 °F.
(9) GUN BORE.
(a) Before firing, wipe clean and dry.
(b) Immediately after firing, while the tube is still hot, swab with
a bore-sponging solution consisting of Vi pound of soda-ash to each
gallon of warm water. Rinse thoroughly with clean water, wipe thor-
oughly dry, and apply a film of oil. The gun will not be allowed to re-
main after firing without cleaning. Repeat this procedure on 3 con-
secutive days thereafter or until there is no longer evidence of sweating.
(c) Daily when the gun is not being fired, wipe the bore clean and
renew the oil film. Every 5 days, swab with dry-cleaning solvent, wipe
thoroughly dry, and reoil.
(10) OILCAN POINTS.
(a) Every 250 miles, lubricate door hinges and latches, control
lever bushings, control rod pins and clevises, clutch and accelerator
pedals and control shaft bearings, seat slides and supports, cable
sheaves, cable roller, spade arm linkage, and pintle.
(b) Weekly, lubricate handwheel handles and other rubbing parts.
(11) POINTS REQUIRING NO LUBRICATION. Do not lubricate
bogie wheels suspension linkage and slides, final drive sprocket bear-
ings, starter, or clutch throw-out yoke bearings.
(12) TO BE DISASSEMBLED PERIODICALLY BY ORD-
NANCE PERSONNEL:
(a) Generator. When disessembled for repair or overhaul, clean
and repack bearings with ball and roller bearing grease.
(b) Magnetos. When disassembled for repair or overhaul, clean
and repack bearings with ball and roller bearing grease.
(c) Equilibrator Guide Bearings. Every 6 months, disassemble,
clean, and lubricate with special lubricating grease.

(d) Cradle Trunnion Bearings. Every 6 months, disassemble, clean,

and lubricate with special lubricating grease.
(e) Counterbalance. Every 6 months, disessemble, wash all parts,
and coat cylinder, piston, piston rod threads, and cylinder head threads
with special lubricating grease.
52
TM 9-747
27-28
Preventive Maintenance Services
(f) Variable Recoil Gears. Every 6 months, remove gear housing
cover, clean, and lubricate with general purpose grease.
(g) Traversing Gear Handwheel Shaft Bearing. When disas-
sembled for inspection or overhaul, clean and repack with special
lubricating grease.
(h) Traversing Gear Pinion Shaft Lower Bearing. When travers-
ing gear box is disassembled for inspection and overhaul, clean and re-
pack the bearing with special lubricating grease.
(i) Elevating Mechanism. When disassembled for inspection or
overhaul, wash all parts, dry thoroughly, and repack roller bearings
of the elevating pinion shaft and ball bearings of the brake drum gear
shaft with special lubricating grease. Apply thin film of No. 0 general
purpose grease to all gear teeth and the brake shoe guide bushings,
being careful to wipe off all excess lubricant that might reach the brake
drum or brake shoe. Fill grease grooves in clutch mechanism with
light graphited grease.
e. Reports and Records.
(1) Report unsatisfactory performance of materiel to the Ord-
nance Officer responsible for maintenance in accordance with TM
38-250.
(2) A record of lubrication may be maintained in the Duty Roster
(W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 6).
Section XIII
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SERVICES
28. GENERAL INFORMATION.
a. Responsibility and Interval. Preventive maintenance serv-
ices as prescribed by AR 850-15 are a function of using organization
echelons of maintenance, and their performance is the responsibility
of the commanders of such organizations. These services consist gen-
erally of before, during, at-halt, after-operation, and weekly services
performed by the crew, and the scheduled services to be performed at
designated intervals by organizational maintenance personnel.
6. Definition of Terms. The general inspection of each item
applies also to any supporting member or connection, and is generally
a check to see whether the item is in good condition, correctly assem-
bled, secure, or excessively worn.

(1) The inspection for "good condition" is usually an external visual

inspection to determine whether the unit is damaged beyond safe or
serviceable limits. The term "good condition" is explained further by
53
TM 9-747
28-30
Maintenance instructions
the following: Not bent or twisted, not chafed or burned, not broken
or cracked, not bare or frayed, not dented or collapsed, not torn or cut,
not deteriorated.
(2) The inspection of a unit to see that it is "correctly assembled" is
usually an external visual inspection to see whether it is in its normal
assembled position in the vehicle.
(3) The inspection of a unit to determine if it is "secure" is usually
an external visual examination; a wrench, hand-feel, or a pry-bar
check for looseness. Such an inspection must include any brackets,
lock washers, lock nuts, locking wires, or cotter pins used in assembly.
(4) "Excessively worn" will be understood to mean worn beyond
serviceable limits, or to a point likely to result in failure if the unit is
not replaced before the next scheduled inspection.
29. CREW MAINTENANCE (FIRST ECHELON)
a. Purpose. To insure mechanical efficiency it is necessary that
the vehicle be systematically inspected at intervals each day it is op-
erated and weekly, so defects may be discovered and corrected before
they result in serious damage or failure. Certain scheduled maintenance
services will be performed at these designated intervals. Any defects
or unsatisfactory operating characteristics beyond the scope of first
echelon to correct must be reported at the earliest opportunity to the
designated individual in authority. The services set forth in paragraphs
30, 31, 32, and 33 are those performed by the crew before operation,
during operation, at halt, and after operation and weekly.
b. Use of W.D. Form No. 48. Driver preventive maintenance
services are listed on the back of "Driver's Trip Ticket and Preventive
Maintenance Service Record" W.D., Form No. 48, to cover vehicles of
all types and models. Items peculiar to this vehicle but not listed on
W.D., Form No. 48, are covered in manual procedures under the items
with which they are related. Certain items listed on the form that do
not pertain to this vehicle are eliminated from the procedures as written
into the manual. Every organization must thoroughly school each crew
in performing the maintenance procedures set forth in this manual,
whether they are listed specifically on W.D., Form No. 48 or not. The
items listed on W.D., Form No. 48 that apply to this vehicle are ex-
panded in this manual to provide specific procedures for accomplish-

ment of the inspections and services. The services are arranged to

facilitate inspection and conserve the time of the crew and are not
necessarily in the same numerical order as shown on W.D., Form No.
48. The item numbers, however, are identical with those shown on
that form.
30. BEFORE-OPERATION SERVICE.
a. Purpose. This inspection schedule is designed primarily as a
check to see that the vehicle has not been damaged, tampered with, or
TM 9-747
30
sabotaged since the "After-operation Service" was performed. Various
combat conditions may have rendered the vehicle unsafe for operation
and it is the duty of the crew to determine whether the vehicle is in
condition to carry out any mission to which it is assigned. This opera-
tion will not be entirely omitted, even in extreme tactical situations.
b. Procedures. Before-operation Service consists of inspecting
items listed below according to the procedure described, and correcting
or reporting any deficiencies. Upon completion of the service, results
will be reported promptly to the designated individual in authority.
(1) ITEM 1, TAMPERING AND DAMAGE. Examine entire
vehicle, special equipment and armament, for any damage that may
have occurred from falling debris, shell fire, sabotage or collision since
parking. Check within engine and fighting compartments for above
conditions and disconnected wiring or control linkage, loose drive
belts and fuel or oil lines.
(2) ITEM 2, FIRE EXTINGUSHERS. Examine visible fixed ex-
tinguisher lines and nozzles in engine compartment for security, dam-
age, and correct aiming. Check portable and fixed extinguisher cylin-
ders for good condition, security and full charge.
(3) ITEM 3, FUEL AND OIL. Check supply of fuel and oil level
in transmission and final drive; add as necessary. Check oil level in
engine supply tank; add to correct level if necessary. Any appreciable
change in level since After-operation Service should be investigated
and reported.
(4) ITEM 4, ACCESSORIES AND DRIVES. Inspect carburetor,
generator, starting motor and blower unit for looseness or damage. Be
sure generator drive belts are in good condition and adjusted to have
V2 inch finger pressure deflection.
(5) ITEM 6, LEAKS—GENERAL. Check under vehicle and in
engine compartment for any indications of fuel or oil leaks. Inspect
engine accessory mountings, oil filter, visible portions of oil coolers and
oil and fuel lines for indications of leaks. Trace all leaks to their source
and correct or report them.
(6) ITEM 8, PRIMER. As engine is being started, observe if
primer functions satisfactorily and inspect for loose lines or brackets
and traces of leaks.

(7) ITEM 7, ENGINE WARM-UP. Test for hydrostatic lock by

hand cranking method (minimum test 50 revolutions with hand crank).
Turn on master battery switch and fuel valves and start engine. Note
action of starting mechanism, particularly whether starter has adequate
cranking speed and engages and disengages properly without unusual
noise. If oil pressure is not indicated immediately, stop engine and cor-
rect or report trouble. Set hand throttle so engine will idle at 800 revolu-
TM 9-747
30
tions per minute during warm-up, see that throttle operates freely and
then proceed with following Before-operation Services.
(8) ITEM 9, INSTRUMENTS.
(a) Oil Pressure Gage. Engine oil pressure must be indicated
when engine is idling and 40 to 70 pounds at 1,800 to 2,400 revolutions
per minute. Stop engine immediately when "low oil" red light comes on.
(b) Ammeter. The ammeter may show high charge until gen-
erator has restored to battery the current used in starting the engine;
then continue to register slight charge or zero with lights and acces-
sories turned off.
(c) Tachometer and Revolution Counter. Tachometer should
register engine revolutions per minute and revolution counter should
register accumulating revolutions.
(d) Engine Oil Temperature Gage. Operating temperature as
shown by gage should not exceed 190 °F and should show 100 to 120°F
before vehicle is moved.
(e) Fuel Gage. Gage should register amount of fuel in tanks. Use
selector switch to check the amount of fuel in each tank. Normally,
tanks will be full before operation and gage should register full.
(9) ITEM 10, SIREN AND WINDSHIELD WIPERS. If tactical
situation permits, test siren for proper operation and tone. When used,
inspect wiper blades and arms to see that they are in good condition
and secure. Start wiper motors and observe if the blades operate
through their full stroke and contact surfaces evenly.
(10) ITEM 11, GLASS. Clean all vision device glass and inspect
for damage.
(11) ITEM 12, LIGHTS. Clean all lights and examine for loose-
ness and damage. If tactical situation permits, operate all switches and
observe if lamps respond satisfactorily.
(12 ) ITEM 13, WHEEL AND FLANGE NUTS. See that all drive
sprocket, idler wheel, bogie wheel and support roller assembly and
mounting nuts are present and secure.
(13) ITEM 14, TRACKS AND TIRES. While inspecting tracks
for damage and loose connections, remove all stones and foreign ob-
jects from between blocks and tracks and wheels and rollers. See that
all support and suspension wheel tires are in good condition and check
track tension. On vehicles equipped with horizontal volute springs,

there should be no bulge in track between idler wheels and rear sus-
pension wheels or between the sprocket and forward suspension wheels.
(14) ITEM 15, SPRINGS AND SUSPENSIONS. Examine to
see that volute springs and all bogie suspension units are in good con-
dition and secure. On vehicles with horizontal suspension, see that
shock absorbers are secure and not leaking.

TM 9-747
30-31
(15 ) ITEM 16, STEERING BRAKE LINKAGE. Inspect linkage
for good condition, secure connections and mountings and free opera-
tion. Pull levers back to see whether they meet resistance evenly,
slightly before vertical position. Levers released are correctly posi-
tioned when the horizontal distance from face of brake drum housing
cover to front edge of lever is 7 to 71/2 inches.
(16) ITEM 17, FENDERS. Inspect to see that fenders are in good
condition and securely mounted.
(17) ITEM 18, TOWING CONNECTIONS. See that tow loops
are in good condition and securely shackled. Inspect pintle hook for
good condition, secure mounting and proper operation.
(18) ITEM 19, HULL, RAMP, WINCH AND TARPAULIN. In-
spect hull for damage, broken welds, loose attachments and proper
operation of entrance and escape hatches. Examine winch cables,
sheaves and roller to see that they are in good condition and securely
mounted. Be sure ramp is securely locked if in raised position. If in
use, be sure tarpaulin bows are properly mounted and tarpaulin se-
curely lashed; if not in use, tarpaulin must be securely stowed.
(19) ITEM 20, DECONTAMINATORS. Examine decontami-
nators for closed valves, full charge and secure mountings.
(20) ITEM 21, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT. Check tools and
equipment to see that all items are present, in good condition, and
properly mounted or stowed.
(21) ITEM 22, ENGINE OPERATION. Engine should idle
smoothly at 500 revolutions per minute. Accelerate engine several times
after it has reached normal temperature, (8) (d) above, and note any
unusual noises, unsatisfactory operating characteristics, or excessive
exhaust smoke.
(22) ITEM 23, DRIVER'S PERMIT, FORM NO. 26. Driver
must have his operator's permit on his person. Accident-Report Form
No. 26, vehicle manual, Lubrication Order and WJD., A.G.O. Form No.
478, must be present, legible and safely stowed.
31. DURING-OPERATION SERVICE.
a. Observations. While vehicle is in motion, listen for any
sounds such as rattles, knocks, squeals, or hums that may indicate
trouble. Look for smoke from any part of the vehicle. Be alert for odors
indicating overheated components or units (such as generator, brakes,

or clutch) leaks in fuel system or exhaust system, or other trouble.
When brakes are used, gears shifted, or the vehicle turned, consider
this a test and note any unsatisfactory or unusual performance. Watch
the instruments constantly for unusual behavior indicating possible
trouble in systems to which they apply.
57
TM 9-747
31-32
b. Procedures. During-operation Services consist of observing
items listed below according to the procedures following each item,
and investigating any indications of serious trouble. Note minor de-
ficiencies to be corrected or reported at earliest opportunity, usually
the next scheduled halt.
(1) ITEM 26, STEERING BRAKES. With vehicle in motion,
apply each brake independently. Observe if there is normal response
without excessive pull or lever travel. Disengage clutch, apply both
levers and observe if brakes stop vehicle effectively, meeting resistance
slightly before vertical position.
(2) ITEM 27, PARKING BRAKE. Stop vehicle on a reasonable
incline and apply parking brake lock to see if brakes hold satisfactorily
and lock holds levers securely in the applied position.
(3) ITEM 28, CLUTCH. Clutch release mechanism should op-
erate freely without excessive noise. Clutch should not grab, chatter or
squeal upon engagement and should not slip under load when fully
engaged. Pedal free travel should be maintained at approximately
1% inches.
(4) ITEM 29, TRANSMISSION. Transmission should shift into
all gear ranges easily without unusual noise and should not slip out of
mesh during operation. Be on the alert for any unusual noise during
operation.
(5) ITEM 31, ENGINE AND CONTROLS. Driver should be on
the alert for deficiencies in engine performance such as lack of power
and acceleration, misfiring, backfiring, unusual noise or indication of
overheating or excessive smoke. Observe whether or not engine ac-
celerates satisfactorily and controls operate without excessive loose-
ness or binding. If radio noise during operation of vehicle is reported,
driver will cooperate with radio operator in locating the interference.
( 6 ) ITEM 32, INSTRUMENTS. Observe the readings of all perti-
nent instruments frequently during operation, to see whether they are
indicating proper function of units to which they apply, and that
speedometer registers vehicle speed and records accumulating mileage.
(7) ITEM 34, RUNNING GEAR. Listen for any unusual noise
from tracks, wheels, rollers, bogie wheels and final drives that might
indicate looseness, damage, excessive wear or inadequate lubrication.

32. AT-HALT SERVICE.

a. Importance. At-halt Services may be regarded as minimum
maintenance procedures, and should be performed under all tactical
conditions even though more extensive maintenance services must be
slighted or omitted altogether.
6. Procedures. At-halt Services consist of investigating any de-
M
TM 9-747
32
ficiencies noted during operation, inspecting items listed below ac-
cording to the procedures following the items, and correcting any
deficiencies found. Deficiencies not corrected should be reported
promptly to the designated individual in authority.
(1) ITEM 38, FUEL AND OIL SUPPLY. Make sure that there
is adequate fuel and oil to operate vehicle to next scheduled stop; re-
plenish as supply and tactical situation permits.
(2) ITEM 39, TEMPERATURES (HUBS, TRANSMISSION,
FINAL DRIVE AND, WHEN SO EQUIPPED, SHOCK ABSORB-
ERS). Place hand cautiously on each track wheel and track support
roller hub to see whether they are abnormally hot. If wheel hubs are
too hot to touch with the hand, bearings may be inadequately lubri-
cated, damaged or improperly adjusted. Check the transmission and
final drives for overheating or excessive oil leaks. On vehicles equipped
with horizontal spring suspension, shock absorbers should feel warm.
If the shock absorbers do not become warm when the vehicle is being
operated, it is an indication that the fluid is low or the shock absorber is
not functioning.
(3) ITEM 40, VENTS. Examine vents of transmission and final
drives to see that they are present and not damaged or clogged.
(4) ITEM 42, SPRINGS AND SUSPENSIONS. Inspect these
items for looseness or damage. Remove stones and other foreign objects
embedded in suspension system or between tracks.
(5) ITEM 43, STEERING BRAKE LINKAGE. Inspect linkage
for looseness or damage and investigate any irregularities noted during
operation.
(6) ITEM 44, WHEEL AND FLANGE NUTS. See that all
sprocket, idler and bogie wheel and support roller assembly and
mounting nuts are present and secure.
(7) ITEM 45, TRACKS. Examine tracks, bogie wheels, tires and
idlers to see that they are secure and not damaged. Make sure that
track tension is satisfactory. Clean out stones and trash from track
links and connectors.
(8) ITEM 46, LEAKS—GENERAL. Inspect generally for indi-
cations of fuel and oil leaks. See whether there are any indications of
leaks in gear case, oil tank, oil cooler, filter or lines. Trace any leaks to
their source and correct or report them.

(9) ITEM 47, ACCESSORIES AND BELTS. Examine engine ac-
cessories, blower and attachments to be sure they are secure, properly
alined and that generator drive belts are in good condition and tension
satisfactory. Belts should have Vi inch deflection under normal finger
pressure. If radio noise caused by operation of the engine was observed,
examine all wiring harness and coupling rings and nuts; engine, regu-
59
TM 9-747
32-33
lator and master switch bonding straps and regulator filters for dam-
age and loose connections and mountings.
(10) ITEM 48, AIR CLEANERS. When operating under ex-
tremely dusty or sandy conditions, inspect air cleaners and breather
caps at each halt to see that they are in condition to deliver clean air
properly; service as required.
(11) ITEM 49, FENDERS. Inspect fenders for good condition and
secure mounting.
(12) ITEM 50, TOWING CONNECTIONS. Inspect pintle hook
for good condition, secure mounting and proper operation.
(13) ITEM 51, HULL, RAMP, WINCH AND TARPAULIN.
Inspect these items for damage or loose attachments. If in use, be sure
tarpaulin is securely lashed, or if not in use, securely stowed.
(14) ITEM 52, GLASS. Clean all vision devices and light lenses;
inspect these items for damage and security.
33. AFTER-OPERATION AND WEEKLY SERVICE.
a. Purpose. After-operation servicing is particularly important
because at this time the crew inspects the vehicle to detect any de-
ficiencies that may have developed, and to correct those they are per-
mitted to handle. They should promptly report results of the inspection
to the designated individual in authority. If this schedule is performed
thoroughly, the vehicle should be ready to roll again on a moment's
notice. The Before-operation Service, with few exceptions, is then
necessary only to ascertain whether the vehicle is in the same condi-
tion in which it was left upon completion of the After-operation Service.
The After-operation Service should never be entirely omitted, even in
extreme tactical situations, but may be reduced to the bare fundamental
services outlined for the At-halt Service, if necessary.
6. Procedures. When performing the After-operation Service
the crew must remember and consider any irregularities noticed in the
Before-operation, During-operation, and At-halt Services. The After-
operation Service consists of inspecting and servicing the following
items. Those items of the After-operation Service that are marked by
an asterisk ( * ) require additional Weekly Services, the procedures for
which are indicated in subparagraph (b) of each applicable item.
(1) ITEM 55, ENGINE OPERATION. Accelerate and decelerate

the engine and note any tendency to miss or backfire or any unusual
noise or vibration that might indicate worn parts, loose mountings,
incorrect fuel mixture or faulty ignition. Investigate any deficiencies
noted during operation and correct or report same.
(2) ITEM 56, INSTRUMENTS. Check all pertinent instruments
to be sure they are operating properly and continue to register or in-

TM 9-747
33
dicate correct performance of units to which they apply. Inspect them
for looseness or damage. Stop engine.
(3) ITEM 54, FUEL AND OIL SUPPLY. Refill both fuel tanks.
Check oil level in engine supply tank and fill to correct level. CAU-
TION: Do not fill fuel and oil tanks to overflowing; allow room for ex-
pansion. See that any fuel or oil used from spare supply cans is re-
plenished.
(4) ITEM 57, SIREN AND WINDSHIELD WIPERS. If tactical
situation permits, test siren for proper operation and tone. If in use, see
that windshield wipers operate properly and inspect blades and arms
for good condition and security.
(5) ITEM 58, GLASS. Clean all vision devices and inspect for
damage.
(6) ITEM 59, LIGHTS. Clean all light lenses and examine for
broken parts and security of mounting. Turn on switches to see that all
lamps operate.
(7) ITEM 60, FIRE EXTINGUISHERS. Inspect visible lines
and nozzles and all cylinders, fixed and portable, to see that they are
in good condition, secure and not leaking. If extinguishers have been
used or valve opened, report for exchange or refill.
(8) ITEM 61, DECONTAMINATORS. Inspect decontaminators
for damage and security of mounting.
(9) ITEM 61, ^BATTERIES.
(a) Inspect batteries for leaks or damage and security of mounting
and connections.
(b) Weekly. Clean batteries and carrier and inspect for loose or
corroded terminals. If terminals are corroded, remove, clean and apply
a thin film of grease. Add clean water to bring level to Va inch above
cell plates. NOTE: In freezing temperatures, do not add water until
just before vehicle is to be operated.
(10 ) ITEM 63, * ACCESSORIES.
(a) Examine all accessible items in engine compartment and
blower unit to see that they are in good condition, clean and secure.
Check generator drive belt tension; they should have Va-inch finger
pressure deflection.
(b) Weekly. Inspect all accessible units mounted on engine ac-

cessory case for looseness, damage and oil leaks at mounting pads.
Clean out all insects or trash from in and around oil cooler core air
passages.
(11) ITEM 64, ELECTRIC WIRING. Examine conduits for
looseness or damage. Tighten all loose connections and clean all acces-
sible wiring. Be sure all radio noise suppression bond clips, straps, filters,
TM 9-747
33
condensers and suppressors are securely connected or mounted (pars.
131 to 136). Tighten wiring conduit coupling ring nuts.
(12) ITEM 65, AIR CLEANERS AND BREATHER CAP. In-
spect to see that air cleaner and breather cap are in good condition, se-
curely mounted and connected. Examine for excessive dirt and proper
oil level and service as necessary, according to paragraphs 26 and 27
in Lubrication Order.
(13) ITEM 66, FUEL FILTER. Inspect to see that main fuel
filter is secure and not leaking. (The filter location is such that com-
plete inspection is possible only after engine has been removed.)
(14) ITEM 67, ENGINE CONTROLS. Inspect accelerator, hand
throttle and fuel shut-off controls for excessive wear and disconnected
linkage.
(15) ITEM 68, TRACKS AND TIRES. Examine tracks for dam-
age, dead blocks and loose or worn connections. Remove all stones or
foreign objects from between blocks and tracks and wheels and rollers.
Inspect all support and suspension wheel tires to see that they are not
cut, torn or loose on the wheels. Inspect tracks for loose lock pins and
satisfactory track tension, there should be no track bulge between the
idler wheels and rear suspension wheels and between the sprockets
and forward suspension wheels. CAUTION: Do not adjust tracks on
vehicles equipped with horizontal volute springs too tight.
(16) ITEM 69, SPRINGS AND SUSPENSION. Inspect volute
springs to see that they are in good condition and properly assembled.
See that all mounting bolts are secure and that support and suspension
rollers are not damaged or excessively worn. Examine shock absorbers
for loose mountings, worn bushings or leaks.
(17) ITEM 70, STEERING BRAKE LINKAGE. Inspect levers,
linkage and cross shafts for good condition, security, adequate lubrica-
tion and free operation. Investigate any unsatisfactory performance
noticed during operation. Steering levers should have 1 to 4Vi inches
of free travel and meet resistance slightly before the vertical position.
Check released position of levers. Levers are correctly positioned when
horizontal distance from face of brake drum housing covers to front
edge of lever is 7 to 7 l/z inches.
(18) ITEM 71, PROPELLER SHAFT (WEEKLY ONLY). Ex-

amine shaft and universal joints to see that they are in good condition,
secure and that joints are not leaking.
(19) ITEM 72, * VENTS.
(a) Inspect transmission and final drive vents to see that they are
in good condition, secure and not clogged.
(b) Weekly. Remove vents, clean thoroughly and install se-
curely.
U
TM 9-747
33
(20) ITEM 73, LEAKS—GENERAL. Inspect all fuel and oil
lines, connections, tanks, coolers, transmission and final drive for indi-
cation of leaks. Trace any leaks found to their source and correct or
report them.
(21) ITEM 76, FENDERS. Inspect fenders to be sure they are
securely mounted and not damaged.
(22 ) ITEM 77, TOWING CONNECTIONS. Be sure towing loops
are in good condition and securely shackled. Examine pintle hook for
good condition and proper operation.
( 23 ) ITEM 78, HULL, RAMP, WINCH AND TARPAULIN. Ex-
amine hull for broken welds or loose attachments. Test action of spade
and ramp winch to be sure it operates properly. Inspect winch cable
for worn spots or frayed strands. When ramp is in lowered position, be
sure spade contacts the ground securely. When ramp is in raised po-
sition, see that it locks securely. Examine tarpaulin and bows to see
that they are in good condition and stow them properly.
(24) ITEM 79, ARMOR. Examine armor, and gun mount shields
for fractures or damage that would render vehicle unsafe for combat
duty.
(25) ITEM 80, VISION DEVICES. Inspect the periscope prisms
and windows to see that they are in good condition, clean and secure in
holders. CAUTION: Prisms should be cleaned only with a soft cloth
or brush.
(26) ITEM 81, GUN: MOUNTING, ELEVATING AND TRAV-
ERSING CONTROLS. Be sure that gun is secure on its mount, clean,
lightly oiled and in condition for immediate use. Test gun elevating
mechanism and controls for proper operation. Be sure that traversing
mechanism is in good condition and operates satisfactorily. Correct or
report to designated authority any deficiencies noticed during operation.
(27) ITEM 82, "-TIGHTEN.
(a) Tighten any unit mountings and assembly nuts or screws
where inspection has indicated the necessity.
(b) Weekly. Tighten sprocket and idler flange nuts, track con-
nector wedge nuts, universal joint flange, gun mounts, tool and equip-
ment mountings, ammunition racks and clips or any other item where
inspection or experience indicated the necessity on a weekly or mileage

basis.
(28) ITEM 83, ""LUBRICATION.
(a) Oil or grease escape hatch hinges and locking devices, com-
partment door hinges and latches, tow shackles and any other point
of vehicle where inspection has indicated that it is necessary.

TM 9-747
33-34
Maintenance: Instructions
(b) Weekly. Lubricate all points of the vehicle indicated on the
Lubrication Order as necessary on a weekly basis.
(29) ITEM 84, "CLEAN ENGINE AND VEHICLE.
(a) Remove all empty shell casings and refuse from interior of
vehicle. Wipe up oil or fuel drippings from driving compartment, and
engine compartment. Remove excess dirt, stones and grease from
tracks and suspension. See that engine compartment grilles are clear
of obstructions.
(b) Weekly. Wash exterior of vehicle and remove all dirt and
mud. If washing is impractical, wipe as clean as possible and watch for
bright spots that would cause glare. Open engine compartment and
wipe out all excess dirt. If compressed air is available, blow all dirt
out of cylinder cooling fins and oil cooler core air passages.
(30) ITEM 85, ""TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT.
(a) Check vehicle tools and equipment stowage lists, section III,
to be sure all items are present and see that they are in serviceable con-
dition and properly stowed or mounted.
(b) Weekly. Clean tools and equipment; mount or stow securely
in proper location on, or in vehicle.
34. ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE
(SECOND ECHELON).
a. Frequency. The frequency of preventive maintenance serv-
ices outlined herein is considered a minimum requirement for normal
operation of vehicles. Under unusual operating conditions such as
extreme temperatures, severe dust, sandy or extremely wet terrain, it
may be necessary to perform certain maintenance services more
frequently.
b. First Echelon Participation. The crew should accompany
their vehicle and assist the mechanics while periodic second echelon
preventive maintenance services are performed. Ordinarily the vehicle
should be presented for a scheduled preventive maintenance service in
a reasonably clean condition; that is, it should be dry, and not caked
with mud or grease to such an extent that inspection and servicing will
be seriously hampered. However, the vehicle should not be washed or
wiped thoroughly clean, because certain types of defects, such as cracks,
leaks, and loose or shifted parts or assemblies, are more evident if the
surfaces are slightly soiled or dusty.

c. Sources of Additional Information. If instructions other than
those contained in the general procedures in subparagraph d, or the
specific procedures in subparagraph t, which follow, are required for
proper performance of a preventive maintenance service or for correc-
tion of a deficiency, they may be secured from other sections of this
manual or from the designated individual in authority.
M
TM 9-747
34
d. General Procedures. These general procedures are basic in-
structions which are to be followed when performing the services on the
items listed in the specific procedures. NOTE: The second echelon
personnel must be thoroughly trained in these procedures so that they
will apply them automatically.
(1) When new or overhauled subassemblies are installed to correct
deficiencies, care must be taken to see that they are clean, correctly
installed, and properly lubricated and adjusted.
(2) When installing new lubricant retainer seals, a coating of the
lubricant should be wiped over the sealing surface of the lip of the
seal. When the new seal is a leather seal, it should be soaked in SAE 10
engine oil at least 30 minutes. The oil should be warm, if practicable.
Then, the leather lip should be worked carefully by hand before install-
ing the seal. The lip must not be scratched or marred.
e. Definition of Terms. Refer to paragraph 28 b.
f. Special Services. These are indicated by repeating the item
numbers in the columns which show the interval at which the services
are to be performed and show that the parts or assemblies are to receive
certain mandatory services. For example, an item number in one or
both columns opposite a TIGHTEN procedure, means that the actual
tightening of the object must be performed. The special services
include:
(1) ADJUST. Make all necessary adjustments in accordance with
the pertinent section of this manual, special bulletins, or other current
directives.
(2) CLEAN. Clean units of the vehicle with dry-cleaning solvent to
remove excess lubricant, dirt, and other foreign material. After the
parts are cleaned, rinse them in clean solvent and dry them thoroughly.
Take care to keep the parts clean until reassembled and be certain to
keep cleaning solvent away from rubber or other material which it
will damage. Clean the protective grease coating from new parts since
this material is usually not a good lubricant.
(3) SPECIAL LUBRICATION. This applies both to lubrication
operations that do not appear on the vehicle Lubrication Order and to
items that do appear on the Order, but which should be performed in
connection with the maintenance operations if parts have to be disas-

sembled for inspection or service.

(4) SERVE. This usually consists of performing special operations,
such as replenishing battery water, draining and refilling units with oil,
and changing or cleaning the oil filter, air cleaner, or cartridges.
( 5 ) TIGHTEN. All tightening operations should be performed with
sufficient wrench torque (force on the wrench handle) to tighten the
unit according to good mechanical practice. Use a torque-indicating
wrench where specified. Do not overtighten, as this may strip threads

TM 9-747
34
or cause distortion. Tightening will always be understood to include
the correct installation of lock washers, lock nuts, lock wire, or cotter
pins provided to secure the tightening.
g. Special Conditions. When conditions make it difficult to per-
form all preventive maintenance procedures at one time, they can
sometimes be handled in sections, planning to complete all operations
within the week if possible. All available time at halts and in bivouac
areas must be utilized, if necessary, to assure that maintenance opera-
tions are completed. When time is limited by the tactical situation,
items with Special Services in the columns should be given first con-
sideration.
h. Work Sheet. The numbers of the preventive maintenance pro-
cedures that follow are identical with those outlined on WJD., A.G.O.
Form No. 462, which is the "Preventive Maintenance Service Work
Sheet for Full Track and Tank-like Wheeled Vehicles." Certain items
on the work sheet that do not apply to this vehicle are not included
in the procedures in this manual. In general, the numerical sequence of
items on the work sheet is followed in the manual procedures, but in
some instances there is deviation for conservation of the mechanic's
time and effort.
i. Specific Procedures. The procedures for performing each item
in semimonthly and monthly maintenance procedures, are described
in the following chart. Each page of the chart has two columns at its
left edge corresponding to the monthly and the semimonthly main-
tenance respectively. Very often it will be found that a particular pro-
cedure does not apply to both scheduled maintenances. In order to de-
termine which procedure to follow, look down the column correspond-
ing to the maintenance due, and wherever an item number appears,
perform the operations indicated opposite the number. NOTE: Those
procedures preceded by an asterisk ( * ) require additional services at
each third monthly operation.
ROAD TEST
MAINTENANCE
Mwthl»
2
Semi
NOTE: When the tactical situation does not permit a
full road test, perform those items which require little
""" * or no movement of the vehicle. When a road test is pos-
sible, it should be preferably for 3 miles, but not over 5
miles.
BEFORE-OPERATION SERVICE. Perform the Be-
fore-operation Service as outlined in paragraph 29.
INSTRUMENTS AND GAGES. Check these items as
follows:
Oil Pressure Gage. Engine oil pressure must be indicated
when engine is idling, and 40 to 70 pounds at 1,800 to
66
TM 9-747
34
MAINTENANCE
2,400 revolutions per minute. Continue to observe oil
MMttly
Semi-
Minthly
pressure throughout test at various speed ranges. Stop
engine immediately when "LOW OIL" red light comes on.
Engine Oil Temperature Gage. Gage reading should in-
crease gradually during engine warm-up and should not
exceed 190°F. Vehicle should not be moved before oil
temperature is 100cFto 120°F.
Ammeter. With a fully charged battery, ammeter read-
ing should show high charge for only a short time after
starting engine, then slightly above zero with all lights
and electrical accessories turned off. If battery charge
is low, ammeter will indicate higher charge for a longer
period of time.
Speedometer and Odometer. Inspect speedometer for
proper miles per hour reading, excessive fluctuation of
hand, or unsual noises. See that odometer registers
accumulating revolutions.
Tachometer and Revolution Counter. Inspect tachometer
for proper reading, without excessive hand fluctuation or
unusual noise. See that revolution counter registers
accumulating revolutions.
Fuel Gage. Operate selector switch to both "R" and "L"
positions and observe whether fuel gage indicates approxi-
mate amount of fuel in each tank.
WINDSHIELD, WINDSHIELD WIPER AND SIREN.
If windshield is in use, inspect assembly and wipers to
see that they are in good condition and secure, and that
wiper blades move through their full stroke and contact
surface evenly. Test siren for operation and tone, and
inspect for good condition and secure mounting.

5
BRAKES (STEERING AND PARKING, LEVERS,
BRAKING EFFECT AND STEERING ACTION).
With vehicle stopped, pull back on steering brake levers.
If brakes are properly adjusted, levers should meet heavy
resistance slightly before a vertical position. Accelerate
vehicle to a moderate speed, release accelerator and dis-
engage clutch, apply both steering brakes, and observe
whether they stop the vehicle properly. Apply steering
brakes independently to see that they steer vehicle
properly. Apply parking brake lock with vehicle stopped
on reasonable incline; it should hold vehicle effectively,
and lock securely in applied position. Observe released

TM 9-747
34
MAINTENANCE
position of steering levers. Levers are correctly positioned
Ninthly
Semi-
Monthly
when horizontal distance from face of brake drum hous-
ing cover to front edge of lever is 7 to 7 Vi inches.
CLUTCH (FREE TRAVEL, DRAG, NOISE, GRAB,
CHATTER AND SLIP). Test pedal for correct free
travel, approximately 1% inches (par. 98 6). Clutch
should not drag, and should engage without unusual noise,
grab, or chatter. Test clutch for slippage under load, when
fully engaged.
TRANSMISSION (LEVER ACTION, VIBRATION
AND NOISE). Shift through each speed range of trans-
mission. Observe whether control lever operates properly
and whether there are any unusual vibrations or noise
in any speed range that might indicate damage, excessive
wear, loose mountings, or improper lubrication.
ENGINE (IDLE, ACCELERATION, POWER, NOISE,
SMOKE AND OIL CONSUMPTION).
Idle. With the vehicle stopped, observe if engine runs
smoothly at normal idling speed of 500 revolutions per
minute. Throughout road test, observe whether there is
any tendency of engine to stall when accelerator is re-
leased and hand throttle closed.
Acceleration, Power, Vibration and Noise. Test engine
for normal acceleration and pulling power in each
speed range. While testing in high range, accelerate engine
from low speed with wide open throttle to top speed and
listen for unusual engine noise, ping, or vibration that

might indicate loose, damaged, excessively worn, or inade-
quately lubricated engine parts or accessories. Governed
engine speed should be approximately 2400 revolutions
per minute. During road test, look for excessive smoke
from exhaust or engine compartment.
Oil Consumption. At completion of road test, a check
should be made to see if engine has been consuming an
excessive amount of oil.
10
10
UNUSUAL NOISE (PROPELLER SHAFTS AND
U- JOINTS, FINAL DRIVES, SPROCKETS, IDLERS,
BOGIE WHEELS, SUPPORT ROLLERS AND
TRACKS ) . During road test, listen for any unusual noise
in any of the above mentioned items indicating damaged,
defective or loose parts, or inadequate lubrication.
11
11
TEMPERATURES. (TRANSMISSION, DIFFEREN-
TIAL, FINAL DRIVE, HUB AND, WHEN SO
EQUIPPED, SHOCK ABSORBERS). Place hand cau-
68
TM 9-747
34
Preventive Maintenance Servicei
tiously on each track wheel and track support roller hub
to see whether they are abnormally hot. If wheel hubs
are too hot to touch with the hand, bearings may be inade-
quately lubricated, damaged or improperly adjusted.
Check the transmission and final drives for overheating or
excessive oil leaks. Shock absorbers should feel warm. If
the shock absorbers do not become warm when the vehicle
is being operated, it is an indication that the fluid is low
or the shock absorber is not functioning.
GUN ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING MECHA-
NISM. Traverse gun through its full range and check
for binding, excessive lash, or erratic action. Test gun
elevating controls to see if they operate and all mecha-
nism responds properly.
LEAKS (ENGINE OIL AND FUEL). Look in engine
compartment and under vehicle for indications of oil or
fuel leaks. Examine all visible oil lines and connections
for leaks.
NOISE AND VIBRATIONS (ENGINE, MOUNT-
INGS, ACCESSORIES, CLUTCH AND EXHAUST).
While accelerating and decelerating engine, listen for
unusual noise in engine or accessories. Notice whether
there is excessive vibration that may indicate loose engine
mountings or noise that may indicate loose or inade-
quately lubricated clutch parts or release bearings.
TRACK TENSION. Inspect tracks for satisfactory ten-
sion. There should be no track bulge between idle wheels
and the rear suspension wheels and the sprocket and the
forward suspension wheels. CAUTION: Do not adjust
tracks on vehicles with horizontal volute springs too
tight (par. 117).
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
FUEL PUMP TEST. Attach a fuel pump test gage to
fuel line to carburetor, and with engine running at idling
speed, determine whether the pressure is within the
specified limits, approximately 3Vi pounds (par. 73).

SIDE ARMOR (FENDERS, GUARDS, PAINT AND

MARKINGS, TOW SHACKLES AND PINTLE AND
HORN). Examine vehicle for damage to side armor,
fenders, and guards from shell fire or collision; check for
broken welds. Look for rust or bright spots in paint that
might cause reflections. See that all vehicle markings are
MAINTENANCE
Monthly
Semi-
MontNly
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
18
18
69
TM 9-747
34
legible. Examine towing shackles and pintle to see that
they are in good condition and securely mounted. Test
siren for proper operation and tone.
BOTTOM (ARMOR, ESCAPE HATCH, INSPEC-
TION PLATE AND DRAIN PLUGS). Inspect hull
bottom for damage. See that escape hatch latch operates
properly and is adequately lubricated and see that all
drain plugs are tight. Apply a few drops of oil to escape
hatch latches. CAUTION: Do not fully open escape
hatch latch.
DIFFERENTIAL AND FINAL DRIVES. Inspect hous-
ings to see that they are in good condition and not leak-
ing; check lubricant level. See that all assembly and
mounting bolts are secure. NOTE: // change of lubri-
cant is due, drain and refill with specified oil at this time.
Tighten. Tighten all external assembly and mounting
bolts securely.
TRACK (BLOCKS, LINKS, CONNECTORS, AND
WEDGES). Inspect tracks to see that these items are in
good condition, correctly assembled, and secure. Pay
particular attention to loose connectors; bottomed
wedges, and dead blocks. Tighten wedge nuts.
:;:NOTE: Whenever the tracks are disconnected and
removed from the sprockets, support rollers, and idlers, or
at each third monthly maintenance service, the related
items 22 and 25 marked by an asterisk (*) on the Pre-
ventive Maintenance Service Work Sheet, W.D., A.G.O.
Form No. 462, should be inspected as described below in
the asterisk-marked procedures. On the regular semi-
monthly to monthly maintenance services the tracks
should not be removed unless repairs are needed. CAU-
TION: Whenever tracks are removed for repair or re-
placement, do not reinstall tracks until the services fol-
lowed by the asterisk (*) in items 22 and 25 have been
completed.
IDLER (WHEELS, ARMS, GUIDE PLATES, AD-

JUSTMENT AND LOCK NUTS AND SPRINGS).

Inspect these items to see that they are in good condition,
correctly assembled, secure, and that grease is not leak-
ing excessively from wheel bearing seals. Be sure adjust-
ing nut and adjusting pin nut are secure. Tighten all
assembly and mounting bolts and nuts securely.
*NOTE: In addition to the above, at each third monthly
maintenance service or whenever the tracks are removed
from the idlers, check the idler hub bearings for looseness
MAINTENANCE
Monthly
Semi-
monthly
19
19
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
22
70
TM 9-747
34
MAINTENANCE
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
27
Semi-
23
24
25
26
27
or end p/ay. Spin the idler wheels and listen for any
unusual noise that might indicate a damaged, excessively
worn or inadequately lubricated bearing.
BOGIE (LEVERS, ARMS, LINKS, GUDGEONS, COL-
LARS AND GUIDES, VOLUTE SPRINGS AND
SEATS, FRAMES AND WEARING PLATES). Inspect
to see that these items are in good condition, correctly
assembled and secure, and that gudgeons, collars, guides
and wearing plates are not excessively worn. Note
whether volute springs have taken a permanent set (9
inches between spring seats). Those conditions will be
considered a standard for replacement (par. 123).
Tighten. Tighten all assembly and mounting nuts or
screws securely.
WHEELS (TIRES, ROLLERS AND SKIDS). Inspect
these items to see that they are in good condition, correct-
ly assembled and securely mounted. Pay particular atten-
tion to see that tire rubber has not separated from rim
and that tires are not cut, torn or excessively worn. In-
spect for excessive lubricant leaks from bearings.
Jack up bogie wheels and examine bearings for looseness

and end play. Spin wheels and listen for any unusual noise.
Tighten assembly and mounting bolts securely.
SPROCKETS (HUBS, TEETH, AND NUTS). Examine
sprockets to see that they are in good condition, correctly
assembled and securely mounted. Inspect sprocket teeth
for excessive wear and shaft flange gaskets, or oil seals for
excessive lubricant leaks. If sprocket teeth are excessively
worn, sprocket should be replaced or reversed. Tighten
assembly and mounting bolts securely.
*NOTE: In addition to the above, at each third monthly
operation, or whenever the track is disconnected and re-
moved from the sprocket, check the sprocket teeth for
excessive wear and see that sprockets are secure. Check
the sprocket hub bearings for looseness and end play.
After performing the above, reinstall the tracks and con-
nect them securely.
TRACK TENSION. Inspect tracks for satisfactory ten-
sion. There should be no track bulge between the idler
wheels and rear suspension wheels and between the
sprockets and the forward suspension wheels. CAUTION:
Do not adjust tracks too tight on vehicles equipped with
horizontal volute springs.
TOP ARMOR (RAMP, WINCH, DECK, PAINT AND
MARKINGS, GRILLES, DOORS, HATCHES,
n
TM 9-747
34
MAINTENANCE
LATCHES, AND ANTENNA MAST). Inspect these
Mo.thly
Semi-
Monthly
items to see that they are in good condition and secure.
See that hatch, door, grille and hatch hinges and latches
operate properly, are not excessively worn, and are ade-
quately lubricated, and that grilles are not obstructed.
Be sure that the winch raises and lowers the ramp and
spade properly, and that ramp extension slides freely and
ramp support operates properly. Examine winch cables
for worn spots or frayed strands, and cable sheaves and
rollers for correct alinement and operation. Examine
paint for rust spots or polished surfaces that may cause
reflections and see that vehicle markings are legible.
28
28
CAPS AND GASKETS (FUEL TANK). Inspect to see
that these items are in good condition, secure and not
leaking. Be sure gaskets are in place and serviceable.
30
ENGINE REMOVAL (WHEN REQUIRED). Remove
engine on monthly maintenance service, only if inspec-
tions made in Items 6, 9, 13, and 14, and a check of records
on oil consumption indicated definite need.
CAUTION: Be sure the magnetos are grounded when
removing engine.
30
30
Clean. Clean exterior of engine and dry thoroughly, tak-
ing care to keep dry-cleaning solvent away from electrical
wiring, terminal boxes, and equipment.
31
VALVE MECHANISM (CLEARANCE, LUBRICA-
TION, ROCKER BOXES, AND PUSH ROD HOUS-

ING). NOTE: Perform Item 31 only when engine is

removed from the vehicle. Adjust valve clearance to
0.006 inch cold; also inspect valve tappets, rocker arms
and shafts, and valve springs to see that they are in good
condition, correctly assembled, and secure and that oil
is going to rocker arms and shafts properly. Inspect rocker
arms and shafts for excessive wear and rocker arm rollers
for flat spots. Inspect rocker box covers to see that they
are in good condition and gaskets are serviceable. See
that push rods are in good condition.
32
SPARK PLUGS. Remove spark plugs. Examine insu-
lators for cracks or breaks and electrodes for excessive
burning and wide gaps. Adjust and/or replace plugs with
gaps in excess of 0.017 to 0.019 inch. Be sure to install
new gaskets and do not over-tighten plugs.
34
34
GENERATORS AND STARTING MOTOR. Inspect
these items to see that they are in good condition and
securely mounted. Make sure wiring connections are

TM 9-747
34
secure. Inspect generator drive belts to see that they are
in good condition and properly adjusted to have V2 inch
finger-pressure deflection.
Serve. Remove commutator inspection covers and
examine commutators to see that they are in good condi-
tion. See that brushes are free in brush holders, clean,
and not excessively worn; that brush connections are
secure and that wires are not broken or chafing. Clean
commutator ends of generator and starter by blowing
out with compressed air. Tighten starter and generator
mounting bolts securely.
MAGNETOS. See that magnetos are in good condition
and securely mounted, and note whether there is evidence
of oil leaks at mounting pad gaskets. Remove breaker
point inspection covers to see that points are not pitted,
are clean and well alined with mating surfaces and are
engaging squarely.
Adjust. Adjust magneto breaker point gaps to 0.008 to
0.010 inch (par. 64).
MAGNETO TIMING. Check and set ignition timing
according to instructions in paragraph 64 c (3).
IGNITION WIRING AND CONDUITS. Inspect all
ignition wiring and conduits, particularly radio noise sup-
pression shielding from magnetos to spark plugs and in-
strument panel. See that shielding is in good condition,
clean, properly and securely connected and supported
so as not to chafe against other parts. Wipe all exposed
wiring clean with a dry cloth. NOTE: Do not disturb
connections unless actually loose.
BOOSTER COIL. Examine booster coil and conduits to
see that they are in good condition, clean and securely
mounted.
ENGINE (OIL PUMPS, SUMP, OIL SCREENS AND
LINES, ACCESSORY CASE, CRANKCASE, FUEL
SCREENS AND LINES, AND CONTROL LINK-
AGE). Inspect to see that these items are in good con-

dition and secure, and that oil is not leaking from oil
pumps, sump, lines, accessory case or crankcase. Inspect
fuel lines to engine for leaks. Remove oil pump screens,
clean them thoroughly in dry-cleaning solvent, dry, and
reinstall. See Lubrication Order (par. 26 and 27).
Serve. Drain off oil from the engine sump. Tighten
accessible assemblies and mounting bolts and screws se-
curely.
MAINTENANCE
Monthly
Semi-
Montkly
34
37
37
37
67
38
38
39
39
40
40
40
73
TM 9-747
34
Maintenance Instruction:
MAINTENANCE
42
43
44
45
46
46
47
Semi-
Monthly
42
43
44
45
46
47
BREATHER CAP. Inspect crankcase breather cap to
see that it is in good condition, securely mounted and not
leaking. Remove the cleaner element, wash in dry-clean-
ing solvent, dry, reoil and reinstall. See Lubrication Order
pars. 26 and 27).
AIR CLEANERS (CARBURETOR). Inspect air
cleaner parts to see if they are in good condition. Clean
the reservoirs and elements in dry-cleaning solvent and
drain. Fill reservoirs to correct level with clean or used
engine oil. Reassemble cleaners, making certain all gas-
kets are in good condition and in place; give special at-
tention when mounting to see that cleaners are pressed
firmly in place against air horn seals and that cleaners
are securely fastened.
CARBURETOR (THROTTLE LINKAGE, GOV-
ERNOR, AND PRIMER). Inspect unit to see that it
is in good condition, correctly assembled and securely
mounted. See that carburetor does not leak, that throttle
control linkage is not excessively worn and operates
freely, and that governor is properly sealed. Also, make

sure that lines of priming system are in good condition,

secure and not leaking. Remove screen from carburetor
fuel inlet, clean in dry-cleaning solvent, dry, and reinstall,
stall.
MANIFOLDS (INTAKE AND EXHAUST). Inspect
to see that manifolds and gaskets are in good condition,
correctly assembled, and secure. Tighten intake pipes at
their flanges, clamps, and gland-packing nuts. Check for
indications of leaks by looking for excessive carbon
streaks.
CYLINDERS. Inspect to see that cylinders are in good
condition and secure, and note whether there are indica-
tions of oil leakage or blow-by around studs or gaskets.
Inspect cylinders to see whether the cooling fins are
clogged. CAUTION: Cylinder hold-down nuts should not
be tightened, unless there is a definite indication of loose-
ness or leaks. If tightening is necessary, use a torque
indicating wrench and tighten to 30 foot-pounds tension.
Clean. Clean excess deposits of dirt or grease from
between and around cylinder cooling fins.
ENGINE (COWLING, AIR DEFLECTORS, FLY-
WHEEL, FAN, STEADY BAR AND SUPPORT

TM 9-747
34
MAINTENANCE
BEAM). Inspect to see that these items are in good
condition, clean, correctly assembled, and securely
mounted. Be sure cowling inspection covers are all in
place.
MMtMr
Semi-
Mmthly
47
Tighten. Tighten all accessible mounting and assembly
bolts or screws securely. See that cowling and shrouds
are properly alined and do not interfere with fan.
48
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY. On those engines that are re-
moved only, disassemble clutch, clean parts thoroughly,
and inspect for excessive wear or damage. If any part is
unserviceable, report condition to higher echelon.
50
50
ACCESSORY DRIVES. Inspect generator drive belts
to see that they are in good condition. See that drive belts
and pulleys are well alined and not bottoming in the
drive pulleys. Adjust generator drive belt to have Va-inch
deflection from normal finger-pressure.
51
51
ENGINE COMPARTMENT (BULKHEAD AND
CONTROL LINKAGE). Check to see that engine
compartment, including bulkhead, is in good condition
and clean, and that control linkage in engine compart-
ment is in good condition and securely connected and
mounted.
51
Clean. Clean engine compartment thoroughly.
52
52
ENGINE OIL (TANK, COOLER, LINES AND FIT-

TINGS). Inspect to see that these items are in good
condition, correctly assembled, securely mounted and
not leaking. Check oil level and inspect sample of oil on
dip stick for grit, water or dilution. See that filler cap and
gasket are in good condition and seal properly.
53
53
FUEL (TANKS, LINES AND PUMP ) . Inspect to see
that these items (where visible) are in good condition,
correctly assembled, securely mounted and not leaking.
53
Serve. With tanks nearly empty, drain water and sedi-
ment from each fuel tank by removing drain plugs and
allow fuel to drain. Tighten all fuel tank mountings and
brackets securely.
55
55
FUEL FILTER. Inspect exterior fuel filter to see that
it is in good condition, secure and not leaking.
55
Clean and Serve. Drain fuel tanks and remove fuel
filter cover and element and, without disassembling, clean
them in dry-cleaning solvent. Dry and inspect for dam-
age. If element is serviceable, reinstall; if element is not
75
TM 9-747
34
serviceable, replace entire filter assembly. Tighten drain
plugs and connections securely.
ENGINE OIL FILTER. Inspect oil filter to see that
it is in good condition, secure and not leaking. Remove
and reverse manual turning nut, operate engine and ob-
serve whether filter is operating.
Clean and Serve. Remove oil filter cover and element and,
without disassembling, clean them in dry-cleaning sol-
vent. Dry and inspect these items for damage. If element
is not serviceable, replace entire filter assembly.
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER. Inspect core and
lines of cooler to see that they are in good condition, se-
cure, and not leaking. Clean out insects and trash from in
and around core air passages.
EXHAUST PIPES. Inspect to see that these items are
in good condition, securely assembled and mounted and
not leaking.
Tighten. Tighten all mounting bolts and connections
securely.
ENGINE MOUNTINGS. Examine to see that mount-
ings are in good condition and secure.
Tighten. Tighten all mounting bolts securely. When
engine is removed, tighten support ring to crankcase bolts
and to engine support assembly bolts.
CLUTCH RELEASE (YOKE, SHOES, LINKAGE
AND MOUNTING). Inspect these parts of clutch
mechanism to see that they are in good condition, cor-
rectly assembled, secure and not excessively worn. See
that yoke is adequately lubricated and that release shoes
have Vs inch clearance (par. 98).
Tighten. Tighten all accessible assembly and mounting
nuts and screws. NOTE: When engine is removed, per-
form the operation before engine is reinstalled.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER SYSTEM (TANKS,
VALVES, LINES, NOZZLES AND MOUNTINGS).
Inspect applicable items of both fixed and portable ex-

tinguishers to see that they are in good condition and se-

cure and that nozzles are not clogged or valves corroded.
ENGINE INSTALLATION (MOUNTINGS, LINES
AND FITTINGS, WIRING, CONTROL LINKAGE
AND OIL SUPPLY. If engine was removed for repair
MAINTENANCE
Monthly
Semi-
Monthly
54
54
54
56
56
57
57
57
58
58
58
59
59
59
60
60
61
76
TM 9-747
34
or replacements, reinstall at this time (paragraph 51).
Tighten mountings securely and properly connect all
fuel and oil pipes, wiring and linkage.
BATTERIES (CABLES, HOLD-DOWNS, CARRIER,
GRAVITY, AND VOLTAGE). Remove batteries and
clean with soda wash, if available, and dry thoroughly.
Inspect battery cables and hold-down clamps for good
condition. Clean battery carrier with soda solution, and
paint, if corroded; clean battery terminals and scrape
until bright and grease lightly. Check gravity and voltage
and record readings in space provided on back of Form
No. 462.
Make high rate discharge test of battery to see that all
cells are in satisfactory condition. A true test cannot be
made if gravity reading is below 1.225. If cells vary more
than 30 percent, report condition.
Bring electrolyte level up to Va inch above plates by
adding clean water. Install battery securely, connect
cables and coat with grease.
ACCELERATOR LINKAGE, FUEL VALVES AND
SWITCH. Examine accelerator and connecting linkage
to see that it is in good condition, opens throttle fully, is
securely connected and operates freely. Open fuel valves
and close master battery switch at this time.
STARTER, PRIMER AND INSTRUMENTS. Observe
all starting precautions (par. 16). Start engine to see
if primer operation and action of starter are satisfactory.
Note particularly whether starter drive engages and
operates properly without unusual noise, whether it has
adequate cranking speed and whether engine starts
readily. As engine starts, see that all instruments operate
properly, and particularly that oil pressure and ammeter
indications are satisfactory.
LEAKS (ENGINE OIL AND FUEL). After starting
engine, look in engine compartment for indications of
leaks in oil and fuel system.

REGULATOR UNITS (CONNECTIONS, BOND

STRAPS AND FILTERS). Inspect both generator
regulators to see if they are in good condition and securely
connected and mounted and particularly if radio noise
suppression niters and bonding straps are loose or dam-
aged.
ENGINE IDLE. With engine at normal operating tem-
perature, adjust idle stop screw to idle engine at approxi-
MAINTENANCE
Ninthly
Semi-
63
63
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
68
68
69
69
71
TM 9-747
34
MAINTENANCE
mately 400 revolutions per minute. Hand throttle must
Monthly
Semi-
Monthly
be in closed position. Adjust mixture control screw until
engine runs smoothly (par. 75).
71
71
FIGHTING COMPARTMENT (PAINT, SEATS,
SAFETY STRAPS, CRASH PADS, STOWAGE, AM-
MUNITION BOXES, CLIP AND RACKS). Inspect
to see that these are in good condition and securely assem-
bled and mounted. See that fighting compartment is
clean, that paint is in satisfactory condition, and that
adjusting mechanisms of seat operate properly and are
adequately lubricated. Pay particular attention to see
that all dividers and shell pads are present and properly
installed in ammunition boxes and racks and that clips
have sufficient tension to hold shells securely.
73
73
PERISCOPES. Examine periscope prisms and windows
to see that they are in good condition, clean and secure in
holders; make sure that holders are securely mounted.
See that lever and locking devices operate freely and are
not excessively worn and that their traversing, elevating
and locking devices are free and not excessively worn.
Examine spare periscopes and their stowage boxes to see
that they are in good condition, clean and secure. CAU-
TION: Prisms should be cleaned only with a soft cloth
or brush.
74
74
CLUTCH PEDAL (FREE TRAVEL, LINKAGE, AND
RETURN SPRING). Inspect to see that these items are

in good condition, securely assembled and mounted, well

lubricated and not excessively worn. Be sure return
spring will bring pedal to full released position. Adjust
pedal free travel to approximately 1% inches (par. 98).
75
75
BRAKES (STEERING LEVERS, LINKAGE AND
SHAFTS). Inspect steering brake levers, linkage and
shafts to see that they are in good condition, securely
connected and mounted and not excessively worn. Apply
steering brake levers and observe whether they both
begin to meet resistance slightly before reaching a vertical
position. Released steering levers are correctly posi-
tioned when horizontal distance from face of brake drum
housing cover to front edge of lever is 7 to 7 Va inches.
75
Tighten. Tighten all assembly and mounting nuts and
screws securely.
77
77
FINAL DRIVE AND BREATHERS. Examine acces-
sible part of the final drive case in driver's compartment
to see that it is in good condition, that all mounting and
78
TM 9-747
34
assembly bolts or cap screws are secure, and that there
are no leaks. Inspect breathers to see that they are in
good condition, secure and not clogged.
Clean and Tighten. Remove breathers and clean thor-
oughly. Tighten all external assembly and mounting
bolts and screws securely.
TRANSMISSION (VENT AND SEALS). Inspect
transmission to see that it is in good condition, that out-
side parts are securely assembled and mounted and that
there are no oil leaks.
Clean and Tighten. Remove, clean and reinstall vent.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL. Inspect to see that trans-
mission control lever operates properly, is in good con-
dition, correctly assembled, securely connected and not
excessively worn.
PROPELLER SHAFT (U-JOINTS, ALINEMENT,
AND FLANGES). Inspect propeller shaft to see that
it is in good condition, that it is correctly and securely
assembled and mounted, and that universal joints are
properly alined and not excessively worn.
Tighten. Tighten universal joint assembly and com-
panion flange bolts securely.
COMPASS (FLUID AND LAMP). Examine compass
for good condition and secureness. Look for low fluid
level or indications of bubbles in fluid bowl. Fill fluid
bowl with ETHYL alcohol, if needed. If alcohol is added,
recompensate compass, according to instructions on com-
pass card. See that compass lamp and switch operate
properly.
LAMPS AND SWITCHES (HEAD, TAIL, BLACK-
OUT AND INTERNAL). Test to see that switches
and lamps operate properly. Inspect all lights for good
condition, secureness, for broken lenses or discolored re-
flectors.
WIRING (JUNCTION AND TERMINAL BLOCKS
AND BOXES, CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND BUT-

TONS). Inspect all applicable above listed units to see

that they are in good condition, securely mounted and
connected and clean. Inspect all exposed wiring and con-
duits for looseness or damage and see that they are well
supported, securely connected and clean. Be sure radio
MAINTENANCE
MntUy
Semi-
Monthlf
77
78
78
78
80
80
81
81
81
84
84
85
85
86
86
79
TM 9-747
34
MAINTENANCE
88
126
126
127
127
130
Semi-
Monthly
88
126
127
130
noise suppression bonding strap at turret control box is
in good condition and that all attaching bolts at terminal
or control boxes and wiring support clips are tight.
RADIO BONDING (SUPPRESSORS, FILTERS,
CONDENSERS AND SHIELDING). See that all units
not covered in the foregoing specific procedures are in
good condition, securely mounted and connected. Be sure
that all additional noise suppression bonding straps and
shake-proof lock washers are inspected for looseness or
damage and see that all contact surfaces are thoroughly
clean. NOTE: // objectionable radio noise from ve-
hicle has been reported, make tests in accordance with
paragraphs 131 to 136. If cleaning and tightening of
mountings and connections and replacement of defective
radio suppression units does not eliminate the trouble, the
radio operator will report the condition to the designated
individual in authority.
ARMAMENT
GUN, 155-MM AND 8-INCH HOWITZER (MOUNTS,
TRAVERSING AND ELEVATING MECHANISM
AND FIRING CONTROLS). Inspect to see that these
items are in good condition, clean, well lubricated, cor-
rectly and securely assembled and not excessively worn.

Check to see that traversing controls are in good condi-

tion and secure. Operate firing controls to see that they
function properly. Operate elevating controls through en-
tire range to see that they function properly. Tighten all
assembly and mounting bolts and screws securely.
Tighten. Tighten gun mounts securely.
RECOIL CONTROL. Inspect control unit, and cylinders
and pistons to see that they are in good condition, secure,
correctly assembled and connected, and not leaking oil.
Defects in system should be referred to ordnance person-
nel for attention.
Tighten. Tighten all mounting and assembly nuts and
screws securely.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
TOOLS (VEHICLE KIT AND PIONEER). Check
standard vehicle tools against stowage lists to see that
they and pioneer tools are present, in good condition and
properly stowed or mounted. Any tools mounted on out-
side of vehicle, having bright or polished surfaces, should

TM 9-747
34
MAINTENANCE
MutUy
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
Semi-
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
be painted or otherwise treated to prevent glare or reflec-
tions. Tools with cutting edges should be sharp and edges
protected.
EQUIPMENT. Check special equipment items against
vehicle stowage list to see if they are all present, in serv-
iceable condition and properly stowed or mounted.
GROUSERS AND SPARE TRACK BLOCKS. Inspect
to see if these items are all present, in good condition and
properly stowed or mounted.
SPARE OIL SUPPLY (RECOIL, HYDRAULIC AND
ENGINE). Check to see that supply of listed spare oil is
present and properly stowed. This supply should be
maintained at all times.
DECONTAMINATORS. Examine to see that decontam-
inators are in good condition, secure and fully charged.
Make latter check by removing filler plugs. NOTE: The
solution must be renewed every three months, as it de-

teriorates.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (PORTABLE). Inspect to
see that extinguishers are fully charged, in good condition
and securely mounted and seal on valve head is intact.
Have cylinder weighed to determine if it is fully charged.
Replace with a fully charged one; if net weight is less than
4 pounds, see paragraph 137.
PUBLICATIONS AND FORM NO. 26. All vehicle
equipment manuals, Lubrication Order, Accident-Report
Form No. 26, and MWO and Major Unit Assembly Re-
placement Record W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 478 must be
present, legible and properly stowed.
VEHICLE LUBRICATION. If due, lubricate in accord-
ance with Lubrication Order, section XII, and current
lubrication directives, using only clean lubricant and
omitting items that have had special lubrication during
this service. Replace damaged or missing fittings, vents,
flexible lines or plugs.
MODIFICATIONS (MODIFICATION WORK OR-
DERS COMPLETED). Inspect vehicle and organiza-
tional records to determine that all Modification Work
Orders have been properly completed. Enter any modi-
fications or replacement of Major Unit Assembly made
at the time of this service on W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 478.

TM 9-747
34-36
MAINTENANCE
Monthly
Semi-
Monthly
139
139
FINAL ROAD TEST. Make a final road test, rechecking
items 2 to 15 inclusive. Check transmission and differen-
tial to see that there are no leaks. Confine this road test
to the minimum distance necessary to make satisfactory
observations. While testing vehicle, operate it in a normal
manner. NOTE: Correct or report any deficiencies found
during final road test.
Section XIV
TROUBLE SHOOTING
35.
GENERAL.
a. This section contains trouble shooting information, and tests,
which can be made, to help determine the causes of some of the
troubles that may develop in vehicles used under average climatic
conditions (above -j- 32°F). Each symptom of trouble given under
the individual unit or system is followed by a list of possible causes
of the trouble. The tests, necessary to determine which one of the
possible causes is responsible for the trouble, are explained after each
possible cause.
36. ENGINE.
a. Engine Will Not Turn.
(1) HYDROSTATIC LOCK OR SEIZURE. Remove the rear
spark plugs from the two lower cylinders and attempt to turn the en-
gine with the hand crank to expel excess fuel or oil from the combus-
tion chambers and relieve hydrostatic lock. If the engine does not
turn, seizure due to internal damage is indicated: notify higher
authority.
(2) STARTER INOPERATIVE. See paragraph 82.
(3) INCORRECT OIL VISCOSITY. Drain and refill with proper
grade of oil (par. 26).

b. Engine Turns But Will Not Start.

(1) INOPERATIVE FUEL SYSTEM. Open fuel valves, remove
outlet line at the fuel pump and, with the ignition switch off, turn the
engine with the starter. If free flow of fuel is not evident, fuel is not
reaching carburetor. See paragraph 75.
(2) INOPERATIVE IGNITION SYSTEM. Remove a cable
from a spark plug and turn on magneto switch. Crank the engine with
n
TM 9-747
36
Trouble Shooting
starter and hold the cable terminal Vi inch from the cylinder casting.
If a spark does not jump the Winch gap, the ignition is inadequate.
See paragraph 69.
(3) SLOW CRANKING SPEED. See paragraph 82.
c. Engine Does Mot Develop Full Power.
(1) IMPROPER IGNITION. See paragraph 69.
(2) OIL TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH. See paragraph 61.
(3) USE OF IMPROPER TYPE OF FUEL. Use proper fuel with
octane rating of 80 or higher.
(4) CLOGGED FUEL STRAINER IN CARBURETOR. Clean
strainer (par. 75).
(5) PREIGNITION. If the proper octane fuel is being used, and
the ignition system is functioning satisfactorily, spark plugs of im-
proper heat range may be the cause of trouble, otherwise, internal
engine troubles would be indicated. Notify higher authority.
(6) IMPROPER VALVE ADJUSTMENT. Check clearance and
adjust if necessary (par. 52 d).
(7) LOW ENGINE COMPRESSION OR IMPROPER VALVE
TIMING. If the engine does not develop full power with fuel reaching
the combustion chambers, adequate ignition and sufficient oil in the
engine lubrication system, low compression or improper valve timing
would be indicated. Notify higher authority.
(8) INCORRECT GOVERNOR SETTING. If the engine will not
accelerate to 2,400 revolutions per minute after the above items have
been checked, disconnect the governor linkage at the carburetor. Start
the engine and accelerate gradually (but not above 2,400 revolutions
per minute). If speed of 2,400 revolutions per minute is reached with
the governor disconnected, the governor operation is at fault. Notify
higher authority.
d. Engine Misfires.
(1) FAULTY IGNITION SYSTEM. See paragraphs 63 through 69.
(2) INCORRECT CARBURETOR ADJUSTMENT. Adjust car-
buretor (par. 75).
(3) RESTRICTED FUEL FLOW. See paragraph 75.
(4) WATER IN FUEL. Remove the two drain plugs at the bottom
of the carburetor and inspect for water.

(5) LOW ENGINE COMPRESSION. See subparagraph e (7)

above.
e. Excessive Oil Consumption.
(1) OIL VISCOSITY TOO LOW. Drain and refill with proper
grade of oil (par. 26).
S3
TM 9-747
36-37
(2) EXTERNAL OIL LEAKS. Inspect for external oil leakage at
oil line connections. Inspect for leaks around the push rod housing
adapters and tighten with special tool (41-W-1985).
(3) SUPERCHARGER OIL SEAL RINGS OR PISTON RINGS
DAMAGED. Notify higher authority.
/. Engine Will Not Stop.
(1) THROTTLE NOT FULLY CLOSED. Close throttle.
(2) FAULTY FUEL CUT-OFF. Inspect fuel cut-off switch and
wiring (par. 14).
(3) DEGASSER ASSEMBLY INOPERATIVE. Replace degasser
(par. 77).
g. Tachometer Inoperative.
(1) BROKEN OR KINKED CABLE. Replace cable.
(2) FAULTY TACHOMETER HEAD. Replace head.
(3) TACHOMETER ADAPTER DRIVE GEAR BROKEN. Re-
place adapter.
37. FUEL SYSTEM.
a. Fuel Does Not Reach Carburetor.
(1) LACK OF FUEL IN TANKS. Replenish fuel supply.
(2) FUEL VALVES NOT TURNED ON. Turn on fuel valves.
(3) CLOGGED FUEL TANK VENTS. Clean out tank units.
(4) CLOGGED FUEL FILTER. Disconnect the fuel line between
the filter and the fuel pump and check the flow from the tank. If fuel
does not flow freely from the line, service the fuel filter (par. 72).
(5) INOPERATIVE FUEL PUMP. If fuel flows freely from the
fuel line (step (4) above) install fuel pump pressure gage in the out-
let side of the fuel pump and crank the engine with the starter. If the
pressure indicated by the gage is less than 3Vi pounds, replace the
fuel pump.
b. Fuel Does Not Reach Cylinders.
(1) THROTTLE NOT OPENING. Adjust throttle (par. 75).
(2) PRIMER PUMP STRAINER CLOGGED. Clean or replace
(par. 73).
(3) INOPERATIVE PRIMER PUMP. Remove one of the primer
tubes from one of the cylinders, and operate the primer pump to see
if fuel squirts out of the tube. If fuel reaches pump and no fuel comes
out of disconnected tube, replace pump.

(4) CARBURETOR STRAINER CLOGGED. Clean or replace
(par. 75).
( 5 ) CARBURETOR JETS CLOSED. Replace carburetor ( par. 75 ).
M
TM 9-747
38
Trouble Shooting
38. ENGINE LUBRICATING SYSTEM.
a. Low or No Oil Pressure.
(1) LACK OF OIL IN SYSTEM. Replenish oil supply.
(2 ) EXTERNAL LEAKS AT TUBES OR FITTINGS. Tighten or
replace.
(3) PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE STUCK OR SET TOO LOW.
If no pressure is shown by the gage, remove the pressure relief valve
assembly, and inspect the valve to be sure it is not stuck, and that it
seats in the valve body. If insufficient pressure is shown on the gage,
turn the relief valve adjusting screw clockwise, and watch for vari-
ation of pressure. If the pressure is increased by turning the screw,
adjust the pressure or replace the relief valve assembly.
(4) CLOGGED OIL STRAINER OR TUBES. Disconnect the in-
let hose from the strainer at the oil pump, and remove and clean the
strainer. Lower the end of the inlet hose and if oil does not flow freely
from the supply tank, drain the tank, remove the connections, and
blow out tubes with compressed air.
(5) PRESSURE GAGE INOPERATIVE. If the low oil pressure
warning light goes out after the engine starts, there is some oil pres-
sure. If the oil pressure gage does not start to register about the time
the low pressure warning light goes out, the sending unit, the gage on
the instrument panel, or the gage circuit may be at fault. Disconnect
the wire from the sending unit and intermittently ground it to the
engine. If the gage hand does not fluctuate, the gage or wiring is
faulty. If when the wire from the sending unit is intermittently
grounded, the gage hand fluctuates to full scale or remains at full scale
until the wire is held to ground, the gage and wiring are satisfactory;
replace the sending unit (par. 57 6).
(6) OIL PUMP INOPERATIVE. If oil pressure is not satisfactory
after making all the foregoing tests (steps (1) through (5) above),
replace the pressure and suction pump assembly.
6. Oil Temperature Too Low.
(1) OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE INOPERATIVE.
Remove the cap on top of the temperature control valve, take out the
valve, and check it for freedom of operation.
(2) OIL TEMPERATURE GAGE INOPERATIVE. Disconnect

No. 64 wire in the bulkhead terminal box and ground the wire to the
box. If the gage does not show a full scale reading when the wire is
grounded, the gage or wiring is at fault. If the gage shows a full scale
reading when the wire is grounded, replace the sending unit (par. 57 6).
c. Oil Temperature Too High.
(1) LOW OIL SUPPLY. Replenish oil supply.

TM 9-747
38-39
(2) AIR INTAKE GRILLE OR SCREEN CLOGGED WITH
FOREIGN MATTER. Remove all obstructions.
(3) ACCUMULATION OF OIL OR DIRT ON EXTERIOR OF
ENGINE. Clean engine.
(4) OIL TEMPERATURE GAGE OR SENDING UNIT INOP-
ERATIVE. Stop the engine and allow oil to cool. If gage reading is
not reduced as oil cools off, disconnect No. 64 wire in the bulkhead
terminal box, and if reading then drops, replace the sending unit
(par. 57 6). If the gage indicates high oil temperature with wire dis-
connected, replace the gage (par. 57 6).
(5) ENGINE OIL COOLER OBSTRUCTED OR COVERED.
Loosen the coupling at the outlet from the engine oil cooler to the oil
supply tank. If normal flow of oil is not evident, loosen the inlet line
at the bottom of the cooler, and check for flow of oil to the cooler. If
normal flow of oil is found at this point, the oil cooler is clogged. Re-
move and clean (par. 60).
(6) LATE IGNITION TIMING. Reset timing. See paragraphs 64
through 67.'
( 7 ) INOPERATIVE OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE.
See subparagraph b (1) above.
( 8 ) INOPERATIVE BY-PASS VALVE. Remove and check opera-
tion of valve (par. 616).
39. STARTING SYSTEM.
a. Starter Will Not Operate. If the 24-volt battery switch is
"ON" and the batteries are in good condition, this condition indicates
that the starter, or cables and connections to it, are at fault. Make the
following tests:
(1) BATTERIES RUN DOWN. If the solenoid in the battery
switch box vibrates when the switch on the instrument panel marked
"STARTER" is depressed, the batteries are run down. Replace or
recharge the batteries (par. 85).
(2) STARTER SOLENOID INOPERATIVE. If no sound is heard
from the solenoid when the switch is depressed, remove the cover from
the battery switch box, and connect a jumper wire from the bus bar
to the nearest terminal on the solenoid, where wire No. 18 from the
instrument panel is connected. If the solenoid still does not operate,

replace the solenoid (par. 83). If the solenoid operates as evidenced

by the sound and the starter turns, the starter switch on the instrument
panel or the wiring to it is at fault; refer to step (4) below.
(3) FAULTY STARTER OR WIRING. If the solenoid operates
and the starter will not run, open the engine compartment rear doors,
TM 9-747
39-40
Trouble Shocking
remove the starter terminal cover plug and connect a test voltmeter
between the starter terminal and ground. Press the starter switch and
observe the meter. If battery voltage (24 volts) is indicated, replace
the starter. If no reading is obtained and no obvious damage or loose
connections are found between the starter and the solenoid, replace
the solenoid (par. 83 6). If the voltage is indicated, refer to step
(5) below.
(4) STARTER SWITCH OR WIRING FAULTY. If the tests de-
scribed in step (2) above indicate that the starter switch or the wiring
is at fault, inspect the lower left conduit on the back of the instrument
box to see that it is properly connected, and tightened to the receptable.
If the conduit connection appears satisfactory, remove the mounting
screws from face of instrument panel and pull panel out far enough
to give access to the switch assembly and wiring. Inspect the wiring
to the switch for loose connections and test with the voltmeter, from
wire No. 18 connected to the terminal marked "START" on the back
of the switch, to ground. If voltage is present at this point, replace the
switch assembly.
( 5 ) LOOSE CONNECTIONS OR FAULTY BATTERY SWITCH.
If the voltage test made in step (3) above shows voltage to be low,
check all connections at the battery switch, solenoid, and the starter
cable terminal post in the bulkhead terminal box for loose connections.
If connections are secure, turn on all lights and crew compartment
blower. Move the battery switch handle from side to side and observe
the brilliance of the lights or the sound of the blower motor. If the
lights dim, or the blower motor varies in speed, replace the 24-volt
battery switch (par. 86).
6. Starter Runs But Will Not Turn Engine. This condition
indicates a faulty drive mechanism or a bent shaft. Replace the starter
(par. 82).
c. Slow Cranking Speed. If the engine has the proper lubricant
for the temperatures encountered and the test made in subparagraph
« (3) above indicate that the proper voltage is reaching the starter,
replace the starter (par. 82). If low voltage is indicated, test the bat-
teries (par. 85), inspect cables and connections, and make test de-
scribed in subparagraph a ( 5 ) above.

40. IGNITION SYSTEM.

a. Engine Will Not Start. If fuel is reaching the cylinders, and
the engine will not start after following the instructions on the plate
above the magneto switch, test the magnetos, magneto switch, booster
coil, or wiring to these units.
(1) MAGNETO SWITCH GROUNDED. Turn the switch to
either "R" or "L" position and try to start the engine; if the engine
TM 9-747
40
starts on either one of these positions but stops on switch position
marked "BOTH," disconnect the ignition conduit behind the instru-
ment box. NOTE: The booster coil wire on the Scintilla magneto is
contained in this conduit and the booster will not operate when the
conduit is disconnected. If the engine is cold, magnetos may not fire
the engine. See subparagraph c for additional information in making
the following tests. If the engine will start with the ignition conduit
disconnected, replace the magneto switch assembly. If the engine still
will not start, and the magnetos are not firing, the emergency stop
switch in the bulkhead terminal box may be grounded; refer to step
(2) below.
(2) EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH GROUNDED. Remove the
cover from the bulkhead terminal box and disconnect wires Nos. 78
and 79 from the emergency stop switch. If the engine will start, replace
the emergency stop switch. If the engine does not start, refer to step
(3) below.
(3 ) FRONT SECTION OF IGNITION HARNESS GROUNDED.
Remove the two wires Nos. 76 and 77 from the small terminal block
in the upper section of the bulkhead terminal box (fig. 85). If the
engine starts with these wires removed, replace the ignition harness
from the instrument box to the bulkhead terminal box. If the engine
does not start with these wires disconnected, refer to step (4) below.
(4) REAR SECTION OF IGNITION HARNESS GROUNDED.
Open the rear doors of the engine compartment and disconnect the top
(small) conduit from the receptacle on the left side of the engine
mounting. If the engine will start, replace the harness from the bulk-
head terminal box to the receptacle. If the engine will not start with
the harness disconnected at the receptacle, refer to step (5) below.
(5 ) ENGINE SECTION OF IGNITION HARNESS GROUNDED.
If no visible damage or trouble is observed, disconnect the ground
wires in the magnetos and again try to start the engine. If the engine
starts, or attempts to start, indicating that the magnetos are firing,
replace the engine harness. If the engine does not start, see step (a)
or (b) below.
(a) Magnetos (Bosch). If the engine does not start after making
tests in step (5) above, remove a spark plug wire, and hold it approxi-
mately % inch from the cylinder. Crank the engine with the starter.
CAUTION: Hold the fuel cut-off switch "IN" so that the engine will
not start to avoid injury from exhaust flame. If a good spark is ob-
served during this test, remove the spark plugs, clean, and adjust or re-
place if necessary (par. 69).
(b) Magnetos (Scintilla). If the engine does not start when per-
forming test in step (5 ) above, it may be necessary to use the booster.
Leave the ground wires off the magnetos, and connect the ignition har-
ness together at the engine receptacle in instrument box so that the

TM 9-747
40
Trouble Shooting
booster will operate. Try to start the engine in the normal manner.
If the engine starts, the wiring harness on the engine is faulty. If the
engine does not start, test magneto output and spark plugs as outlined
in step (a) above. If no spark occurs, the magnetos are at fault; re-
place magnetos. See paragraph 64 or 65.
6. Booster Coil Inoperative (Scintilla). The "booster" will cause
the engine to fire intermittently while the engine is being cranked with
the magneto switch "OFF." If this action is not apparent, proceed as
follows:
(1) BOOSTER SWITCH INOPERATIVE. Listen for a buzzing
sound at the engine compartment. If no sound is heard when the
booster switch is depressed, disconnect the ignition harness behind the
instrument box, and test from the large hole in the plug on the conduit
attached to the instrument box with a voltmeter to ground and with
the booster switch depressed. If no reading is obtained, replace the
booster switch. If a reading is obtained, connect the conduit again and
perform test in step (2) below.
(2) WIRING OR BOOSTER FAULTY. Disconnect the wire No.
75 in the upper section of the bulkhead terminal box and connect the
test meter between the 75 wire, coming from the instrument panel, and
ground with the booster switch depressed. If no reading is obtained,
replace the front section of the ignition harness. If a reading is ob-
tained at the 75 wire, disconnect the rear section of the ignition harness
from the engine receptacle box and repeat the test from the large
terminal of the plug. If no reading is obtained, replace the rear section
of the ignition harness. If a reading is obtained, connect the conduit to
the receptacle, and repeat the test at the coil. If the meter indicates
that current is reaching this point, replace the booster coil. If no read-
ing is indicated, replace the engine section of the ignition harness.
c. Engine Will Not Stop. If the engine will not stop when the
button marked "FUEL CUT-OFF" is pressed and the throttle is fully
closed, the degasser solenoid, wiring, circuit breaker, or the fuel cut-off
switch is at fault.
(1) DEGASSER UNIT FAULTY. If the circuit breaker marked
"FUEL" on the instrument panel is connected, and the panel lights
burn, disconnect the wire from the degasser unit on the carburetor and
test with a voltmeter to ground while the button marked "FUEL CUT-
OFF" is depressed. If the meters show a reading of approximately 24
volts, replace the degasser unit (par. 77 c).
(2) FUEL CIRCUIT BREAKER INOPERATIVE. If no reading
is obtained, remove the bulkhead terminal box cover and disconnect
wire No. 20 coming from the instrument panel (fig. 85). Test from this
wire to ground with the test meter while the idle fuel cut-off switch is
depressed. If no reading is obtained, inspect the upper left conduit

TM 9-747
40-41
plug on the back of the instrument box to see that it is properly con-
nected. If no loose or faulty connections are found, remove the screws
from the instrument panel cover, and pull it out far enough to make
tests. Test from wire No. 21 on the fuel cut-off switch to ground. If
no reading is obtained, replace the fuel circuit breaker.
(3) FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH INOPERATIVE. If the meter in-
dicates that current is reaching the switch, test from wire No. 20 on
the switch while the button is depressed. If no reading is obtained, re-
place the fuel cut-off switch (par. 14 fe).
(4) WIRING FAULTY. If current is passing through the switch,
examine the contacts "P" for wire No. 20 in the receptacle and plug
(upper left) on the panel. If these connections are satisfactory, replace
the conduit between the instrument panel receptacle and the bulk-
head terminal box. If the contacts in the receptacle are at fault, replace
the instrument panel (par. 101 d).
d. Engine Fires Intermittently When Cranking (Scintilla Mag-
neto). If the starting instructions are followed (par. 16 e) and the
engine fires intermittently, the trouble is probably in the magneto
circuit or the magnetos. The booster delivers sufficient spark to cause
the contacted spark plug to fire and the engine will try to run. Follow
the procedure in subparagraph a above to isolate the trouble and make
the corrections indicated.
e. Engine Lacks Power: One Magneto or Circuit Faulty. If no
mechanical trouble is evident (par. 36), one of the magnetos may be
faulty. Run the engine on one magneto at a time. If the tachometer
shows 300 revolutions per minute, or more, difference in engine speed,
and the spark plugs are satisfactory, check the timing of the faulty
magneto or replace the unit. See paragraphs 64 and 65.
41. BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM.
a. No Charge Shown on Instrument Panel Ammeter. If the
batteries are fully charged and the cables and connections are satis-
factory, the ammeter may not show a charge because the regulator
has reduced the amount of charge required. To determine if the gener-
ator and regulator are functioning properly, make the following tests:
(1) NO GENERATOR OUTPUT. Press the large circuit breaker
on the battery switch -box to make sure it is not disconnected. Turn

on the dome light over the battery switch box, start the engine (see
instruction plate above magneto switch), engage the clutch, and see if
the light increases in brilliance momentarily. If the brilliance of the
light increases at all the generator and regulator are both functioning.
Perform test in step (2) below. If no change is noticed in the light,
make test in step (3) below.
90
TM 9-747
41
Trouble Shooting
(2) AMMETER INOPERATIVE. Disengage the clutch. Turn on
all the lights if permissible and turn on the blower fan. Watch the
ammeter when the blower starts to see if a momentary discharge is
noticeable. If the meter hand does not move and the wires Nos. 3& and
39 from the bus bar in the battery switch box to the ammeter are
securely connected, replace the ammeter (par. 15). If the ammeter
does move toward a discharge, the ammeter and wiring are satis-
factory. Test the generator and regulator for operation, step (3)
below.
(3) GENERATOR OR REGULATOR INOPERATIVE. Stop the
engine, check the generator drive belts for proper tension, and remove
the terminal cover from the generator. Disconnect the field wire
(small) No. 27 from the generator and connect the two generator
terminals together with a jumper wire. Connect a voltmeter from the
armature terminal (large) to ground. Start the engine, engage the
clutch, and observe the meter. If the reading gradually increases to
approximately 30 volts at normal engine idle, the generator is satis-
factory. Replace the regulator (par. 88). If no reading is obtained,
replace the generator. CAUTION: Do not accelerate the engine while
making the test to avoid damage to meter or equipment.
b. Continuous High Charge (50 Amperes or Over).
(1) AMMETER INOPERATIVE. Release the clutch or stop the
engine. If the ammeter remains at a high charge reading, replace the
ammeter. If the hand returns to zero, see step (2) below.
(2) BATTERIES LOW OR FAULTY.
(a) General. If the batteries are low in charge or faulty (shorted
or damaged), the internal resistance will be low. This condition allows
a high rate of charge to continue until the gravity of the electrolyte
has raised or the faulty batteries have been replaced. An abnormally
high charging rate will cause the batteries to boil and lower the elec-
trolyte level.
(6) Test and Inspect Batteries. Test the batteries with a hydrom-
eter and high rate discharge tester to determine the condition. If
faulty or damaged, replace the batteries. If the batteries are discharged
from excessive use, recharge or replace batteries. Inspect cables and
connections to see that they are in good condition and tight.

(3) REGULATOR FAULTY. If the batteries, cables, and connec-

tions are satisfactory and the electrolyte level is low, under normal
operating temperatures, the regulator is not adjusted to control the
output of the generator. Replace the regulator. If the ammeter hand
fluctuates from charge to discharge and the wiring and connections are
satisfactory, including the generator and regulator ground straps, the
regulator is improperly adjusted; replace the regulator (par. 88 d).
91
TM 9-747
42
42. LIGHTING SYSTEM.
a. Headlights Inoperative.
(1) SEALED BEAM UNITS BURNED OUT. Test the socket or
sockets affected with the spare light carried inside the tank. If the
light burns in place of the inoperative unit or units, replace the sealed
beam units (par. 89 6). NOTE: If both headlights are burned out at
the same time the cause may be due to loose connections or faulty
generator regulator. Make the necessary inspections and tests to de-
termine the cause. CAUTION: Use a voltmeter to make tests. Do not
short or directly ground any 24-volt circuits.
( 2 ) MAIN LIGHT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER FAULTY.
Make sure the circuit breaker marked "LIGHTS" on the instrument
panel is properly set, open the instrument panel and turn the switches
to their proper position. Test from contact "BATT" wire No. 50 on
the main light switch to ground with a voltmeter. If no reading is ob-
tained, replace the circuit breaker. If a reading is obtained, test from
contact "HT," wire No. 41, to ground. If no reading is obtained, replace
the main light switch. If a reading is obtained, test the front end har-
ness and connectors. See step (3) below.
(3) FRONT END HARNESS DAMAGED OR FAULTY. If the
harness is visibly damaged, replace the harness. If no damage is found,
disconnect the harness from the right headlight mounting bushing inside
the tank and test from contact of wire No. 41 on the plug to ground.
If no reading is obtained, inspect the harness connector at the instru-
ment panel. If voltage is reaching the connector, replace the harness.
fe. Taillights Inoperative.
(1) SEALED BEAM LAMP-UNITS BURNED OUT. Test the
inoperative units by trying a new unit in its place. NOTE: If a new
lamp-unit is not immediately available for test, use the upper right
lamp-unit which is not connected in these vehicles, and which will
serve as a test unit. If the test lamp will burn in the inoperative sockets,
replace the faulty lamp-units.
(2) MAIN LIGHT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER INOP-
ERATIVE. Repeat the test outlined in subparagraph a (2) above
from terminal "HT" and "BHT," with the switch in the proper contact
positions.
(3) HARNESS FAULTY. Test for continuity of wires 42 and 45

in the bulkhead terminal box and at the taillights. Replace the faulty
section of the harness or tighten loose connections, as the case requires.
c. Dome Lights in Hull Inoperative. Test the faulty lights with
a new lamp to determine if the unit is burned out. Be sure that the
circuit breaker is set and all connections are tight. Test for continuity
of the circuit to the light, and inspect the switch in the body of the
dome light. Replace the switch or faulty lamp or conduit as required.
d. Instrument Panel and Compass Light Inoperative. The in-
92
TM 9-747
42-43
Trouble Shooting
strument panel and compass lights are connected through the panel
light dimmer switch and the circuit breaker marked "ACCESS." If any
one of the lights burn the trouble is due to burned out lamp-units;
replace as required. If all of the lights are inoperative, the trouble is in
either the dimmer switch or the circuit breaker. Test for continuity of
the circuit breaker. Test for continuity of the circuit from wire No. 51
on the back of the dimmer switch to ground. If no voltage is indicated,
replace the circuit breaker marked "ACCESS." If voltage is reaching
the switch, test from the other terminal on the switch where wires 52
and 53 are connected, with the dimmer switch turned on. If no reading
is obtained, replace the switch.
43. RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION.
a. Radio Interference With Vehicle in Operation. Interference
encountered during operation may be traced to any one of several
sources. The radio set is designed to automatically suppress ordinary
interference experienced in radio reception. Stop the vehicle and isolate
the source of the noise. Make sure that the set is properly tuned, ad-
justed, and installed so that interference normally suppressed will not
be detected. When the source of the interference is determined by mak-
ing the tests outlined in the following subparagraphs, inspect all con-
duits for damaged, loose, or corroded bond connections, or ground
straps. Check all wiring connections in the terminal boxes for loose
terminals, corroded, or loose connections. Make sure that the terminal
box covers are securely fastened and make good contact with the boxes.
Faulty connections, conduits, or bonds in any part of the electrical sys-
tem may transmit interference to the radio from any source in the
vehicle. Test the batteries to be sure that they are properly charged,
connected, and not damaged. Faulty batteries can cause improper
operation of the radio so that suppression features of the tubes and cir-
cuits will not be effective.
b. Radio Interference With Engine Running (Vehicle
Stopped).
(1) IGNITION SYSTEM. If a rhythmic "popping" noise is heard
in the radio receiver with changes in frequency as the speed of the
engine is increased or decreased, the trouble is probably caused by the
ignition system (burned magneto points, faulty condenser, loose con-

tacts, broken wiring, or improperly spaced spark plugs). Run the

engine on first one magneto and then on the other to determine which
unit is at fault. Inspect all shielding, bonding, and wiring for damage
or looseness. Replace damaged conduits, tighten loose connections, and
correct any faulty bonding as necessary. If interference is still present,
test all spark plugs in the faulty circuit for broken porcelains, faulty
contacts, and improperly spaced points. Inspect the high-tension con-
tacts in the magnetos. Make the necessary repairs or replacements to
correct the trouble.

TM 9-747
43-44
(2) GENERATOR. If a "whining" or "squealing" sound is detected
in the radio receiver while the engine is running, the trouble is probably
in the generator. Depress the clutch and allow the generator to stop.
If the interference decreases as the generator slows down, inspect the
generator ground cable to see that it is properly connected to clean
surfaces with external-toothed lock washers. If satisfactory, remove
the cover from the generator terminals and inspect the connections.
If the connections are tight and there is no obvious damage to the con-
duit containing the generator leads, disconnect the field lead (small
wire No. 26) from the generator, and allow the generator to run again
by engaging the clutch. The noise will disappear while the field lead
is disconnected, because there will be no output from the generator.
Consequently, the regulator will not function as a field control, elimi-
nating the action of relay contacts and the generator brush noise. Con-
nect the armature and field terminals of the generator together, and
allow the generator to build up. CAUTION: Do not run the engine
above normal idle speed. If the noise is again evident and increases in
amplitude as the generator builds up, the condenser in the generator
is faulty. Replace the generator (par. 87 d).
(3) REGULATOR.
(a) Faulty Condenser or Relay Contacts. If an intermittent "click-
ing" sound is heard in the receiver while the engine is running, and dis-
appears when the clutch is depressed, the trouble may be found in the
generator regulator. Speed up the engine to approximately 1,000 revo-
lutions per minute with the clutch released (the tachometer will not
register), engage the clutch quickly, and note the intensity of the dome
light over the battery switch box. If the noise can be heard in the
receiver just as the light starts to increase in brilliance, the trouble is in
the regulator. Either the regulator reverse current relay (circuit
breaker) points are burned, or the suppression condenser is faulty.
Replace the regulator (par. 88 d).
(b) Faulty Filter. If a rapid "sputtering" noise is detected, such as
a very fast interruption of an electrical circuit might cause, the filter in
the base of the regulator is at fault, allowing the high frequency pulsa-
tions set up by the action of the regulator contact to feed back into the
battery and to other circuits of the vehicle. Replace the regulator (par.
88 d).
44. CLUTCH.
a. Improper Clutch Operation. Idle the engine at 800 revolu-
tions per minute. Push the clutch pedal to the fully released position
and allow time for the clutch to stop. Shift the transmission into first or
reverse gear. If the shift cannot be made without a severe clash of the
gears, or if after engagement of the gears there is a jumping or creeping
movement of the vehicle with the clutch still fully released, the clutch
is at fault. To remedy a faulty clutch, first check the clutch linkage for
94
TM 9-747
44-46
Trouble Shooting
proper adjustment (par. 98) and make sure linkage is not binding. If
linkage is properly adjusted and not binding, and the clutch is faulty, it
must be removed from the vehicle, disassembled, cleaned, and in-
spected, and defective parts replaced (par. 95).
45. PROPELLER SHAFT.
a. Backlash.
(1) WORN OR DAMAGED UNIVERSAL JOINT CROSS BEAR-
ING. Replace propeller shaft assembly (par. 104).
(2) LOOSE BOLTS AT UNIVERSAL JOINT COMPANION
FLANGES. Tighten bolts.
(3) UNIVERSAL JOINT COMPANION FLANGES LOOSE ON
TRANSMISSION INPUT SHAFT OR ON MASTER CLUTCH
SPINDLE. Tighten flange bolts or spindle nut.
b. Vibration in Propeller Shaft.
(1) WORN OR DAMAGED UNIVERSAL JOINTS. Replace pro-
peller shaft assembly (par. 104).
(2) LOOSE BOLTS AT UNIVERSAL JOINT COMPANION
FLANGES. Tighten flange bolts.
46. TRANSMISSION AND FINAL DRIVE.
a. Lubricant Leakage.
(1) DAMAGED GASKET AT FILLER PLUG. Replace gasket.
(2) LOOSE DRAIN PLUGS. Tighten.
(3 ) DAMAGED FLEXIBLE HOSE OR COOLER TUBES. Notify
higher authority.
(4) DAMAGED FINAL REDUCTION HOUSING COVER GAS-
KET OR LOOSE CAP SCREWS. Tighten cap screws or replace gas-
kets (par. 1ll 6).
(5) DAMAGED BRAKE INSPECTION COVER GASKET. Re-
place gasket.
(6) DAMAGED GASKET BETWEEN TRANSMISSION AND
FINAL DRIVE HOUSING. Notify higher authority.
(7) WORN OR DAMAGED INPUT OR OUTPUT SHAFT OIL
SEALS OR GASKET. Notify higher authority.
(8) DAMAGED GASKET AT TRANSMISSION INSPECTION
PLATE. Replace gasket.
6. Track Will Not Move on One Side (Engine Running and

Transmission in Gear).
(1) BROKEN FINAL REDUCTION SHAFT OR COMPENSAT-
ING SHAFT. Replace final reduction assembly (par. 1ll 6).
(2) TEETH STRIPPED ON FINAL REDUCTION SHAFT
GEAR OR COMPENSATING GEAR. Replace final reduction as-
sembly (par. 1ll b).

TM 9-747
46-47
( 3 ) BROKEN FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY PARTS. Notify higher
authority.
e. Hard Shifting (Severe Gear Clash).
(1) INCORRECT CLUTCH LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT. See
paragraph 98 6.
(2) CLUTCH DRAGGING. See paragraph 95 b.
(3 ) BINDING OF TRANSMISSION GEARSHIFT LEVER. Free
up.
(4) DAMAGED TRANSMISSION PARTS. Notify higher author-
ity.
d. Backlash.
(1) WORN OR DAMAGED FINAL REDUCTION PARTS. Re-
place final reduction assembly (par. 1ll fe).
(2) WORN OR DAMAGED TRANSMISSION OR DIFFEREN-
TIAL PARTS. Notify higher authority.
e. Poor Steering.
(1) STEERING BRAKES NOT PROPERLY ADJUSTED. Ad-
just (par. 108 b).
( 2 ) STEERING BRAKE SHOE LINING WORN OR DAMAGED.
Replace brake shoes (par. 107 c).
47. TRACKS AND SUSPENSION.
a. Suspension Wheel Tire Wear.
(1) TRACK CONNECTOR BENT, BROKEN, OR MISSING. Re-
place connector (par. 117 c).
(2) DEAD TRACK SHOE. Replace track shoe (nar. 117 c).
(3) DAMAGED TRACK. Replace track (par. 117 c).
(4) WORN GUDGEON BUSHINGS IN SUSPENSION WHEEL
ARMS. Replace arms (par. 117 c).
b. Volute Spring Breakage.
(1) WORN GUDGEONS. Replace gudgeons (par. 123 c).
(2) WEAK SPRINGS. Replace both springs (par. 123 c).
(3) BROKEN OR CRACKED SPRING SEATS. Replace spring
seats (par. 123 c).
(4) SEIZED LEVER BUSHINGS. Replace bushings (par. 123 c).
c. Thrown Tracks.
(1) IMPROPER TRACK TENSION. Adjust track tension (par.

117 rf).
(2) ROCKS BETWEEN TRACK AND IDLER. Clean out.
(3 ) MISALINEMENT OF IDLER WHEEL. Tighten bracket bolts.
(4) IDLER SHAFT LOOSE IN BRACKET. Lock idler adjustment
(par. 117 rf).
d. Inoperative Track Supporting Rollers.
(1) MUD BETWEEN ROLLERS AND TRACK. Remove mud.

TM 9-747
47-48
Engine Description and Data
(2) BEARINGS SEIZED. Replace roller assembly (par. 119 d,
120 c).
(3) INSUFFICIENT LUBRICATION. Lubricate roller ^ng. 26).
e. Inoperative Idler Wheel.
(1) BEARINGS SEIZED. Replace bearings.
(2) INSUFFICIENT LUBRICATION. Lubricate bearings (fig.26).
Section XV
ENGINE DESCRIPTION AND DATA
48. DESCRIPTION.
a. Description (figs. 9 and 10). The engine used in T89 gun motor
carriage is a 9-cylinder, air-cooled, radial engine, model R-975-C4. The
engine is mounted in the center of the hull. The cooling air is drawn
EXHAUST MANIFOLD FOR
CYLINDERS NOS. 5, 6,
7, 8 AND 9
MAGNETO WIRE
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
SENDING UNIT WIRE
CONDUIT CONNECTION
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
FOR CYLINDERS
NOS. 1, 2, 3 AND 4
HAND CRANKING
ATTACHMENT
FUEL PUMP
CARBURETOR
RA PD 342320
Figure 9—Left Rear View of Engine

TM 9-747
48-49
ENGINE COWLING
FAN
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
RA PD 53577
Figure ?0—Front View of Engine
from the fighting compartment and through an air inlet grille in the
cover of the engine compartment. The engine accessories are mounted
on the rear of the engine.
b. Directional Terms. The terms "RIGHT," "LEFT," "FRONT,"
and "REAR" are used in relation to the driver's position as he sits in the
driver's seat. The direction of rotation is determined by viewing the
engine from the rear (magneto end).
c. Engine Serial Number. A plate bearing the engine serial num-
ber is attached to the front section of the crankcase. The number is also
stamped on the starter housing of the crankcase and on each rocker
arm box.
49. DATA.
Compression ratio 5.7 to 1
Bore 5.00 in.
98
TM 9-747
49-50
Engine Removal and Installation
Stroke 5.50 in.
Displacement 973 cu in.
Rated horsepower 380 at 2,400 rpm
Firing order (No. 1 cylinder at top:
cylinders numbered clockwise from rear) 1-3-5-7-9-2-4-6-8
Engine oil pressure at operating
speed (1,800 to 2,400 rpm) 40 to 70 Ib
Engine oil temperature at operating speed 120°F to 190°F
Maximum oil temperature 190°F
Spark plug gap 0.017 to 0.019 in.
Valve clearance (cold engine) 0.006 in.
Crankshaft rotation ;,... .. Clockwise
Fuel pump rotation Counterclockwise
Starter rotation Counterclockwise
Magneto rotation Counterclockwise
Section XVI
ENGINE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
50. REMOVAL (figs. 11 through 16).
a. Open Battery Switch and Close Fuel Valves. Place the 24-
volt battery switch in open position and close fuel shut-off valves. Ele-
vate the gun to 55 degrees and traverse it 18 degrees to the left, or if it
is not desirable to elevate the gun, remove the stops at the ends of the
traverse ring gear, and swing the gun around until it clears the engine
compartment.
b. Remove Engine Compartment Cover.
(1) REMOVE MOUNTING CAP SCREWS. Remove cap screws
which hold the engine compartment cover to hull. Raise the rear sec-
tion of cover, and remove the row of cap screws which attach the upper
shroud to the compartment cover.
(2) REMOVE AIR INLET SHUTTER. Lower the rear section of
the cover and raise the air inlet cover. Unlatch and lift out the air inlet
grille assembly. Disconnect the shutter operating rods, remove jam
nuts on tubes at front wall of engine compartment, and slide rod tubes
forward through the wall out of the way of engine when it is lifted out.
(3) LIFT OFF COVER. Attach a chain to the cover handles, front
and back, and lift off cover assembly.

(4) REMOVE UPPER SHROUD. Remove cap screws which hold

upper air inlet shroud to side shrouds, and lift off shroud.
( 5 ) REMOVE INLET TUBES ( figs. 11 and 12 ). Loosen the clamps
and remove the large tubes between the carburetor and air cleaners.
NOTE: Cover carburetor air inlet pipes to prevent dirt and dust from
entering.
99
i
I
I
I
!
*
o
o
7
1
u
U
a.
§£
s«
50
§^
£z
<E
liPli
III II
100
co Li
< s! * s
S E^§ S i
TM 9-747
S - |Q si E
U _i D -3 -3 .
CO O Q IU U-
u_ _j LLJ a; LLJ
50
101
TM 9-747

TM 9-747
50-51
(6 ) REMOVE EXHAUST PIPES (figs. 11 and 12 ). Loosen clamps
at manifold and tail pipes. Telescope and remove the exhaust pipes.
(7) DISCONNECT WIRING CONDUITS. Disconnect the two
conduits at the engine support. Remove the lock wire and unscrew the
cover over the cable connection at the starter. Remove the clamp which
holds the starter cable conduit to the engine compartment rear wall
and disconnect the cable from the starter. Ground both small contacts
in the upper conduit receptacle on engine to avoid accidental starting
of engine.
(8) DISCONNECT FUEL TUBES AND ACCELERATOR ROD
(figs. 11 and 12). Loosen the clamps and disconnect the fuel hose at
the fuel pump. Disconnect the fuel primer tube at the left side of the
lower shroud. Remove the clevis pin from the accelerator rod below
the carburetor.
(9 ) DISCONNECT OIL HOSE. Disconnect the oil pump inlet hose
from the engine. Disconnect the suction pump and scavenger pump
outlet hose from engine. Disconnect the small hose between the oil
filter and engine at the filter.
(10) DISCONNECT PROPELLER SHAFT. Remove the section
of the subfloor over the rear universal joint. Remove the screws which
hold the universal joint cover to the bulkhead. Remove the lock wire
from the universal joint flange bolts. With gearshift lever in neutral
and the clutch released, rotate the propeller shaft as necessary and re-
move flange bolts. Before the last bolt is removed from the flange sup-
port, the propeller shaft is in normal position.
(11) REMOVE ENGINE HULL FLOOR COVER AND ENGINE
SUPPORT BOLTS. Remove the center row of cap screws from hull
floor cover. Support cover with a jack and remove remaining cap
screws. Remove bolts from engine front supports, and four bolts from
each of the engine rear supports. Disconnect ground strap from the left
engine mounting bracket.
(12) LIFT ENGINE FROM HULL (fig. 14). Attach lifting sling
to the engine. Raise the engine enough to allow the clutch release bear-
ing to clear release fork. Move the engine back until the release bearing
is out of the yoke; then lift engine from hull. Place the engine in a suit-
able stand with the engine supports carrying the full weight of the
engine.
51. INSTALLATION.
a. Prepare Engine Compartment for Engine Installation (fig.
15). Clean the engine compartment thoroughly. Inspect all fuel, oil,
and fire extinguisher lines for damage, and install new lines if necessary.
Inspect all fuel, oil, and fire extinguisher line connections for tightness.
Inspect wire conduits for damage and replace if necessary.
102
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
2
£
"8
D)
51
5>
103
TM 9-747

i
i
I
*
a
a
S
9
2
JE
35
01
51
104
TM 9-747
51
105
TM 9-747
Engine Removal and InstalIafion

TM 9-747
51
6. Place Engine in Hull. Attach lifting sling to engine (fig. 14)
and hoist the engine into the hull. Lower the engine until the clutch re-
lease bearing will enter the clutch yoke. Move the engine forward and
guide the clutch release bearing through the yoke. Lower the engine
into position and install the mounting bolts. Connect the ground strap
to the left rear engine mounting bracket.
c. Connect Propeller Shaft. Turn the propeller shaft so that the
bolt holes in the universal joint flange line up with the holes in the com-
panion flange on the engine. Install the flange bolts, nuts, and lock wire.
Install the universal joint cover and the subfloor.
d. Install Upper Shroud (fig. 11). Place the upper shroud in posi-
tion with the felt seal in contact with the engine, and install the attach-
ing screws at each end.
e. Connect Oil Hose. Connect the oil pump inlet hose to the en-
gine. Connect the suction pump and scavenger pump outlet hose to
engine. Connect the small hose between the oil filter and the engine.
/. Connect Fuel Lines and Accelerator Rod (fig. 15). Connect
fuel hose to the fuel pump. Connect the fuel primer tube to the union at
the left end of the lower shroud. Connect the accelerator rod to the
throttle lever at the carburetor.
g. Connect the Wiring Conduits. Connect the two conduits at the
engine support. Connect the cable to the terminal at the end of the
starter. Install the cover and lock wire. Install the clamp which holds
the conduit to the engine compartment rear bulkhead. Inspect the mag-
neto breaker points; if insulated to prevent accidental starting of engine,
remove the insulation.
h. Install Inlet Tubes (figs. 11 and 12). Place the inlet tubes in
position between the carburetor and air cleaners and secure with
clamps.
i. Install Exhaust Pipes (figs. 11 and 12). Install the exhaust
pipes between the manifold and the tail pipes and tighten the clamps.
j. Install Engine Compartment Cover Assembly.
(1) INSTALL COVER. Hoist the cover and lower it into position.
Raise the rear section of the cover and install the cap screws which at-
tach the upper shroud to cover. Lower the rear section of cover and in-
stall cap screws which hold compartment cover to hull.

(2) INSTALL AIR SHUTTER. Raise the air inlet cover and con-
nect the air shutter operating rod to shutter. Place air inlet grille assem-
bly in position, and engage fastenings. Close the air inlet cover.
k. Inspect for Oil and Fuel Leakage. Turn on the 24-volt switch
and the fuel shut-off valves. Check engine oil level, and add oil if
needed. Start engine, and inspect for oil or fuel leaks. Close the engine
compartment rear doors when the inspection has been completed.
• ;**.
10*
51
107
TM 9-747

TM 9-747
51-52
I. Install Engine Hull Floor Cover. Place the hull floor cover
into position, and install the attaching cap screws and the row of cap
screws which hold the lower shroud to the hull cover.
m. Record Unit Replacement on W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 478.
If a new or rebuilt engine assembly has been installed, make the proper
entry on "MWO and Major Unit Replacement Record." See paragraph
Section XVII
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
52. VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY AND PUSH RODS.
a. Description. The rocker arms are operated by the cam and
push rod mechanism. A roller at the valve end of the rocker arm con-
tacts the end of the valve stem. A roller bearing is used where the
rocker arm is supported on the rocker hub bolt. The rocker arms and
valve stems are lubricated through oil passages in the push rods.
b. Removal.
(1) REMOVE ENGINE. See paragraph 50.
(2) REMOVE ROCKER ARM AND PUSH ROD (fig. 17). Re-
move the rocker box cover and gasket. Remove the front or rear spark
NUT WASHER
ROCKER BOX COVER
COVER ATTACHING
VALVE CLEARANCE •
ADJUSTING SCREW
VALVE ROCKER ARM
ASSEMBLY
PUSH ROD ASSEMBLY
VALVE ROCKER BOX
VALVE SPRING UPPER
WASHER
BOLT WASHER
NUT -f COVER ATTACHING STUD-J ROCKER ARM HUB BC
Figure 17—Rocker Arm Removed
RA PD 53586
TM 9-747
Engine Maintenance
52
LOCK NUT
VALVE CLEARANCE /— SCREWDRIVER
ADJUSTING SCREW / (41-S-1725)
WRENCH
ROCKER ARM-
VALVE CLEARANCE
ADJUSTING SCREW
ROCKER ARM
ROLLER
FEELER GAGE
SCREWDRIVER
(41-S-1725)
RA PD 53598
Figure 18—Adjusting Valve Clearance
109
TM 9-747
52-53
plugs, and turn the crankshaft until there is clearance between the
rocker arm and the valve stem. Remove the nut and washer from the
rocker arm hub bolt, and remove the bolt, rocker arm, and push rod.
c. Installation.
(1) INSTALL PUSH ROD AND ROCKER ARM (fig. 17). Blow
out the oil passage in the push rod with compressed air to make certain
it is clear. Insert the push rod in the socket and place the rocker arm in
position. Install the rocker arm hub bolt with a washer under the head,
and another washer under the nut. Secure the nut with a cotter pin.
(2) ADJUST ROCKERS. See subparagraph d below.
(3) INSTALL ROCKER BOX COVER AND SPARK PLUGS.
Place a new gasket (G104-0127700) over the studs, and install the
cover, washers, and nuts. Install the spark plugs.
(4) INSTALL ENGINE. See paragraph 51.
d. Valve Clearance Adjustment.
(2) REMOVE ROCKER BOX COVER. See subparagraph b (2)
above.
(3) INSPECT ROCKER ARMS. Before attempting to adjust valve
clearance, inspect the rocker arm roller and bearing, and if either are
damaged, replace the rocker arm.
(4) SET PISTON AT TOP OF FIRING STROKE. Remove the
front or rear spark plugs and turn the crankshaft until the piston is at
the top of its stroke with the intake and exhaust rocker arms free.
(5) ADJUST CLEARANCE (fig. 18). Loosen the adjusting screw
lock nut and turn the adjusting screw until a 0.006-inch feeler gage will
just slide between the rocker arm roller and the end of the valve stem,
and cause the roller to turn.
(6) INSTALL ROCKER BOX COVER. See subparagraph c (3)
above.
53. PUSH ROD GUIDE HOUSING AND ADAPTER.
a. Removal of Push Rod Guide Housing.
(1) REMOVE PUSH ROD. See paragraph 52 b.
(2) REMOVE HOUSING. Loosen the two hose clamps on both
ends of the housing and remove the housing.

b. Installation of Push Rod Guide Housing.

(1) INSTALL HOSE. Place two hose clamps (G104-0100371) on
hose (G104-0100910) and position hose on upper small end of hous-
ing (G104-0100930). Place two hose clamps (G104-0100370) on hose
(G104-0100921) and position on lower (large) end of housing.
lit
TM 9-747
53-55
Engine lubrication System
(2 ) INSTALL HOUSING. Place the large hose on the lower end of
the housing over the adapter in the engine case, and the small hose on
the upper end of the housing over the boss on the rocker arm box.
Tighten hose clamps securely, and install push rod and rocker arm
(par. 52).
c. Replacement of Adapter or Seal. Remove push rod guide
housing (subpar. a above). Remove adapter. Install new oil seals under
adapters as required and install adapter (G104-0100020). Install push
rod guide housing (subpar. b above) and install push rod and rocker
arm (par. 52).
Section XVIII
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
54. DESCRIPTION.
a. The engine lubricating system consists of five major units; the
main or pressure and suction pump, scavenger pump, oil filter, oil cooler,
and oil supply tank (figs. 19 and 20).
6. Oil is drawn from the supply tank through a strainer by the oil
pressure pump and is forced to the bearings and other moving parts of
the engine. An adjustable pressure relief valve built into the pump
housing regulates the pressure by allowing the excess oil to pass to the
inlet side of the pump. Oil which passes the lubrication points of the
engine collects in the engine oil sump, and is returned by the suction
and scavenger pumps through the oil filter to the supply tank.
c. The oil temperature control valve mounted above the oil sup-
ply tank allows cold oil to pass directly from the filter to the supply
tank; as the oil temperature rises the valve closes and the oil is passed
through the oil cooler on the bulkhead before reaching the supply
tank.
55. DRAINING AND FILLING SYSTEM.
a. Draining. Remove the hull floor ring plate under the oil supply
tank. Remove the engine hull floor cover and the lower section of the
engine cowling. Remove the drain plug from the engine oil sump, and
allow the oil to drain from the system. -
b. Filling (fig. 21). Install the drain plugs in the supply tank and
the engine oil sump with gasket (G104-1593925). Remove the filler
cap and fill with the proper grade of oil until oil stands in the filler tube
(par. 26). Insert the bayonet gage and push it down into place; this
will vent the top of the supply tank and allow the oil in the filler tube
to run down into the supply tank. After the engine has been run for a
few minutes, remove the filler cap and add oil until it again rises in
the filler tube, then install the filler cap.
Ill
55
2=
TM 9-747
55
111
TM 9-747

TM 9-747
56
OIL TANK GAGE
OIL TANK FILLER NECK
RA PD 332570
Figure 21—Oil Supply Tank Filler Gage
56. OIL PRESSURE AND SUCTION PUMP.
a. Description. The oil pressure pump and the suction pump
operate as separate gear pumps, but are built into a single pump body
mounted on the accessory case at the rear of the engine. An oil strainer
is built into the inlet side of the pressure pump, and the oil pressure
relief valve is built into the pressure side of the pump.
6. Adjustment of Pressure Relief Valve (fig. 22). Remove the
oil pressure relief valve cap, and loosen the adjusting screw lock nut.
Turn the adjusting screw clockwise to raise the pressure, or counter-
clockwise to reduce the pressure. Normal pressure is 40 to 70 pounds
at 1,800 to 2,400 engine revolutions per minute. Tighten the lock nut
and install the cap and lock wire, after making adjustment.
c. Replacement of Oil Pressure Relief Valve (fig. 22). Remove
the lock wire from the cap, and screw the relief valve assembly from
the oil pump body. Place a new gasket over the relief valve body, and
screw the assembly into the pump body. Check the engine oil pressure
114
TM 9-747
56
VALVE ,-SPRING r-VALVE BODY *-ADJUSTING SCREW
-PLUNGER GASKET
OIL PRESSURE
RELIEF
VALVE CAP
OIL PUMP
Q1 taB o
NUT -J GASKET -» f_ CAP
-SCAVENGER PUMP
OUTLET TUBE
RA PD 53536
Figure 22—Oil Pressure Relief Valve
and adjust if necessary (subpar. b above). If no adjustment is re-
quired, install the cap lock wire.
d. Removal of Oil Pressure and Suction Pump.
( 1) DISCONNECT LINKAGE, CABLE, AND TUBE. Disconnect
the oil temperature gage sending unit cable. Disconnect the inlet and
outlet hose from the pump, and raise the ends of the hose above the
oil level in the supply tank. Disconnect the governor linkage at the
carburetor, and disconnect the oil drain tube from the governor.
(2) REMOVE PUMP. Remove lock wire and cotter pins from the
pump attaching nuts and remove the nuts, using wrench (41-W-1577-
500) to remove the nuts from the right side. Pull out the unit and
remove the governor and gage sending unit from the pump. Keep the
accessory case opening covered while the pump is off.
e. Installation of Oil Pressure and Suction Pump.
(1) INSTALL PUMP. Attach the governor and gage sending unit
to the pump. Place the pump (G104-2994152) in position with gasket
(CWR-202-194) and install the attaching nuts and washers (G104-
0103310), using special wrench (41-W-1577-500). Install cotter pins
115
TM 9-747
56-57
Maintenance (nstrucfions
LOW OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH
G1 04-04-1 9385
OIL PRESSURE
SENDING
UNIT KS-40374
OIL TEMPERATURE
SENDING UNIT
CWR-203142
RA PD 313266
Figure 23—Oil Gage Sending Units
through the attaching nuts on the right side of the pump, and a lock
wire through the nuts on the left side.
(2) CONNECT LINKAGE, CABLE, AND TUBE. Connect the
governor linkage to the carburetor, and the oil drain tube to the gov-
ernor. Connect the oil inlet and outlet hose to the pump. Connect the
oil temperature gage sending unit cable.
57. GAGE SENDING UNITS.
a. Description (fig. 23). The oil temperature sending unit is at-
tached to the oil pump at the oil strainer. The oil pressure sending
unit and the low oil pressure switch are mounted to the same fitting
at the left side of the accessory case. The oil pressure sending unit is
the larger of the two units, and is mounted in a vertical position. The
low-pressure switch is. mounted in a horizontal position.
116
TM 9-747
57
FILTER MOTOR
STATIONARY CLEANER
BLADES
GASKET -
LOCK WASHER
CAP SCREW
GASKET
DRAIN PLUG
MANUAL TURNING NUT
MANUAL TURNING SHAFT
ILTER ELEMENT
BODY
RA PD 53535
Figure 24—Engine OH Filter—Disassembled
117
TM 9-747
57-58
GASKET
, STRAINER
OIL PUMP
OIL PUMP
SUCTION TUBE TC^^ _ w, . THERMOMETER
Trm> jiw-' / i ADAPTER
THERMOMETER
RA PD 313273
Figure 25—Engine Oil Suction Strainer
b. Replacement. To replace any one of the oil gage sending units,
remove the cover, disconnect the wire, and screw the unit out of the
fitting. To install, screw the unit into place, connect the wire, and
install the cover.
58. OIL FILTER.
a. Description (fig. 24). The oil filter is a revolving disk-type
filter, mounted above the oil supply tank in the left rear corner of the
engine compartment. The filter disks are rotated by oil pressure from
the accessory case.
b. Data.
Manufacturer Cuno
Type !AT5
• c. Removal (fig. 24). Unscrew the inlet tube on one side and out-
let tube on the other side of the oil filter. Disconnect the oil filter to
accessory case hose at the filter. Remove the bolt from the bracket
that holds the filter body, and lift out the filter. Remove the lock wire,
cap screws, and washers. Lift the filter motor assembly and gasket
from the filter body. Remove the lock wire, gasket, and drain plug
from the bottom of the filter. Thoroughly clean the filter element in
dry-cleaning solvent. Do not disassemble the filter element.
118
TM 9-747
58-60
Engine Lubrication System
d. Installation (fig. 24). Place a new filter body gasket in posi-
tion, and lower the filter motor assembly into the body. Position the
cap screws, tighten, and lock wire together. Screw the drain plug in
place and lock with wire. Place filter in the bracket, install bolt in
bracket, and tighten. Connect and tighten the filter inlet and outlet
hose and the filter to accessory case hose at the filter.
59. OIL SUCTION STRAINER.
a. Description (fig. 25). The oil suction strainer, which is
mounted in the inlet side of the oil pressure pump at the right of the
governor, strains the oil before it enters the oil pump.
b. Removal (fig. 25). Disconnect the wire from the oil tempera-
ture gage sending unit. Remove the sending unit and thermometer
adapter. Remove the spring and strainer.
c. Installation (fig. 25). Clean the strainer and spring thoroughly
and insert them into the pump body. Place a good gasket over the
thermometer adapter, and install the adapter and temperature sending
unit.
60. OIL COOLER.
a. Description (fig. 20). The engine oil cooler is mounted on the
rear of the front engine compartment bulkhead. Circulation of oil
through the oil cooler is controlled by a thermostatic valve mounted
in the engine compartment above the oil supply tank. A by-pass valve
which is located in the top of the oil cooler is thermostatically and
pressure controlled. When the oil starts to reach the cooler, after the
thermostatic valve has opened, the by-pass valve in the cooler is par-
tially open. This allows part of the oil to flow through, and part of the
oil to by-pass the cooler to maintain proper temperature. As the oil
rises in temperature, the by-pass valve closes thermostatically and
causes all the oil to flow through the cooler tubes. If the cooler becomes
clogged, causing a pressure of 40 pounds or over, the by-pass valve is
opened by pressure to avoid damage to the cooler.
b. Removal. Disconnect the oil inlet and outlet pipes. Remove
the cap screws which hold the cooler guard to the bulkhead, and remove
the guard. Remove the cooler attaching cap screws and lift out the
cooler.
c. Installation. Place the cooler in position and install the mount-

ing cap screws. Install the cooler guard. Connect the oil inlet and out-
let pipes and install the section of the subfloor. Check the oil level in
the supply tank and add the amount of oil which was lost when the
cooler was removed.
119
TM 9-747
61-62
61. OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE.
a. Description (figs. 19 and 20). A thermostatically operated
valve is located above the oil supply tank, and in front of the oil filter.
When the oil is cold, the valve shuts off the circulation of oil to the
oil cooler, and allows the oil to pass directly from the filter to the supply
tank. As the oil temperature rises, the valve causes the oil to pass
though the oil cooler before reaching the supply tank.
b. Replacement. Disconnect the oil hose from the valve body and
remove the attaching cap screws. To install, place the valve in position,
and install the attaching cap screws. Connect the oil hose to the valve
body.
62. OIL SUPPLY TANK.
a. Description. The oil supply tank is located in the left rear
corner of the engine compartment. It consists of a supply tank and an
expansion hopper. Air is expelled from the oil in the expansion hopper
before the oil passes to the tank. The tank is filled through a filler tube
which extends through the engine compartment cover. A bayonet gage
(fig. 21) attached to the filler cap indicates the amount of oil in the
engine lubricating system. A breather device built into the filler tube
is intended to prevent overflowing of the tank. When the tank is filled
to the proper level, oil will rise in the filler tube. When the bayonet
gage is inserted into the tube, the oil in the tube will run down into the
tank.
6. Removal.
(1) DRAIN ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM. See paragraph
55a.
(2 ) REMOVE ENGINE. See paragraph 50.
(3) REMOVE OIL SUPPLY TANK. Disconnect the supply tank
inlet oil hose at the top of the tank. Disconnect the oil hose at the
rear of the oil filter. Remove the fire extinguisher nozzle bracket from
the supply tank. Remove the nuts from the bolts, which hold the legs
of the oil tank to the hull, and remove the tank.
c. Installation.
(1) INSTALL OIL SUPPLY TANK. Place the tank in position and
install the attaching nuts. Connect the fire extinguisher nozzle bracket
to the oil tank. Connect the oil hose to the tank and oil filter.

(3) FILL ENGINE LUBRICATING SYSTEM. See paragraph
556.
120
TM 9-747
63-64
Ignition System
Section XIX
IGNITION SYSTEM
63. GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
a. Description. The engines in the vehicles covered by this
manual are furnished with dual ignition from magnetos mounted on
the accessory case. The two magnetos fire two sets of spark plugs
mounted in the front and rear sides of the cylinders. When Scintilla
magnetos are used, they are supplemented by a booster coil connected
through the right-hand magneto to facilitate starting when the engine
is cold. The wiring is protected and shielded by metal conduits to
minimize radio interference. The control wires for the magneto and
booster are connected to a receptacle on the left side of the engine for
convenient connection to the switch wires. The spark plugs are aircraft-
type, with single-ground electrode which can be cleaned and adjusted.
b. Data.
Make Model
Magnetos Bosch MJT-9A-306
or Scintilla VAG-9-DFA
Booster coil Auto-Lite BC 4001
Spark plugs Champion CP-63-S
64 MAGNETOS (BOSCH)
a. Adjustment of Breaker Points.
(1) GENERAL. The adjustment of the magneto breaker points
must be maintained to insure proper ignition. If the points are badly
burned, indicating a faulty condenser, or if the fiber blocks on the cam
followers are badly worn, replace the magneto.
(2) ADJUST BREAKER POINTS (fig. 26). Open the engine
compartment rear doors. Remove the breaker housing cover. Crank
the engine by hand to open the points to their widest position, and
loosen the lock screw which holds the breaker point bracket to the
breaker base. Turn the eccentric screw until the gap between the points
is 0.008 to 0.010 inch (0.009 inch preferred). Tighten the locking
screw. Recheck the gap, and install the breaker housing cover. Close
the engine compartment rear doors.
b. Removal of Magnetos (Engine Out of Vehicle). Remove and
install one magneto at a time if possible, and use the other magneto
to locate the firing position of the engine. When the magnetos are once
timed to the engine, this position cannot change unless mechanical
failure occurs. CAUTION: To avoid unnecessary work, do not lose this
setting. If the crankshaft position is changed with both magnetos re-

TM 9-747
64
BREAKER POINT
BRACKET ATTACHING
SCREW
ECCENTRIC SCREW
FEELER GAGE -1 BREAKER COVER
RA PD 53569
Figure 26—Adjusting Breaker Point Gap (Bosch)
moved, or maintenance inspections necessitate removal of both mag-
netos, use the top dead center indicator (41-1-73-110) and timer
(41-T-1598), as described in paragraph 66. Remove magneto from
the engine as follows:
(1) REMOVE DISTRIBUTOR BLOCK (fig. 27). Remove the
two screws which hold the conduit elbow to the radio shield cover, and
remove the four screws which hold the cover to the magneto. Remove
the four screws which hold the two halves of the cover together, and
remove the cover. Remove the two screws from the underside of the
distributor block and remove the block. Disconnect the ground wire.
(2) REMOVE MAGNETO. CAUTION: // only one magneto is to
be removed, make sure the other unit is grounded. Ground both small
contacts in the ignition conduit receptacle and turn the engine with
the hand crank until the red dot on the magneto cam is adjacent to the
fiber block on the distributor point, so that the point is just starting to
open (fig. 28). This is the firing position on No. 1 cylinder. Both mag-
netos will be in the same position. Remove the lock wire and magneto
mounting nuts, and remove the magneto. Install the new magneto as
outlined in subparagraph c below, and then remove and install the other
unit.
122
TM 9-747
Ignition System
64
CONDUIT ELBOW
ELBOW ATTACHING SCREW
COVER
CLAMPING
BOLTS
RADIO SHIELI
COVER
BLOCK
ATTACHING SCREW
COVER CLAMPING
BOLTS
COVER
ATTACHING
SCREWS
MAGNETO
MOUNTING
HOLES
ALINE DOTS
SPLINES
Figure 27—Magneto (Bosch)
DRIVE SHAFT
RA PD 53603
123
TM 9-747
64
BREAKER
POINTS
LOCK
SCREW
\3^^^P">-- ^-SSr-^ftC^^^.
-CONDENSER
mar/ mwmr fvcvst
ADJUSTING
SCREW
FIBRE
BLOCK
RED DOT
MAGNETO
CAM
RA PD 313263
Figure 28—Timing Position (Bosch)
c. Installation of Magnetos (Engine Out of Vehicle). If a new
unit is to be installed, remove the covers and the distributor block.
CAUTION:The internal timing of the magneto is set when manufac-
tured or overhauled and must not be changed. Do not move the posi-
tion of the breaker point mounting base. The points are spaced at 0.008
to 0.010 inch (0.009 inch preferred) on the high point of the cam. This
adjustment can be checked if desired, as outlined in subparagraph «
(2) above, before installation. Install the magneto on the engine as
follows:
(1) INSTALL NEW GASKET. Coat a new gasket with heavy
grease and place in position on the magneto.
(2) LUBRICATE SHAFT. Apply a small amount of lubricant to
the splined end of the magneto shaft.
(3) TIME MAGNETO TO ENGINE (fig. 28). Position the red
dot on the magneto cam, adjacent to the fiber block on the breaker
point arm, so that the dots on the distributor gear and case line up.
Hold this position and install the magneto on the engine. Start the
124
TM 9-747
Ignition System
WRENCH
(41-W-1555)
LOCK NUT _
BREAKER
POINT SCREW
LER GAGE -> RA PD 53572
Figure 29—Adjusting Breaker Point Gap (Scintilla)
mounting nuts far enough so that the magneto can still be moved on
the elongated mounting holes. Place a 0.001-inch feeler gage between
the points, and move the magneto until the gage can just be drawn
out. Synchronize the magnetos by checking the points in each unit to
see that they open at exactly the same time. If only one magneto is
replaced, space the points in the other magneto (subpar. a above) and
then synchronize the firing of the two units. Tighten the mounting
nuts and install the lock wire.
(4) CONNECT WIRING. The numbers on the distributor block,
which correspond to the numbers taped on the high-tension wires, in-
dicate the firing order of the magneto. These numbers do not indicate
the cylinders to which they are connected. Thus, wire No. 2 is con-
nected to spark plug in cylinder No. 3 as this is the second cylinder to
fire in the order of 1-3-5-7-9-2-4-6-8. Connect the high-tension wires to
the distributor block and connect the ground wire.
(5) INSTALL DISTRIBUTOR BLOCK AND MAGNETO
COVERS. Position the distributor block in the magneto, and secure
with screws. Place the two halves of the magneto cover in place and
start the four screws which attach the cover to the magneto. Start the
four screws which hold the two halves of the cover together, and tighten
all screws securely. Install the conduit elbow on the cover with the
two attaching screws. Install the breaker cover and attaching nuts.
125
TM 9-747
65
65. MAGNETOS (SCINTILLA).
a. Adjustment of Breaker Points.
(1) GENERAL. The adjustment of magneto breaker points must be
maintained to ensure proper ignition. If the points are badly burned,
indicating a faulty condenser, or if the fiber blocks on the cam" fol-
lowers are badly worn, replace the magnetos.
(2) ADJUST BREAKER POINTS (SCINTILLA) (fig. 29). Open
the engine compartment rear doors. Remove the safety lock rings, un-
hook the clamps, and remove the breaker cover. Crank the engine by
hand to open the points to their widest position. Loosen the lock nut
on the breaker point screw, and adjust the point spacing by turning
the screw with wrench. Space the points to 0.012-inch gap with the
gage on the wrench. Tighten the lock nut and recheck the gap. Install
the breaker cover.
6. Removal of Magnetos (Engine Out of Vehicle). Remove and
install one magneto at a time, if possible, and use the other magneto
to locate the firing position of the engine. When the magnetos are once
timed to the engine, this position cannot change unless mechanical
failure occurs. CAUTION: To avoid unnecessary work, do not lose this
setting. If the crankshaft position is changed with both magnetos re-
moved or maintenance inspections necessitate removal of both mag-
netos, use the top dead center indicator (41-1-73-110) and timer (41-
T-1598) as described in paragraph 66. Remove magneto from engine
as follows:
(1) REMOVE BREAKER COVER AND POINTS (fig. 30). Re-
move the lock wire rings and unhook the latches which hold the cover
over the breaker points. Remove the breaker cover to release the
bayonet lock which holds the breaker in the housing. Push the bronze
lever to the right. Remove the breaker assembly and spring washer.
CAUTION: Remove the breaker assembly from both magnetos to
avoid accidental starting of the engine.
(2) REMOVE DISTRIBUTOR BLOCK COVERS (fig. 30). Re-
move the two screws which hold the conduit elbow flange to the top of
the cover. Remove the two bolts which clamp the upper ends of the
two halves of the cover together. Remove the safety wire pins, unhook
the spring latches at the bottom of each half of the cover, and remove
the half toward the outside of the vehicle. Loosen the conduit coupling
lock rings at the elbow so that they will turn. Unscrew the two bakelite
connector nuts, and disconnect the booster (right magneto only) and
ground wires from the top of the magneto. Raise the wiring harness,
with the distributor blocks attached, up far enough to permit removal of
the inside half of the cover.
(3) REMOVE MAGNETO. Remove and install one magneto at a
time, if possible, so that the other magneto can be used to locate the fir-
126
TM 9-747
65
Ignition System
DISTRIBUTOR COVERS
COVER LATCH
DISTRIBUTOR BLOCKS
MAGNETO MOUNTING
HOLE
CONDUIT ELBOW
ELBOW ATTACHING SCREWS
COVER CLAMPING BOLTS
BREAKER COVER
CRIBE MARKS
DISTRIBUTOR GEAR
Figure 30—Magneto (Scintilla)
RA PD 53573
127
TM 9-747
65
ing position. Crank the engine by hand and aline the two scribe marks
on the distributor gear with those on the case, just to the right of the
center web of the magneto frame. This is the firing position of No. 1
cylinder. Remove the lock wire and mounting nuts from the flange of
the magneto, and remove the magneto.
c. Installation of Magnetos (Engine Out of Vehicle).
(1) TIME ENGINE. If the position of the crankshaft as set for re-
moval (subpar. b (3 ) above) has not been changed, the new unit can be
installed by timing the magneto to the engine as described in step (2)
below. If the position of the crankshaft has been changed, remove the
covers and raise the right distributor block on the other magneto and
crank the engine until the scribe marks line up. This will place No. 1
piston on firing position. Install the new magneto (step (2) below). If
both magnetos have been removed, and the crankshaft position has
been changed, set the engine timing with the top dead center indicator
(41-1-73-110) and timer (41-T-1598) as described in paragraph 66.
(2) TIMING MAGNETO TO ENGINE (fig. 30). Remove the
breaker point assembly and the distributor blocks from the new mag-
neto. CAUTION: The internal timing or "E" (efficiency) gap, which is
controlled by the two set screws extending through both sides of the
breaker housing, is set when the magneto is manufactured or over-
hauled. Do not change this adjustment. Place a new gasket on the mag-
neto mounting flange with a small amount of heavy grease to hold it in
place. Lubricate the splined end of the magneto rotor shaft slightly.
Turn the shaft until the scribe marks on the distributor gear line up
with the marks on the housing. Hold this position and mount the mag-
neto on the engine. Tip the magneto from side to side to line up the
shaft with the coupling, and start the mounting nuts enough so the mag-
neto can still be moved on the elongated slots in the mounting. Move
the magneto as required to perfectly aline the scribe marks, as the
points will not open at this position. Tighten the flange nuts and install
the lock wire.
(3) REPLACE DISTRIBUTOR BLOCKS (fig. 30). Loosen the set
screws in the distributor blocks, below the contacts, which hold the
wires into the blocks, and pull out the wires. To install, push the spark
plug wires into the holes which are numbered to correspond with the
number on the wire. Use a small amount of powdered talc on the wires
to prevent fusing to the block. Tighten the set screws. NOTE: Install
the block with the five wire connections on the left side of the magneto.
(4) CONNECT GROUND AND BOOSTER WIRES. Place the
distributor blocks into position on the magneto and slide the rubber
grommet over the ground and booster wire (ground wire only on left
magneto). Screw the ground wire into the front hole in the bakelite
terminal receptacle on top of the magneto (both magnetos). Screw the
booster high-tension wire into the rear hole on the receptacle block
128
65
129
INDI
TM 9-747
BREATHER
CRANKCASE
RA PD 313257
Ignition System
TOP DEAD CENTER

Indicator, (41-1-73-110)
Figure 31—Timer (41-T-1598; and Top Dead Center

TM 9-747
65-66
Maintenance Ins/ructions
(right magneto only). Tighten connector screws securely and place
the rubber grommet down over the knurled ends of the connectors.
CAUTION: Do not connect the booster to the front contact; this would
damage the magneto.
(5) INSTALL COVERS AND BREAKER POINT ASSEMBLY.
Position the distributor block covers on the magneto and install the two
bolts which clamp the top of the two halves of the covers together.
Hook the latches at the bottom of the covers and install the safety pin
wires. Install the breaker point assembly, and position the lever of the
assembly to the extreme right. Install the breaker point cover and in-
stall the lock wire rings.
66. TIMING ENGINE WITH TOP DEAD CENTER INDICATOR
AND TIMER.
a. Time the Engine for Installation of Magneto (Engine Out
of Vehicle). If the position of the crankshaft is changed while both
magnetos are removed, it will be necessary to ascertain the proper fir-
ing position of No. 1 piston before installing the magneto. The proper
firing position is 25 degrees of crankshaft travel before top dead center
of the piston for Scintilla magnetos, and 4 degrees before top dead cen-
ter for Bosch magnetos.
6. Set No. 1 Piston at Top Dead Center (fig. 31). Remove the
rear spark plug from No. 1 cylinder and feel for an exhaust of air from
the spark plug hole while the engine is cranked by hand. When the
compression stroke is indicated by air forced from the cylinder, install
the top dead center indicator. Continue to crank the engine until the
dial gage indicates that the piston is operating the indicator, then crank
very slowly until the indicator hand stops. The piston will then be at
top dead center.
c. Set Firing Position (fig. 31). Attach the timer scale on the
clutch bolts and the pointer on the cowling. Position the pointer so that
it points to 0 on the scale. The timer will then indicate the top dead
center position of No. 1 piston, and the scale attached to the clutch will
indicate degrees of crankshaft travel. Turn the engine in the reverse
direction with the fan blades (clockwise when facing flywheel) ap-
proximately Vi turn to overcome backlash. Then turn the flywheel
slowly in the direction of rotation until the timer pointer indicates 4

degrees ahead of 0 on the timer scale (Bosch magneto) or 25 degrees

ahead of 0 (Scintilla magneto). This is the firing position of No. 1 pis-
ton. NOTE: The scale is graduated 20 degrees on each side of the 0.
When using the scale on Scintilla-equipped engines, make an additional
scribe mark indicating 25 degrees to the right of the 0.
130
TM 9-747
67
Ignition System
67. FIELD REPLACEMENT OF MAGNETOS AND EMER-
GENCY ADJUSTMENTS.
«. Field Replacements. Do not attempt to substitute one make
of magneto for another when making field replacements, as the wiring
is different for the two installations. The magnetos can be replaced in
the field, working through the engine compartment rear doors in exactly
the same manner as outlined in paragraph 64 b (Bosch) and paragraph
65 b (Scintilla). CAUTION: Do not remove both magnetos at the
same time or lose the firing position, as the top dead center indicator
and timer cannot be used while the engine is in the vehicle. Synchonize
the two Bosch magnetos so that they fire at the same time, or perfectly
BREAKER
PLATE
LOCK
SCREWS
TIMING COLLAR
LAY STRAIGHT EDGE
ACROSS CUT-OUT
SECTION OF TIMING
SCRIBE MARKS-<" COLLAR AND SCRIBE MARKS
RA PD 53571
Figure 32—Alining Timing Collar and Scribe Marks (Bosch)
aline the scribe marks on both Scintilla magnetos. NOTE: Check the
engine timing with gage at earliest opportunity.
b. Replace Points and Set "E" (Efficiency) Gap.
(1) BOSCH. In an emergency, the contact points and condenser can
be replaced if the parts are available. This will necessitate setting the
"E" gap so that the points open in the proper relation to the position of
the magneto rotor. Replace and space the points 0.009 inch, and posi-
tion the cam with the dot adjacent to the fiber block on the cam follower.
Place a scale or straightedge across the cut-out in the timing collar on
131
TM 9-747
67-69
the cam, so that the scale indexes with the notches or scribe marks in
the breaker housing, as shown in figure 29. Loosen the three breaker
base screws. Aline the timing dots on the gear and case, and shift the
base assembly so that the points just start to open (0.001-in. gap).
Tighten the breaker base. NOTE: Check the engine timing with gage
at earliest opportunity.
(2) SCINTILLA. The breaker and point assembly (SCI-2-841) is
furnished for the Scintilla magneto, and an emergency replacement can
be made. Install and space the new points 0.012 inch. Do not attempt
to alter the "E" gap setting, as the allowable tolerance in timing the
unit will permit satisfactory performance until the magneto can be
replaced and the timing properly checked.
68. BOOSTER COIL.
a. General. The booster coil is a vibrator-type high-tension induc-
tion coil supplementing the Scintilla magneto ignition, to facilitate
starting when the engine is cold. The output of the coil is connected
through the right-hand magneto and "trails," or is later than, the mag-
neto ignition. The action of the booster increases engine speed to assist
in reaching the cut-in speed of the magneto.
b. Replacement (fig. 9). Unscrew the conduit coupling rings on
the coil and disconnect the leads. Remove the two mounting screws
and remove the coil. To install, mount the coil on the engine support
frame with the two screws, connect the wires to the coil, and attach the
conduit.
69. SPARK PLUGS.
a. Description. The spark plugs (CWR-209-160) are aircraft-
type, Champion model (CP-63-S), with single-ground electrode. The
electrodes are spaced at 0.017 to 0.019 inch with a round feeler gage.
Gaskets are furnished with the plugs.
6. Replacement. Remove the engine compartment top cover and
the hull floor cover. Remove the inspection plates from the front engine
cowling. Disconnect the spark plug wires and conduits. Remove the
spark plugs with a socket wrench. To install, coat the new gasket
with a small amount of antiseize compound (mica base) and place it
on the plug. Install the plugs in the cylinder and tighten with the special
socket wrench to 28 to 30 foot-pounds tension.

in
TM 9-747
70-72
fuel and Air Intake and Exhaust Systems
Section XX
FUEL AND AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
70. DESCRIPTION.
«. Fuel is supplied to the carburetor at a pressure of approximately
3 Vfc pounds. The fuel travels from the vertical fuel tanks through built-
in filters to shut-off valves, and then is drawn up into the fuel pump
located above the carburetor. The fuel pump forces the fuel to the
carburetor.
6. A fuel tube connects the left fuel valve to the priming pump.
Fuel drawn into the priming pump by the operation of the pump plunger
is forced to the priming distributor, and through the tubes into the top
seven cylinders of the engine.
c. The exhaust gases pass through right and left manifolds, exhaust
pipes, and tail pipes, and are expelled from the rear of the hull. A
deflector, mounted on the exterior of the hull, can be set to deflect the
exhaust away from the ground to avoid unwanted creation of dust.
71. AIR CLEANERS.
a. Description. Two oil-bath type air cleaners are located on the
outside of the engine compartment, one on either side of the gun mount.
Air enters the air cleaners through the upper air intake tubes, passes
through a stationary and prefilter element, is cleaned by the oil in the
oil cup, and is passed out through the lower intake tubes to the carbu-
retor. The dirt collected drains to the bottom of the oil cup.
6. Maintenance. When servicing the air cleaners, inspect the
complete air intake system for leakage, especially the bellows, tubes,
and connections between the air cleaners and the carburetor air horns.
Dirt entering at those points is drawn directly into the engine. The
amount of sediment in the oil cup should not exceed Va inch.
c. Cleaning and Servicing. Loosen the oil cup wing nuts, push
the rods away and lower the oil cup. Unscrew the prefilter wing nuts
and remove the prefilter. Clean the prefilter, the oil cup, and the disk
assembly in dry-cleaning solvent. After cleaning, place the prefilter in
position, and tighten the wing nuts. Place the disk assembly inside the
oil cup, and fill the oil cup to the level mark with the proper grade of
oil (par. 26). Install the cup, and tighten the wing nuts.
72. FUEL FILTERS.

a. Description (fig. 33). Fuel filters are built into the side of the
vertical fuel tanks near the floor. Fuel shut-off valves are screwed into
the filter flanges. The filter elements (B201146) are of the full-flow
in
TM 9-747
72-73
CLUTCH RELEASE
BEARING YOKE
CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING
YOKE SHOES
-FUEL FILTERS
. OIL COOLER .SHUTTERS —
FIRE EXTINGUISHER NOZZLES
Figure 33—Location of fuel Filters
RA PD 337573
type, and cannot be cleaned unless the filter is removed from the fuel
tank.
b. Removal and Cleaning. Drain fuel tanks. Remove floor plate
in engine compartment. Disconnect fuel lines and shut-off valves. Un-
screw shut-off valve from each filter flange. Remove cap screws which
hold filter body to fuel tank and remove filter. Do not disassemble the
filter. Clean filter elements in dry-cleaning solvent.
c. Installation. Place the filter in the fuel tank with gasket in posi-
tion, and install lock washers and cap screws. Screw in shut-off valve
and connect fuel lines. Install engine compartment floor plate.
73. PRIMER AND FUEL PUMP.
a. Description.
(1) The fuel pump is mounted to the accessory case above and to
the right of the carburetor (fig. 35). The pressure is regulated at ap-
proximately 3Va pounds.
(2) The primer pump (fig. 34) is bracket-mounted in front of the
driver to provide a means of injecting a spray of fuel into the engine
intake pipes to facilitate starting. The "pulling" stroke of the primer
draws a charge of gasoline into the cylinder. The "push" stroke delivers
the gasoline to the primer distributor, then through lines to the top
134
TM 9-747
73-74
Fuel and Ait Intake and Exhoust Systems
INTAKE PIPE—i
BREATHER-
PRIMING LINE TO
No. 1 CYLINDER
PRIMING
DISTRIBUTOR
INTAKE
CONNECTION
PRIMING LINES TO
CYLINDERS
Nos. 7, 8 and 9
PRIMING DISTRIBUTOR
PRIMING LINES TO
CYLINDERS Nos. 2, 3 and 4
RA PD 53579
Figure 34—Priming Distributor and Lines
seven cylinders of the engine. The primer pump contains a strainer
which may be removed and cleaned.
b. Fuel Pump Replacement (fig. 35). Disconnect the inlet and
outlet tubes to the fuel pump. Disconnect the oil drain tubes from the
governor and fuel pump body. Remove the nuts that hold the fuel pump
body to the accessory case, and remove the fuel pump. To install, place
new gasket (G103-1593607) in position and install the fuel pump and
attaching nuts. Connect the oil drain tubes and the inlet and outlet
tubes.
74. GOVERNOR.
«. Adjust Governor. Disconnect the linkage from the governor
butterfly valve arm on the manifold, loosen the governor adjusting
screw lock nut, and set the adjusting screw to just start a slight tension
on the governor spring. Hold the butterfly arm against the stop on the
manifold to maintain wide open position and adjust the linkage to line
up the clevis pin hole. Install the clevis pin and cotter pin.
6. Check Governor Setting. Start the engine, warm up if neces-
sary and accelerate to top speed. The governor should control the speed
of the engine at 2,400 revolutions per minute. If the speed is not prop-
erly controlled, adjust the governor adjusting screw to add more tension
1*5
TM 9-747
74-75
to the spring to raise the governed speed or reduce the spring tension
to lower the governed speed. Lock the governor adjusting screw when
the proper setting is obtained. NOTE: In the event the adjusting screw
has been turned all the way in without sufficient speed (revolutions per
minute) being obtained, unscrew the auxiliary adjusting screw (eye
bolt) several turns and again adjust the governor adjusting screw (sub-
par. « above).
c. Removal. Disconnect the oil line from the bottom of the gov-
ernor housing, disconnect the linkage, remove the four mounting nuts
which hold the governor on the engine, and remove the governor.
d. Installation. Install the governor on the engine with a new
gasket and secure with the four castellated nuts. Lock wire the mount-
ing nuts. Adjust the governor and connect the linkage as explained in
subparagraph « above, and check the setting as explained in subpara-
graph b above.
75. CARBURETOR.
a. Description (fig. 35 ). The carburetor is attached to the rear of
the engine. Gasoline and air are mixed in the carburetor before entering
the supercharger housing. Adjustments are provided for engine idling
speeds and for idling fuel mixture. When the clutch pedal is all the way
up, the normal engine idling speed of 800 revolutions per minute is con-
trolled by adjustable linkage between the clutch release cross shaft and
the accelerator cross shaft. When the clutch pedal is depressed the
idling linkage at the cross shafts becomes inoperative, and the engine
idling speed is then controlled by the idle speed adjustment screw at the
top right side of the carburetor. The idle speed adjustment screw may
be adjusted to allow a lower idling speed when shifting transmission
gears.
b. Data.
Manufacturer Stromberg
Model NAR9G
c. Adjustment oj Engine Idling Speed.
(1) ADJUST NORMAL IDLING SPEED. With the engine run-
ning at normal operating temperature and the clutch pedal all the way
up, adjust the linkage at the cross shafts below the driver's seat so that
the engine will idle at 800 revolutions per minute.

(2) ADJUST LOW IDLING SPEED (fig. 35). After the normal
idling speed adjustment has been made (step (1) above), hold the
clutch pedal in the depressed position, and adjust the idle speed adjust-
ment screw at the carburetor, so that the engine will idle at approxi-
mately 400 revolutions per minute.
d. Adjustment of Idle Fuel Mixture (fig. 36). The idle mixture
adjustment lever is located in the center and to the top of the carbu-
116
75
137
TM 9-747

TM 9-747
75-76
retor. Push the lever to the right to lean the mixture, or to the left to
enrich the mixture.
e. Drain Plugs and Strainer (figs. 35 and 36). Two drain plugs
are located in each float chamber. Remove the plugs to drain the
chamber. The fuel strainer is located at the bottom left side of the car-
buretor. Remove the plug in the bottom of the strainer housing to take
out the screen for cleaning.
/. Removal of Carburetor (fig. 35). Close fuel tank valves. Dis-
connect the clamps from the bellows-type flexible couplings at the
lower end of the air intake tubes, and remove couplings from the air
horns. Cover the air horn openings. Disconnect the fuel hose at carbu-
retor. Disconnect oil drain tube at the governor and at the fuel pump
elbow. Remove cotter pins and clevis pins from the governor arm and
the throttle rod. Unscrew knurled nut and disconnect lead at the idle
cut-off and degasser. Take out the bolts which hold the carburetor to
the throttle box. Tilt the carburetor toward the doors, and lift it out.
g. Installation of Carburetor (fig. 35). Place a gasket on the
carburetor flange, and attach the assembly to the governor throttle box.
Position the accelerator rod and governor arm, and secure with clevis
and cotter pins. Connect the oil drain tubes to the governor and fuel
pump elbow. Connect the fuel inlet hose to the carburetor. Connect the
lead wire at the idle cut-off and degasser, and tighten the knurled nut.
Uncover the air horn openings. Place the air intake bellows couplings
over the ends of the air horn, and tighten clamps in place. Open fuel
tank valves. Check for leaks, and adjust carburetor (subpars. r and d
above).
76. FUEL TUBES AND VALVES.
«. Fuel Tubes. All fuel tubes are covered where necessary to pre-
vent damage. When fuel tubes are replaced, bend the new tube to con-
form to the shape of the old tube. Two fuel shut-off valves, one for the
left tanks, and one for the right tanks, are located at the bottom of the
vertical fuel tanks in the engine compartment. The valves are operated
by controls located on the driver's compartment side of the bulkhead.
Control handles are horizontal when valves are closed and vertical
when valves are open.
b. Replacement of Fuel Valve. Drain fuel tanks. Remove en-

gine compartment inspection cover from the hull floor. Disconnect the
fuel pipes from the fuel valve. Disconnect the fuel valve control rod
and unscrew the valve from the filter flange. To install fuel valve, screw
the valve into filter flange. Connect the fuel valve control rod and con-
nect the fuel tubes to fuel valve. Check for leaks with a small amount
of fuel in the tanks before filling tanks completely.
c. Replacement of Fuel Shut-off Valve Assembly. Remove the
cotter pin and disconnect the control rod ball joint on the engine side
138
TM 9-747
76-77
Fuel and Air Intake and Exhaust Systems
CARBURETOR ELBOW
FUEL PUMP
r•
GOVERNOR
DRAIN TUBE
IDLE MIXTURE
ADJUSTMENT
AIR INLET
OPENING
FLOAT BOWL DRAIN PLUG
FLOAT BOWL DRAIN PLUG—/ RA PD 53580
Figure 36—Rear of Carburetor
of the bulkhead. Take out the flange screws and remove the shut-off
valve control assembly from the driver's compartment side of bulk-
head. To install, position the assembly and attach to bulkhead. Con-
nect and install cotter pins in the control rod ball joint.
77. IDLE CUT-OFF AND DEGASSER.
«. Description (fig. 35). The idle cut-off and degasser is intended
to eliminate backfire and to prevent forming of obnoxious gases caused
by an overrich fuel mixture that does not burn during deceleration. The
degasser is operated by the variation of vacuum in the intake manifold,
and by an electric solenoid which is controlled by a push-button switch
on the instrument panel.
b. Adjustment. Remove the seal cap and turn adjusting screw
clockwise until tight. With engine warmed up, and idle speed and idle
mixture adjusted properly, back off the adjusting screw about 6 or 8
notches until the engine surges or rolls. Then accelerate the engine to
governed speed (2,400 revolutions per minute) with no-load, and sud-
denly close the throttle and allow the engine to return to idle. If engine
139
TM 9-747
77-78
rolls or stops when normal idle is reached, turn adjusting screw in
(clockwise) a notch or two and test. Repeat adjustment until the engine
resumes idling in a normal manner.
c. Replacement (fig. 35). Unscrew the knurled nut at the end of
the flexible conduit, and remove terminal from the post. Unscrew the
two long screws and remove the cut-off body from the carburetor. To
install, place a gasket (G104-1593998), on the flange and attach the
degasser to the carburetor with two long screws. Position and tighten
the terminal in front of the body, and tighten the knurled nut.
78. FUEL TANKS AND GAGE.
a. Description. The four fuel tanks have a total capacity of 172
gallons. Two 30-gallon vertical tanks are located in the front corners
of the engine compartment, and two 56-gallon horizontal tanks are lo-
cated on each side of the engine compartment on the sponsons. The
horizontal and vertical tanks are connected with a single fuel valve
in each vertical tank.
6. Draining Fuel Tanks.
(1) VERTICAL TANK. Remove the drain cover plate in the floor
and unscrew the drain plug at the bottom of the tank.
(2) HORIZONTAL TANK. Unscrew the cap screws that hold the
drain plug cover plate under the sponson tank, and remove the drain
plug in the bottom of the tank.
c. Removal of Vertical and Horizontal Fuel Tanks.
(1) DRAIN FUEL TANKS. See subparagraph b above.
(2 ) REMOVE ENGINE. See paragraph 50.
(3) REMOVE VERTICAL TANK. Disconnect fuel gage wire.
Loosen clamps which hold conduits to gas tank shields, and remove
shields. Remove the armor support bracket over the vertical tank.
Disconnect fuel pipes and remove the filter at the bottom of the tank
and raise tank out of lower pocket. If necessary to replace fuel tank
gage unit, remove the screws that hold the unit to the tank and lift
out the unit. NOTE: Mark the position of gage so that new gage will
be installed in the same position.
(4) REMOVE HORIZONTAL TANK. After the vertical tank has
been removed, remove oil filter, oil control valve, and filler tube, and
disconnect fire extinguisher tubes if left tank is to be removed. Take

out the cap screws which hold the tank shield to the hull, and remove
the shield. Unscrew the bolts from the tank straps, spread the straps
and pull out the tank.
d. Installation of Vertical and Horizontal Fuel Tanks.
(1) INSTALL HORIZONTAL TANK. Position the horizontal tank
on the sponson shelf, bend the tank straps back over the tank, and
TM 9-747
78-80
tighten with the clamping bolts. Install the tank shield and attaching
cap screws. Connect fire extinguisher tubes (if left tank has been in-
stalled), install oil control valve, filler tube, and oil filter.
(2) INSTALL VERTICAL TANK. Place vertical tank in position
in the lower pocket. Bolt the armor support bracket to the bulkhead
and adjust tank hold-down screws. Install shield. Position and secure
conduits to tank shield with conduit clamps. Install filter in fuel tank,
and connect the fuel pipes.
(3) INSTALL ENGINE. S§e paragraph 51.
79. EXHAUST MANIFOLDS.
it. General (fig. 9). The exhaust manifolds can be removed in
sections or as assemblies. The four upper sections and the three lower
sections can be replaced with the engine in the vehicle. To replace
the lower sections of the left manifold, it is necessary to remove the
plate from the engine compartment floor. If the center sections or the
assemblies are to be replaced, it is necessary to remove the engine.
It. Removal.
(1) REMOVE UPPER OR LOWER SECTIONS. If the lower sec-
tion of the left manifold is to be removed, remove plate from engine
compartment floor. Loosen the manifold clamps and slide the clamps
away from the junction of the manifold sections. Remove the lock
wire and nuts from the flange studs at the cylinder with wrench
(41-W-1471), and remove the section of the manifold.
(2) REMOVE CENTER SECTIONS OR ASSEMBLIES.
(a) Remove Engine. See paragraph 50.
(b) Remove Manifold from Engine. Loosen and move the engine
mounting beam away from the manifold far enough to allow the mani-
fold to clear the flange studs. Remove the flange stud nuts. If center
section only is to be removed, loosen the clamps, and move them away
from the junction of the manifold sections.
c. Installation. Remove all traces of gasket from the flanges and
place new gasket (G104-0100680), over the flange studs. Place the
manifold clamps over the manifold if they were removed. Position the
manifold section or assemblies and install the flange stud nuts with
wrench (41-W-1471), and lock wire. Slide the manifold clamps into
position, and tighten, if only the sections of the manifold were re-
moved. If center section or assembly was removed, install the engine

mounting beam and install the engine (par. 51).
80. EXHAUST PIPES AND TAIL PIPES.
«. Removal. Raise the rear section of the engine compartment
cover. Loosen the clamps on the exhaust pipe. Telescope and remove
141
TM 9-747
80-82
the pipe. Remove the cap screws which hold the tail pipe brackets to
the hull, and remove the tail pipes.
b. Installation. Place the tail pipe in position and install the at-
taching cap screws. Slide the exhaust pipe over the end of the manifold
and into the tail pipe, and tighten the clamps.
Section XXI
STARTING SYSTEM
81. DESCRIPTION.
a. Description oj System. The starting system consists of a 24-
volt starter, equipped with a hand crank attachment mounted on the
engine accessory case (fig. 9). The starter is connected, through the
bulkhead terminal box, to a solenoid in the battery switch box (fig. 37)
by a cable marked "16." The solenoid is connected to the 24-volt bus
bar by a cable marked "17" and the actuating circuit of the solenoid
is connected to the switch marked "STARTER" on the instrument
panel by a wire marked "18." When the switch is operated, the actu-
ating circuit of the solenoid is energized, which closes the heavy cur-
rent circuit through the cables to the starter. The solenoid eliminates
the necessity of running heavy cables to the front of the tank, and the
use of a large capacity switch for completing the circuit.
b. Data.
Manufacturer Delco-Remy
Model 108685
Voltage 24
Rotation Clockwise
82. STARTER.
a. Removal, (fig. 9). Open the 24-volt battery switch. Open the
rear doors and remove the terminal housing cover from the starter
cable terminal housing. Unscrew the conduit coupling ring and remove
the conduit clamp from the hull wall. Disconnect the cable from the
terminal and pull the cable out of the terminal housing. Remove the
lock wire and mounting nuts from the cranking motor flange studs
with special wrench (41-W-871-45) and remove the assembly.
b. Installation (fig. 9). Position the starter on the attaching studs
with the hand crank attachment up. Install the nuts and lock wire.
Connect the cable to the terminal, attach the conduit, and tighten the
TM 9-747
82-84
Battery and Lighting System
coupling ring. Install the conduit clamp to the hull wall, and screw
the terminal housing cover in place. Turn on the 24-volt battery switch.
Place the gearshift lever in neutral, and press the starter switch on the
instrument panel to test the operation of the starter. If operation is un-
satisfactory, refer to paragraph 39. Then turn off the 24-volt battery
switch and close the rear doors.
83. STARTER SOLENOID.
a. Removal (fig. 37). Turn off both battery switches. Remove the
cover from the battery switch box, and disconnect the wires and cables
from the solenoid terminals. Note the identifying numbers on the cables
and wires, so that proper connections can be made when installing
the solenoid. Remove the attaching screws which hold the solenoid
bracket to the switch box, and remove the solenoid.
b. Installation (fig. 37). Position the solenoid in the battery
switch box, and install the attaching screws. Connect the cables and
wires (according to identifying numbers), and make sure that the
solenoid ground wire is secure. Place the gearshift lever in neutral, and
warn any personnel who may be working in engine compartment. Turn
on the 24-volt battery switch and press the starter switch to test the
operation of the solenoid. If solenoid operation is unsatisfactory, refer
to paragraph 39. Turn off the battery switch, and install the battery
switch box cover.
Section XXII
BATTERY AND LIGHTING SYSTEM
84. GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
a. Battery Charging System. The battery charging system con-
sists of a generator driven from the drive shaft. The output of the gen-
erator is controlled by the generator regulator, and the current flow is
indicated by an ammeter in the circuit. The charging circuit is pro-
tected by circuit breakers.
b. Lighting System.
(1) DESCRIPTION. All lights on the outside of the vehicle are
operated through the main light switch on the instrument panel, and
the wiring is protected by a circuit breaker on the instrument panel
marked "LIGHTS." The dome lights in the hull are controlled by a
switch mounted on each light, and these circuits are protected by a

circuit breaker on the instrument panel marked "ACCESSORIES."

143
x
•
o
o
0
0
X
o.
eo
"O
84
0>
TM 9-747
TM 9-747
84-85
Bottery and lighting System
(2) DATA.
Lamp Name Part No.
Blackout tail sealed beam—right and left M001-0107403
Blackout driving light sealed beam MOO 1-0107347
Headlight sealed beam G104-1819407
Service tail sealed beam G104-1819401
Spotlight sealed beam M001-0113039
Instrument panel
Low oil pressure signal A-213667-A
Dome light
Blackout marker
85. BATTERIES.
«. Description (fig. 37). Two 12-volt lead-acid type batteries are
connected in series with the 24-volt switch on the battery switch box.
This circuit furnishes 24 volts to the electrical system, and a separate
lead from one battery to the 12-volt switch supplies voltage for a radio
circuit. The batteries are housed in a box mounted on the left sponson,
with the battery switch box mounted on the forward end of the battery
box. The negative (-) lead of the system is grounded to the tank hull.
fe. Maintenance and Tests.
(1) ELECTROLYTE. The water in the electrolyte solution will
evaporate in high temperatures or with excessive charging rates. In-
spect the electrolyte level and fill the batteries as required.
(2) VOLTAGE TEST. Test each battery cell separately. Press the
prods of the voltage tester firmly against the negative and positive posts
of the cell. The voltmeter attached to the tester should indicate 1.9
to 2.2 volts for each cell in the battery.
(3) HYDROMETER TEST. Remove the battery filler caps and
test the electrolyte solution with a hydrometer. The charge in the bat-
tery (specific gravity) will be indicated by the figure on the small tube
which shows just above the level of the solution. Add too, or subtract
from, the reading in accordance with the temperature scale on the hy-
drometer to obtain the actual specific gravity. The following hy-
drometer readings show the condition of the battery at atmospheric
temperature 80°F:
Fully charged 1.275 to 1.300

Half charged 1.225

Very low 1.150
If the battery is less than half charged, recharge, or exchange for a
fully charged battery.
(4 ) SPECIFIC GRAVITY FOR HOT CLIMATES. In hot climates
(95°F and above) lower specific gravity electrolyte (1.245) is recom-
mended to avoid excessive deterioration of plates and separators. To
145
TM 9-747
85-86
lower the specific gravity of a fully charged battery, remove the elec-
trolyte to the level of the plates. Add distilled water to bring the battery
fluid up to 3/s of an inch above the plates, then charge the battery until
a specific gravity of 1.245 is obtained.
c. Removal.
(1) DISCONNECT CABLES. Turn off the battery switches. Re-
move the top and side cover from the battery box, disconnect the
ground cable from the battery terminal, then disconnect the other
cables from the battery terminals. Bend the cables leading into the
switch box up out of the way, and pull the jumper cable out of the
battery handles.
(2) REMOVE BATTERIES. Remove the battery hold-down
frames, and lift the batteries out of the box onto the driver's compart-
ment subfloor. CAUTION: Secure assistance to handle the batteries;
do not tip or handle roughly. Attach a sling to the batteries and lift them
out, one at a time, through the turret hatch.
il. Installation.
(1) INSTALL BATTERIES. Inspect the battery box, trays, and
hold-down bolts to see that they are in good condition and free of
corrosion. Replace the fireproof pads in the battery trays if necessary.
Lower the two batteries with a sling through the hatch onto the com-
partment subfloor. Lift one battery into the forward tray with the
terminal posts forward. Place the wooden spacer across the tray against
the end of the forward battery. Then set the rear battery into its tray
with the terminal posts forward. Install the hold-down frames over
the batteries, and tighten the hold-down bolts securely.
(2) CONNECT CABLES. If the battery terminals have been re-
moved, place them on the battery posts, and tighten them securely.
Connect the cables to the terminals with the jumper cable threaded
through the two center handles of the batteries. Tighten the terminal
nuts securely with a toothed lock washer between the terminal nut and
the cable terminal. To prevent corrosion, coat the exposed surfaces of
the terminals with a thin film of general purpose grease, and install
the covers.
86. BATTERY SWITCH BOX.
a. Description (fig. 37 ). The battery switch box is mounted on the'

forward end of the battery box. It provides a housing for the battery
switches, starter solenoid, generator circuit breaker, dome-light circuit
breaker, battery charging receptacle, and terminal blocks for con-
necting wires of the corresponding circuits together. The contents of
the box are accessible by removing the cover on the forward side.
14*
TM 9-747
86
Battery and lighting System
b. Removal (fig. 37).
(1) DISCONNECT BATTERIES. Remove the battery box cover
and disconnect the ground cable.
(2) DISCONNECT WIRING. Remove the switch box cover and
disconnect all wiring leading from the box.
(3) DISCONNECT CONDUITS. Remove the four cap screws
which hold the switch box to the battery box and pull the box up so that
the conduits can be disconnected from the fittings. Pull the wires out
of the fittings and remove the box. Remove all switches, fittings and
terminal blocks from the switch box.
c. Insinuation (fig. 37 ).
(1) ATTACH CONDUITS. Install all fittings, switches, and ter-
minal blocks removed from the old box. Place the wires through the
proper fittings and attach the conduits.
(2 ) MOUNT SWITCH BOX. Mount the box on the end of the bat-
tery box with a toothed lock washer under the heads of the screws
and between the switch box and battery box. Connect the starter sole-
noid ground wire to the lower mounting screw under the solenoid
CLAMP SCREWS
BELT ADJUSTING SCREW
GENERATOR-
Gl 04-26-93201
FRONT UNIVERSAL JOINT
DRIVE PULLEY
Figure 38—Generator
RA PD 313299
147
TM 9-747
86-87
and the receptacle ground cable under the mounting screw below the
receptacle. Tighten the mounting screws.
(3) CONNECT WIRING AND INSTALL COVERS. Connect all
wiring. Connect the battery ground cable. Install the battery box cover
and the switch box cover.
87. GENERATOR.
a. Description (fig. 38). The generator is a 30-volt, 50-ampere
(1,500 watt), shunt-wound unit, bracket-mounted on the rear end of
the transmission. It is driven by two belts from a pulley on the pro-
peller shaft. The belts are adjustable by means of the belt-adjusting
screw which holds the generator in the mounting bracket.
6. Data.
Manufacturer Auto-Lite
Model GER-4804B
c. Removal (fig. 38).
(1) DISCONNECT WIRES. Open the 24-volt battery switch. Re-
move terminal cover from the rear end of generator, disconnect the two
wires, and remove conduit from terminal box. Disconnect the ground
cable by removing the rear cap screw and lock washer on the right-
hand generator guard.
(2) REMOVE GENERATOR. Remove the right-hand and left-
hand generator guards by removing the cap screws and lock washers
which secure them to mounting bracket. Loosen the belt-adjusting
screw and unscrew it out of the lower swivel. Lower the generator, and
slide belts off generator pulley. Remove the clamp screws, and lift gen-
erator out of bracket.
d. Installation (fig. 38).
(1) INSTALL GENERATOR. Mount the generator in saddle
clamps, and aline the dowels to enter the holes in the generator frame
with the ground cable screw toward the top. Install the clamp screws,
raise the generator, and enter the adjusting screw into the lower swivel.
( 2 ) ADJUST BELTS. Place the belts on the pulleys, and tighten the
adjusting screw so that there is Vi-inch deflection of the belt with 8 to
10-pounds pull, measured midway between the pulleys. Lock the ad-
justing screw lock nut. Install the right-hand.and left-hand generator
guards.
(3) CONNECT WIRING. Place the two wires through the hole in
the terminal box, and attach conduit. Connect the two wires to their
respective terminals, tighten the terminal nuts, and install the palnuts.
Install the terminal cover and lock wire the wing nut. Connect the
ground cable to the right-hand generator guard with the cap screw
and lock washer provided.
141
TM 9-747
87
EXTERNAL
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHERY
TERMINAL BOX WITH
COVER REMOVED
REGULATOR
ASSEMBLY
7000061
LOCK WIRE
TERMINAL BOX
COVER
MOUNTING
CUSHION
GROUND STRAP
RA PD 313288
Figure 39—Generator Regulator
149
TM 9-747
88-89
88. GENERATOR REGULATOR.
a. Description, (fig. 39). A 3-unit regulator is used in the gen-
erating circuit for controlling the output of generator. The regulator
contains a reverse current circuit breaker to disconnect the battery
circuit when the generator is not charging, a current limit relay, a volt-
age control, and a radio filter. The regulator is shock-mounted. The
generator regulator is mounted on the sponson to the rear of the in-
strument panel.
h. Data.
Make Auto-Lite
Model D-4106-C
Voltage 24
Amperage 50
c. Removal (fig. 39). Open the 24-volt battery switch and remove
the terminal cover from the terminal box. Disconnect the three leads in
the terminal box, unscrew the conduits, and pull out the wires. Hold the
top end of the mounting cushion to prevent twisting, and remove the
four safety nuts which hold the regulator to the mounting cushions.
d. Installation (fig. 39).
(1) INSTALL FITTINGS IN REGULATOR. If the regulator to
be installed does not have elbow fittings in the terminal box, install one
fitting with lock nut in the center hole, and another in the hole which
enters the small section of the terminal box. Lock the fittings in posi-
tion with the outlet down. Install a plug in the remaining hole.
(2) MOUNT REGULATOR. Set the regulator on the mounting
cushions near the left end of the instrument panel. Hold the top end of
the mounting to avoid twisting, and install the attaching nuts.
(3) ATTACH BATTERY LEAD. Insert the wire from the single
wire conduit (battery) into the fitting toward the hull wall, and attach
the wire to the regulator terminal marked "BATT" in the small section
of the terminal box. Attach the conduit to the fitting, and tighten.
(4) INSTALL ARMATURE AND FIELD LEADS. Insert the two
wires from the remaining conduit through the center elbow, and con-
nect the large wire to the terminal marked "ARM" with a toothed
lock washer between the wire terminal and the regulator terminal,
and a plain lock washer under the head of the terminal screw. Con-
nect the small wire to the terminal marked "FIELD." Attach the con-
duit to the elbow, install the terminal cover, and lock wire the wing nuts.
89. HEADLIGHTS.
a. Description (fig. 40). The headlights consist of a lamp-unit
housed in the body of the light, and a blackout marker light mounted on
top of the headlight body. The headlights are carried inside the vehicle
150
TM 9-747
89
until their use is required. The lights are installed in sockets through
the front of the hull. The socket is weathersealed by a plug, which is
chained to the guard and carried in a socket on the side of the guards,
when the headlights are installed.
b. Removal and Installation of Headlights. Unscrew the locking
pin from the headlight socket inside the hull and lift the lamp out of
the guard. To install, place the headlight assembly in the socket, and
tighten the locking pin.
c. Replacement of Headlight Lamp-unit (fig. 40). Remove the
attaching screw at the base of the headlight door. Pull the door out at
the base and lift up. Disconnect the wire at the back of the lamp-unit.
DOOR
-ATTACHING
SCREW
WIRE TO MOUNTING RING
BLACKOUT MARKER
LAMP-A213667A
RETAINER SPRING
BLACKOUT MARKER
LIGHT DOOR
"TOP" MARK
DOOR ATTACHING SCREW
HEADLIGHT DOOR
LAMP-UNIT
G104-18-19407
HEADLIGHT AND BLACKOUT
LIGHT ASSEMBLY-
G104-16-11515
WIRE TO-
LAMP-UNIT
MOUNTING RING
-HEADLIGHT DOOR
RA PD 313305
Figure 40—Headlight and Blackout Marker Light
151
TM 9-747
89
SHOCK
MOUNTING
NUT
LOCK
HOUSING AND
BRACKET
SHOCK
MOUNTING
NUT
LOCK NUT-
LEFT TAILLIGHT
G104-16-71650
BLACKOUT STOP
SIGNAL SEALED BEAM
LAMP-G104-18-19403
(NOT CONNECTED)
COVER
BLACKOUT
TAILLAMP
Ml-01-07403
HOUSING AND BRACKET
1. RIGHT TAILLIGHT DISASSEMBLED
SERVICE, TAIL AND STOP
SEALED LAMP-l'NIT-
Gl 04-18-19401
BLACKOUT TAIL
SEALED LAMP-UNIT
Ml-01-07403
COVER
2. LEFT TAILLIGHT DISASSEMBLED
ATTACHING
SCREW
3. LEFT TAILLIGHT
Figure 41—TaiMighf
RA PD 313284
152
TM 9-747
89-91
Battery and lighting System
Unhook the retainer springs in the mounting ring on the back of the
lamp-unit, and remove the unit. To install, place the lamp-unit in the
door, with the top mark on the lens up, and secure with the mounting
ring. Attach the wire to the terminal on the back of the lamp-unit, and
install the headlight door.
d. Replacement of Blackout Marker Lamp. Remove the attach-
ing screw at the base of the door and lift off the door. Press in on the
lamp, turn counterclockwise and pull out. To install, insert the lamp
into the socket, press in and turn clockwise. Hook the lip on the top of
the door into the slot in the light body, press the door into position, and
install the mounting screw.
90. BLACKOUT DRIVING LIGHT.
a. Description. The blackout driving light (G104-1611516) is
equipped with a shielded 6-volt lamp-unit to limit the volume of light
for use in blackout conditions. The left headlight socket is wired
through a resistor to accommodate the use of the blackout driving light.
b. Removal and Installation; Replacement of Lamp-unit. See
paragraph 89 b and c.
91. TAILLIGHTS.
a. Description. Two shock-mounted taillights (G104-1671650,
left), and (G104-1671649, right) are located on the rear corners of
the vehicle. The left taillight contains a combination service tail and
stop light lamp-unit in the upper part of the light (stop light section
not used) and a blackout taillight lamp-unit in the lower part of the
light. The right taillight contains a blackout stop lamp-unit in the
upper part (not used) and blackout taillight lamp-unit in the lower part.
6. Removal of Lamp-units. Remove the two retaining screws and
lift taillight covers; pull the lamp-unit out of its socket; install the new
lamp-unit; and install the cover.
c. Removal of Taillight Assembly. Remove the attaching screws
which secure taillight to the hull. Turn the lamp assembly toward the
edge of the hull, and raise the assembly so that the conduit, which is at-
tached to the base of the light, will come out through the hole. Unscrew
the conduit coupling ring from the light, and pull the wire connector
out of the base. Remove the two conduit lock nuts, which hold the
shock mount to the base of the light, and remove the mount.
d. Installation of Taillight Assembly. Place the taillight on the

hull and secure it with the attaching screws. Aline the connector into
the base of the light (one hole of the connector is larger than the
others) and push it onto the terminals. Attach the conduit to the base
and tighten the coupling ring.
153
TM 9-747
92-94
92. DOME LIGHTS.
a. Description. Three dome lights are used in the hull; one over
the battery switch box, one over the communication equipment at the
left sponson, and one on the right side of the crew compartment blower.
b. Replacement of Lamp. Remove the light cover attaching
screws, and lift off the cover. Press in on the lamp, turn counterclock-
wise, and pull out. To install, place the lamp in the socket, press in,
and turn clockwise. Position the cover and install the attaching screws.
c. Replacement of Dome Light Assembly. Remove light cover
and lamp (subpar. b above). Disconnect wires at the switch, and tag,
or otherwise identify. Disconnect the conduit at the light. Remove the
mounting screws and lift off the light body. To install, position the
light body and install the mounting screws. Secure the wires to switch
terminals and attach the conduit. Install lamp and cover (subpar. b
above).
93. INSTRUMENT LIGHTS.
a. Replacement of Compass Lamp. Remove the knurled clamp
screw in the center of the course setter disk, and lift off the disk. Un-
screw the knurled lamp holder and lift out. To install, screw the
knurled lamp holder firmly in place. Position the course setter disk
with the locating dowel on the back of the disk in the recess provided
on the compass body, and tighten the clamp screws.
6. Replacement of Instrument Panel Lamps. The instrument
panel lamps are located behind the cover plugs on the instrument
panel. To replace, remove the plugs, push the lamp in, turn it counter-
clockwise, and pull it out of its socket. To install, place the lamp into
the socket, push in and turn clockwise until it locks into the bayonet
socket. Install the cover plugs.
c. Replacement of Low Oil Pressure Warning Lamp. The low
oil pressure warning lamp is in a bayonet socket behind the ruby lens
on the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To replace lamp, re-
move the lens, and replace as described in subparagraph b above.
Section XXIII
CLUTCH
94. DESCRIPTION.
«. The clutch (fig. 42) is a multiple-disk type, mounted inside the

flywheel. It consists of two clutch-driven disks (one outer and one

inner), one driving plate, one pressure plate, and six springs assembled
to the flywheel ring.

I
1
94
TM
—.,
1SS
9-747
Clutch
i
z
o
a
2
2
5
5
1
Z
Z
Z
A
Z
O
Q
O
_J
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
^
^
^
^
^
s.
in
y:
h-
at
at
1-
UJ
UJ
UJ
UJ
UJ
UJ
UJ
UJ
UJ
UJ
<j
o_
O!
(!)
I5
94
Wf
CK
LLJ
LLJ
LLJ
LLJ
u*
>Q
^s
^s
111
Oco
EPAEER
5EPAEER
TM 9-747
TM 9-747
94
Clutch
FLYWHEEl
HOLE FOR PIN
RIVING PLATE
SEPARATOR PINS
DRIVING PLATE
SEPARATOR PIN
1. INSTALLING DRIVING PLATE SEPARATOR PINS
SPINDLE
HUB SECTION
SPINDLE SPLINE
DRIVING PLATE
SEPARATOR PIN
2. INSTALLING SPINDLE
3. INNER DRIVEN DISK IN POSITION
FLYWHEEL
INNER
DRIVEN DISK
DRIVING PLATE
SEPARATOR PINS
RA PD 53594
Figure 44—Installing Inner Driven Disk
157
TM 9-747
94-95
6. The openings in the flywheel ring and flywheel allow the pas-
sage of air for ventilation. Separator pins provide a means of separating
the driven disks and driving plate. An annular release bearing is used.
95. CLUTCH.
a. Removal.
(2) REMOVE UNIVERSAL JOINT COMPANION FLANGE
AND NUT. Pull the cotter pin and remove the nut, washer, and flange.
(3) REMOVE FLYWHEEL RING TO FLYWHEEL BOLT
NUTS (fig. 43). Loosen the lock nuts and screw out the three driving
plate separator studs three turns. Unscrew the flywheel bolt nuts
around the outer edge of flywheel ring. Punch mark the flywheel and
the flywheel ring at one point on each, for identification in assembling
parts.
(4) REMOVE FLYWHEEL RING AND PRESSURE PLATE
ASSEMBLY (fig. 42). Install three % x 4-inch, 16 full-thread (Na-
tional Coarse ) jackscrews in the three holes provided for this purpose,
and tighten them, alternately, until the flywheel ring is forced away from
the flywheel. Tap the end of the spindle and lift off the flywheel ring.
( 5 ) REMOVE PLATES AND SPINDLE ( fig. 42 ). Lift off the outer
driven disk, the driving plate, and the inner driven disk. Pull off the
spindle.
b. Installation.
(1) INSTALL SEPARATOR PINS (1, fig. 44). Insert the small
end of the three driven plate separator pins in the holes in the flywheel.
These pins must be a free fit, and pins must contact the leaf spring on
the rear side of flywheel.
( 2 ) INSTALL SPINDLE ON FLYWHEEL HUB ( 2, fig. 44 ). Wash
the spindle thoroughly in dry-cleaning solvent, and clean all foreign
matter from the spindle bearing inside the opening. Apply compressed
air to the opening of the spindle, and remove all traces of solvent. Wipe
spindle dry, and pack roller bearing with ball and roller bearing grease,
then fill cavity in the spindle flush with inside diameter of the bearing.
Slide the spindle on the hub.
(3) INSTALL INNER CLUTCH DRIVEN DISK IN FLY-
WHEEL (3, fig. 44). Wipe all surfaces clean and make sure the
splines in the hub are free of burs. Be sure the three separator pins are
in place in the flywheel. Position disk with body of hub section away
from flywheel on the splines of the spindle and push the disk into fly-
wheel.
(4) INSTALL DRIVING PLATE IN FLYWHEEL (1, fig. 45).
Wipe all surfaces clean and make sure all burs are removed. Position
TM 9-747
Clutch
95
0.015-0.018 IN.
CLEARANCE AT
THIS POINT AT
EACH DRIVING PIN
DRIVING PLATE
FLYWHEEL DRIVING
PIN-
1. DRIVING PLATE IN POSITION
SPINDLE SPLINES
OUTER DRIVEN DISK
2. OUTER DRIVEN DISK IN POSITION
RA PD 53595
Figure 45—Installing Driving Plate and Outer Driven Disk
15*
TM 9-747
95
FLYWHEEL
FLYWHEEL TO FLYWHEEL
RING BOLT
FLYWHEEL RING AND
PRESSURE PLATE ASSEMBLY
1. INSTALLING FLYWHEEL RING AND PRESSURE PLATE ASSEMBLY
-FLYWHEEL TO FLYWHEEL
RING BOLT NUT
TORQUE WRENCH (TIGHTEN
WITH 75 TO 85 FT- LB
TORQUE)
FLYWHEEL RING AND
PRESSURE PLATE ASSEMBLY
-WOOD BLOCK
2. TIGHTENING"FLYWHEEL TO FLYWHEEL RING BOLT NUTS
DRIVING PLATE SEPARATOR
STUDS AND LOCK NUTS
SCREWDRIVER
WRENCH
3. ADJUSTING DRIVING PLATE SEPARATOR STUDS
RA PD 320028
Figure 46—Installing Flywheel Ring and Pressure
Plate Assembly
160
TM 9-747
95
Clutch
.SPINDLE
SLEEVE FLANGE
BAR
-FLYWHEEL RING
WOOD BLOCK -J RA PD 53597
Figure 47—Testing Clutch for Release
the driving plate in the flywheel with the three punch marks on one of
the plate projections alined with the marks at one of the flywheel open-
ings if the original plate is used. Aline the six driving pins with the slots
in the plate. Check the clearance of the slots at the driving pins with
a feeler gage. The correct clearance is 0.015 inch minimum. CAUTION:
Do not install the driving plate if the clearance is less than 0.015 inch.
Press the plate against the separator pins and release the pressure to
see if the pins are working correctly.
(5) INSTALL OUTER DRIVEN DISK (2, fig. 45). Wipe all sur-
faces clean and make sure the splines in the hub are free from burs.
Position disk on the splines of the spindle with body of hub section
away from flywheel. Be sure the disk slides freely on the splines of
the spindle.
(6) INSTALL FLYWHEEL RING AND PRESSURE PLATE
ASSEMBLY (1, fig. 46). Wipe all surfaces clean. Pack the space be-
161
TM 9-747
95-97
tween the ball bearing and the oil retainers in the hub with ball and
roller bearing grease. Lift the assembly into position on the end of the
spindle and aline the punch marks on the flywheel and flywheel ring
and slide the assembly onto the bolts.
(7) INSTALL FLYWHEEL BOLT NUTS (fig. 46). Install the
nuts on the bolts and tighten nuts alternately until the assembly is pulled
against the flywheel evenly to eliminate binding. Tighten nuts to 75 to
85 foot-pounds torque (2, fig. 46). Screw the drive plate separator studs
in until they touch the plate, then loosen them one complete turn and
tighten the lock nuts (3, fig. 46).
(8) TEST CLUTCH FOR RELEASE (fig. 47). Place the end of a
bar against the front flange of the clutch release sleeve. Rest the bar on
a wood block on the outer edge of the flywheel ring. Press the bar against
wood, and move the release sleeve l/z inch away from the clutch. With
the sleeve in this position, the spindle should turn freely by hand.
(9 ) INSTALL UNIVERSAL JOINT FLANGE. Aline punch marks
on the flange and the end of the spindle, and slide the flange on the
spindle. Place the flat washer on the spindle, screw the nut on and
tighten to 240 to 280 foot-pounds torque (approximately 150-pound
pressure on the end of a bar, 2 feet long), and install a cotter pin.
(11) RECORD UNIT REPLACEMENT ON W.D., A.G.O. FORM
NO. 478. If a new or rebuilt clutch assembly has been installed, make
the proper entry on "MWO and Major Assembly Replacement Record."
96. CLUTCH PILOT BEARING.
a. Removal.
(1) REMOVE CLUTCH SPINDLE. See paragraph 95 « (1)
through (5).
(2) REMOVE PILOT BEARING. Remove the retainer and the
pilot bearing from the spindle.
b. Installation.
(1) INSTALL PILOT BEARING. Coat the pilot bearing with oil
and install the bearing and retainer in the spindle with drift (41-D-
1540-150).
(2) INSTALL CLUTCH SPINDLE. See paragraph 95 b (2)
through (11).
97. CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING.

a. Removal.
16S
TM 9-747
97-99
Clutch
(2) REMOVE UNIVERSAL JOINT COMPANION FLANGE.
Pull the cotter pin, and remove the nut and washer from the end of the
clutch spindle. Pull off the companion flange.
(3) REMOVE RELEASE BEARING. Remove the snap ring,
lock ring, retainer, and seal from the release sleeve body, and pull the
bearing off the sleeve body.
b. Installation.
(1) INSTALL RELEASE BEARING. Press the bearing in place
and install the seal, retainer, lock ring, and snap ring.
(2) INSTALL UNIVERSAL JOINT COMPANION FLANGE.
Press the flange into place and install the washer, nut, and cotter pin.
98. CLUTCH RELEASE LINKAGE.
a. Description (figs. 48 and 49). To assure full spring load on the
clutch driving plate and driven disks, it is necessary that the clutch
pedal have free travel at all times. This free travel should be approxi-
mately 13A inches, measured at the clutch pedal pad. As the clutch
facings wear, the amount of free travel is reduced. If the clutch facings
wear to a point where no free travel of the clutch pedal is present, the
clutch will be held partially disengaged, resulting in rapid clutch fail-
ure. An adjuster is provided at the front end of the clutch release rod.
A booster is also attached to theVight end of the clutch control cross
shaft outside the propeller shaft housing to assist the driver in disen-
gaging the clutch.
6. Adjustment. Remove right generator belt guard. Turn the
handle at the front end of the clutch adjuster counterclockwise to in-
crease the clearance between the shoes and the bearing, and clockwise
to decrease the clearance (fig. 48). The clearance between the shoes
and the face of the clutch release bearing must be l/& inch (fig. 49). A
ratchet arrangement in the adjuster will lock the handle with the shoes
adjusted to Vs-inch clearance. The clutch pedal free travel will then be
approximately 13A inches if the length of the clutch pedal rod has not
been changed. Install right generator belt guard.
99. CLUTCH THROW-OUT BEARING SHOES.
a. Removal.
(1) REMOVE FIRE EXTINGUISHER TUBES, GRILLE, AND

SHUTTER. Lift air intake cover and remove air inlet grille and shut-
ter, and fire extinguisher tubes.
(2) REMOVE ENGINE COMPARTMENT FLOOR COVER.
Remove the cap screws which hold plate to the floor and remove plate.
163
99
ua.
164
TM 9-747
99
165
Clutch
TM 9-747
TM 9-747
99-100
(3) REMOVE RELEASE ROD CLEVIS PIN (fig. 48). Reach up
through the inspection hole in the engine compartment floor and pull
out the cotter pin in the release rod clevis pin, then pull out clevis pin.
(4) REMOVE TIE ROD CLEVIS PIN. Working through inspec-
tion hole, remove cotter pin from the clevis pin which holds clutch
throw-out bracket tie rod to bracket on left vertical fuel tank pocket.
Remove clevis pin.
(5) REMOVE CLUTCH THROW-OUT BEARING SHOES. Re-
move the throw-out yoke trunnion from the bulkhead and lower the
yoke. Remove lock plates and drive the bearing shoes from the yoke.
b. Installation.
(1) INSTALL CLUTCH THROW-OUT BEARING SHOES. In-
sert the shoes in the yoke and install the lock plates. Raise the yoke
into place and install the trunnion to the bulkhead.
(2) CONNECT RELEASE AND TIE RODS. Position the release
and tie rods and install the clevis pins and cotter pins.
(3) INSTALL FIRE EXTINGUISHER TUBES, GRILLE AND
SHUTTER. Install the fire extinguisher tubes at the bulkhead. Con-
nect the air shutter operating rod to the shutter, and install the shutter.
Place the air grille over the shutter and engage the latches. Lower the
air inlet cover.
(4) INSTALL ENGINE COMPARTMENT FLOOR COVER.
Raise the cover into position and install the attaching cap screws.
100. CLUTCH PEDAL.
a. Description. When assembled at the time of manufacture, the
clutch pedal and the cross shaft operating lever are mounted on cross
shaft by locating it according to the index marks on both the lever and
the end of the shaft. This is necessary to assure proper operation. When
the lever is properly located on the shaft, the center of the hole in the
lever, to which the clutch pedal rod is attached, will rest 7 degrees be-
hind a vertical line drawn through the index marks on the lever and the
shaft and to the hull floor below. This may be verified by rotating the
lever until index marks are vertical, and noting position of the lower
end of the arm. CAUTION: It is important that the length of the
clutch pedal rod remain as set at time of manufacture.
b. Removal.
(1) UNHOOK PEDAL RETURN SPRING, AND DISCONNECT

CLUTCH PEDAL ROD. Unhook the pedal return spring at the clutch
pedal. Withdraw the cotter pin which secures the clutch pedal rod
clevis pin, and remove the clevis pin. Lift the rod out of the way.
( 2 ) REMOVE CLUTCH PEDAL FROM SHAFT. Remove the cap
1M
TM 9-747
100-101
Instruments and Horn
screw at the rear of the pedal boss which clamps the pedal to the shaft.
Tap the pedal off the shaft toward the left side of the hull, and lift it out.
c. Installation.
(1) ASSEMBLE CLUTCH PEDAL TO SHAFT. Position the
clutch pedal at the end of the pedal shaft, and insert a small bar through
the opening in the subfloor around the steering brake levers to hold the
shaft, and tap the pedal onto the shaft. Install the cap screw to clamp
the pedal boss to the shaft.
(2) ADJUST CLUTCH PEDAL STOP SCREW (fig. 48). If the
stop screw has been disturbed, or if a new pedal is being installed, ad-
just the stop screw to allow 3/4-inch clearance between the floor and the
bottom edge to the new stop screw projection.
(3 ) CONNECT CLUTCH PEDAL ROD AND RETURN SPRING.
Loosen the clevis lock nut at cross shaft end of the rod and lengthen or
shorten the rod to aline the clevis pin holes of the front end of the rod
with the hole in clutch pedal when the pedal is all the way up (clutch
engaged) and with Vs-inch clearance between clutch lever shoe and
face of clutch release bearing. Insert the clevis pin and secure with a
cotter pin. Tighten the clevis lock nut, and hook the return spring to the
pedal and hull.
Section XXIV
INSTRUMENTS AND HORN
101. INSTRUMENT PANEL.
a. Description (fig. 50). The instrument panel assembly is a
shock-mounted metal box located on the transmission to the right of
the driver. The cover of the box forms a panel which carries the instru-
ments and gages.
b. Removal of Instrument Panel.
(1) REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY. Disconnect
the conduits and cables from the back of the box and remove the bracket
bolts from the sponson. Remove the panel from the vehicle.
(2) REMOVE THE PANEL COVER WITH INSTRUMENTS.
Disconnect the conduits and cables from the back of the assembly. Re-
move the screws which hold the face of the panel on the box and remove
the panel with all instruments attached.
c. Replacement of Instruments (fig 52 ). Remove the instrument

panel (subpar. b above). Tag, or otherwise identify, wires to electrical

instrument, or gage, that is to be replaced, so that the wires can be con-
nected in the proper position on the replacement unit. Remove the
screws or nuts which attach the unit to the assembly, and in the case of
167
101
TM 9-747
TM 9-74
Instruments and Norn
101
rji
Q *o
CD
CO o*
< <P
i§
U ill
UJ
to
LU
ô
Qf
h-
U. UJ
ae.
i/5
_j
u- ^
UJ
UJ
Jl 5
j_
at
UJ
a.
ll
3 gj
_j
Oo
_! a.
LU
UJ
Z CN
UJ _]
3 =;
LU CO
u. O
a.
a.
<
O
TM 9-747
101
A—INSTRUMENT PANEL HOUSING
B—CENTER SUPPORT BRACKET PLATE
C—RECEPTACLE CASE
D —RECEPTACLE
E-CONNECTOR
F—GROUND WIRE STUD
G—INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTING STUD
H —SPEEDOMETER
J-RECEPTACLE RETAINER
K-CONNECTOR
L-KNURLED NUT
M—MAGNETO HARNESS
N—TACHOMETER
P—INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTING STUD
RA PD 322710
Figure 51—Rear of Instrument Panel Housing
switches remove the lever from the switch, then remove the unit from
the panel. Place the new unit in position and install the attaching nuts
or screws. Connect the wires in the proper position. Install the instru-
ment panel (subpar. d below).
d. Installation of Instrument Panel (fig. 51).
(1) INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY. Place the
instrument panel assembly on the sponson and connect all the conduits
and drive cables for the recording instruments. CAUTION: Be sure
that the conduit plugs index properly when making connections to avoid
damage to the plugs and crossing of the circuits. Position the panel as-
sembly on the sponson and install the shock mounting cap screws.
( 2 ) INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL COVER WITH INSTRU-
MENTS. Place the cover with instruments into the panel box. Make
sure that the gaskets (A-347592-B) around the cover and receptacles
are in place. Install the screws which hold the cover on the box. Prop-
erly index the conduit plugs, and connect the conduits and cables.
170
171
101
TM 9-747
Instruments and Horn

TM 9-747
102-104
102. HORN.
a. Description. The horn is bracket-mounted under a guard near
the left headlight, and is connected by flexible conduit through the
front of the hull to a push-button switch mounted on the right steering
brake lever just below the rubber grip. The horn operates on 24 volts,
and the switch is supplied with current from the instrument panel
through the front end wiring harness, when the 2 4-volt battery switch
is closed.
b. Replacement of Horn. Disconnect the flexible conduit at the
fitting on the hull, pull the connector plug apart, and remove the two
horn mounting screws. Position the new unit on the hull under the
guard, and install the mounting screws. Connect the flexible conduit
from horn to hull fitting.
c. Replacement of Horn Switch. Remove the mounting bolts
which hold the switch to the steering brake lever. Unscrew the conduit
coupling ring from the switch assembly, and remove the cover from
the switch. Disconnect the wires from the switch, and remove the
switch. To install, remove the cover from the new switch, and remove
the connector screws. Connect the wires to the switch terminal, and
install the switch cover. Attach the conduit to the switch, and mount
the switch on the steering brake lever.
Section XXV
PROPELLER SHAFT AND UNIVERSAL JOINTS
103. DESCRIPTION.
a. The propeller shaft transmits power from the clutch to the input
shaft of the transmission. It is of one-piece construction, with a univer-
sal joint at each end to allow for operation at an angle between the
clutch and transmission. The front universal joint is connected to the
shaft with a splined slip yoke.
104. PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY.
a. Removal.
(1) REMOVE CLUTCH CONTROL RODS. Disconnect the clutch
release rod from the clutch lever yoke and depress the clutch pedal all
the way. Remove the nut which holds the tie rod to the clutch lever
yoke, and push the bolt up as far as it will go.
(2) REMOVE SHAFT AND REAR UNIVERSAL JOINT. Re-

move the bolts from the rear universal joint flange and lower the shaft.
Unscrew the dust cap from the front universal joint hub. Slide the
shaft under the flange on the engine and out of the spline at the front
end. Lower the front end of the shaft and remove the shaft.
171
TM 9-747
104-105
Transmission and Final Drive Assembly
(3) REMOVE FRONT UNIVERSAL JOINT. Remove the lock
wire and flange bolt nuts. Slide the joint off the flange bolts.
b. Installation.
( 1) INSTALL FRONT UNIVERSAL JOINT. Place the universal
joint over the flange bolts and install the nuts and lock wire.
(2) INSTALL PROPELLER SHAFT AND REAR UNIVERSAL
JOINT. Slide the rear end of the shaft and the rear universal under the
companion flange on the engine. Then move the shaft forward and
enter the splined end of the shaft into the front universal joint. The hub
of the front joint and the end of propeller shaft tube are marked for
proper alinement of the joints. Enter the shaft in the hubs so that the
marks are in alinement. Screw the dust cap in place on the front uni-
versal joint hub. Install the flange bolts, nuts, and lock wire in the rear
flange.
( 3 ) CONNECT CLUTCH CONTROL RODS. Install the nut on the
clutch yoke tie rod. Pull the clutch pedal back, and connect the clutch
release rod to the release yoke. Install the universal joint cover to the
bulkhead.
Section XXVI
TRANSMISSION AND FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
105. DESCRIPTION.
a. Transmission. The transmission has five forward speeds and
one reverse speed. The second, third, fourth, and fifth gears are syn-
chronized. The first and reverse gears are in constant mesh and are en-
gaged by a sliding clutch.
6. Final Drive Assembly. The final drive assembly consists of the
controlled differential, steering brake assemblies, and final reduction
assemblies mounted on the right and left sides of the final drive assem-
bly. The differential is known as a "controlled differential" because it
serves not only to transmit power to the final reduction units, but it also
contains a brake system for the purpose of steering and stopping the
vehicle. The final reduction assembly transmits power from the differ-
ential to the hubs of the driving sprockets. Each assembly has a set of
reduction gears through which the power is transmitted from the final
drive shaft to the sprocket hub. Each set of final drive shaft gears is
mounted on a cover which is bolted to the final drive housing at either

end. A driving sprocket is bolted to a hub on each final reduction

assembly.
c. Final Drive Assembly Lubrication Oil Cooler. Oil flows from
the differential through a tube to the sump in the bottom of the trans-
mission housing. It is then drawn into the pump, and forced out the left
side of the transmission through a tube to the oil cooler assembly, which
"173
TM 9-747
105-107
is located on the fighting compartment side of the bulkhead to the
right of the propeller shaft. The oil enters at the bottom of the cooler
and flows upward through a by-pass tube to the outlet connection at
the top of the cooler, and returns through a tube to the left side of the
transmission. When the oil reaches a temperature of 100 °F, the by-pass
valve closes, causing the oil to flow upward through the oil cooler tubes.
Air drawn through the cooler by the engine fan reduces the tempera-
ture of the oil, then it is returned to the final drive assembly to lubricate
the gears in the transmission, differential, and final reduction assemblies.
d. Final Drive Assembly Serial Number. The serial number of
the final drive assembly is stamped on a plate mounted on the differ-
ential case directly over the transmission.
106. GEARSHIFT LEVER.
a. Removal. Remove the gearshift lever yoke bolt, fulcrum link
bolt, and the lever shaft. Then lift off the gearshift lever.
b. Installation (fig. 53). Wipe the surface of the shaft clean, and
cover the bearing surfaces, bolts, and shaft with engine oil. Position
lever on left side of the transmission, install gearshift lever shaft, ful-
crum link bolt, and fulcrum yoke bolt. Push the shaft in and screw nut
on inner end of the shaft. Apply lubricant gun to lubrication fitting, and
move gearshift lever back and forth while forcing the lubricant into
fitting. Tighten nuts, so that linkage moves freely without excessive
play, and insert cotter pins.
107. STEERING BRAKE SHOES.
a. Description (fig. 54). The double anchor steering brake is a
three-shoe external contracting steering brake operating in oil. A shoe
assembly and brake drum are located in each end of the final drive hous-
ing and are actuated by the steering brake control levers.
6. Removal.
(1) DRAIN FINAL DRIVE HOUSING. Remove the two plugs on
the bottom of the final drive housing with wrench (41-W-1960-236),
and drain out lubricant.
(2) DISCONNECT STEERING BRAKE LINKAGE. Remove the
two clevis pins at the top of the steering brake control rods.
(3) REMOVE REVERSE ANCHOR JAM NUT, ADJUSTING
NUT AND HOUSING COVER (figs. 54 and 55). Remove the lock
wire and unscrew the jam nut, adjusting nut, and adjusting nut seat
from the reverse anchor rod. Remove the steering brake housing cover
attaching cap screws and lift off the cover.
(4) REMOVE REVERSE ANCHOR SPRING AND SEAL (figs.
54 and 55). Loosen the reverse anchor thrust bolt lock nut, and the
thrust bolt, and lift out the rod.
174
TM 9-747
107
GEARSHIFT
LEVER
LUBRICATION
FITTING
FULCRUM
YOKE
GEARSHIFT LEVER SHAFT
1-INSTALL GEARSHIFT LEVER SHAFT
FULCRUM LINK
FULCRUM LINK BOLT
2-INSTALL FULCRUM LINK BOLT
3-INSTALL FULCRUM BOLT RA PD 53560
Figure 53—Gearshift Lever Installation
175
176
107
TM 9-747
i
I
"0
M)
o>
177
107
TM 9-747

TM 9-747
107
(5) LOWER BRAKE SHOE GUIDE (fig. 54). Reach through the
opening in the brake housing below the shoe, and loosen the shoe guide
jam nut which is located directly below center of shoe. Screw the guide
down into the bottom of the housing.
( 6 ) DISCONNECT SHOE ADJUSTING LINKAGE ( fig. 54 ). Un-
screw the nut from the adjusting rod and remove the adjusting clip.
Push the rod back until the rod is free of the lever. Lift out the spring
and washers, and allow the shoe and lever to fall forward. Remove the
brake shaft swivel pin from the lever.
(7) REMOVE STEERING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING ROD
LEVER (fig. 55). Remove the cotter pin and the hinge pin between the
shoe and lever. Rotate the brake shaft lever upward and swing the
lower end of the brake shoe lever in toward the brake drum to allow the
upper hinge pin to clear the brake drum housing. Remove cotter pin
and pull out the hinge pin at the top of adjusting lever. Remove lever.
(8) REMOVE THE STEERING BRAKE SHAFT LEVER AND
BRAKE SHOES (figs. 55 and 56). Unscrew the steering brake lever
clamp screw and remove it. Punch-mark the lever and the shaft for
proper assembly, if not already marked. Drive the lever off the shaft.
Remove the three cap screws which attach the brake shaft bearing
plate to the housing, and pull out the plate and shaft until the inner
end of the shaft clears the inner bearing. Tilt the inner end of the steer-
ing brake shaft upward to allow the bearing plate to pass the final drive
carrier plate nuts. Hold the bearing plate against the final drive housing
flange, and move the shaft back into the inner bearing. Then lift out the
bearing plate. Rotate the shaft and pull it out of the inner bearing; then
drop the inner end of the shaft and remove the shaft and the link,
through the large opening. Pull the brake shoes and adjusting rod as-
sembly from housing over the top of the brake drum. Wipe out the hous-
ing to remove dirt.
c. Installation.
(1) LOCATE BRAKE SHOE GUIDE ( figs. 56 and 5 7 ). If the guide
was not removed from the housing when the brake shoe was removed,
there will be no occasion to alter its location. If the guide has been re-
moved, however, screw it into the opening in the bottom of the housing
with the lock nut in place on the screw.

(2) INSTALL BRAKE SHOE IN HOUSING (fig. 57). Slide the

end of the shoe over the top of the brake drum and allow it to fall down
back of the drum until it contacts the guide. Reach through the housing
opening and pull the shoe into place around the brake drum with the
steering brake shoe adjusting rod at the top.
(3) INSTALL THE BRAKE SHAFT AND BEARING PLATE
(fig. 58). Insert the splined end of the shaft through the brake housing
opening and out through the hole in the side of the housing. Rotate the
178
TM 9-747
107
Tronsmission and Final Drive Assembly
BRAKE SHAFT LEVER,
LEFT
REVERSE ANCHOR
SPRING
REVERSE ANCHOR
BRAKE SHAFT
BRAKE SHAFT
BEARING PLATE
ADJUSTING ROD
LEVER PIN
ATTACHING SCREW
LEVER
BRAKE SHAFT PIN
BRAKE SHOE PIN,
LONG
ADJUSTING ROD NUT
ADJUSTING ROD
BRAKE SHOE
ASSEMBLY
BRAKE SHOE GUIDE
BRAKE SHOE GUIDE
LOCK NUT
RA PD 53583
Figure 56—Steering Brake Mechanism
shaft and raise it until the inner end can be started into the inner bear-
ing. Position the outer bearing plate on the splined end of the shaft and
slide the shaft out into the bearing plate. Tilt the inner end of the shaft
upward and move the bearing plate onto the shaft to clear the differen-
tial carrier plate nuts. Move the plate and shaft inward into the inner
bearing. Install the bearing plate attaching cap screws. Aline the punch
179
TM 9-747
107
BRAKE SHOE
GUIDE
RA PD 53562
Figure 57—Installing Brake Shoe in Housing
marks on the steering brake shaft and the steering brake shaft lever.
Secure in place with the clamp cap screw.
(4) INSTALL BRAKE LEVER ASSEMBLY (fig. 59). Aline the
holes in the brake shaft link and lever, and insert the hinge pin. Secure
with a cotter pin. Lift the lower brake shoe and aline the holes in the
lower end of the lever assembly with the holes in the brake shoe. Insert
the hinge pin and secure with a cotter pin.
(5) ASSEMBLE ADJUSTING ROD, ADJUSTING WASHERS,
AND SPRING (fig. 60). Insert the brake shaft swivel pin in the lever
assembly and aline the hole with the adjusting rod. Pull the rod through
the brake shaft pin hole and install washers, spring, and adjusting nut.
1SO
TM 9-747
107
Transmission and final Drive Assembly
BRAKE SHAFT-
BRAKE SHA
BRAKE SHAFT BEARING PLATE
RA PD 53563
Figure 58—Installing Brake Shaft and Bearing Plate
( 6 ) ADJUST BRAKE SHOE GUIDE (fig. 56 ). Lift the brake shoe
until shoes are in the approximately normal operating position. Apply
brakes to tighten shoes against the drum, and move the lower shoe until
the connecting pin is over the guide. Reach through the lower part of
the opening under the brake shoe, and screw the guide up until it is in
light but firm contact with the brake shoe. Then turn down Vi to % turn
to obtain 0.020-inch clearance between the shoe and guide. Tighten
lock nut and release the brake.
(7) INSTALL STEERING BRAKE REVERSE ANCHOR,
SPRING, SEAL, AND RETAINERS (figs. 54 and 55). Install reverse
anchor spring, reverse anchor to cover seal retainer and seal. Install the
reverse anchor, with the hook, over the short brake shoe pin, and hold in
place by tightening reverse anchor thrust bolt finger-tight.
(8) INSTALL FINAL DRIVE HOUSING COVER (fig. 54). Lift
up on adjusting rod nut, apply the brake, and install cover with a new
gasket. This will allow the top of the shoe to rest on the cover pedestal.
CAUTION: Make sure that reverse anchor spring, reverse anchor to
cover seal retainer, and seal are in place before entering reverse anchor
in the hole in the cover. Tighten cover cap screws.
181
TM 9-747
107-108
BRAKE SHAFT TO LEVER LINK
r—BRAKE SHOE PIN, LONG
-LEVER
ADJUSTING ROD LEVER PIN
BRAKE SHOE ASSEMBLY
RA PD 53564
Figure 59—Installing Brake Lever Assembly
(9) INSTALL REVERSE ANCHOR NUT SEAT, ADJUSTING
NUT, AND JAM NUT (figs. 54 and 55). Install reverse anchor nut
seat on reverse anchor with flat side toward the cover. Install adjusting
and jam nuts.
(10 ) CHECK LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT. See paragraph 108 d.
(11) ADJUST BRAKES. See paragraph 108 b and c.
(12) CONNECT STEERING BRAKE LINKAGE. Position the
right and left steering brake control rods with the clevis over the end of
the steering brake cross shaft lever, insert the clevis pins, and secure
with cotter pins.
(13) FILL FINAL DRIVE HOUSING WITH LUBRICANT. Re-
fer to paragraph 26.
108. STEERING BRAKE ADJUSTMENTS.
«. General. It is necessary to make a minor brake adjustment to
compensate for lining wear whenever the steering brake control levers
must be pulled back of a vertical position when making a normal turn
with the vehicle (subpar. 6 below). If examination reveals the necessity
182
TM 9-747
108
of recentering the brake shoes with relation to the brake drum, a major
adjustment will be required (subpar. c below). CAUTION: Never
change the length of the control rods or steering brake linkage in an at-
tempt to adjust for brake wear. If the linkage adjustment has been
changed, however, the control linkage should be properly adjusted be-
fore the steering brakes are adjusted (subpar. d below).
b. Minor Brake Adjustment (fig. 61).
(1) CHECK BRAKE LINKAGE AND ADJUST IF NECESSARY.
See subparagraph il below.
(2 ) ADJUST BRAKE SHOES. Remove the clevis pin from the top
of the control rods. Remove adjusting hole plugs and turn adjusting
nuts l/z turn. Connect the control rods and test the free travel of the
levers. Repeat the operation until the brakes are applied when the top
of the steering brake control levers are pulled back 4 to 5 l/z inches from
the fully released position. Install the adjusting hole plugs.
(3) ADJUST REVERSE ANCHORS. Remove the lock wire and
loosen the reverse anchor jam nut. Adjust the anchor adjusting nut so
ADJUSTING ROD
BRAKE SHAFT PIN
ADJUSTING ROD—\
SPRING
ADJUSTING ROD SPRING WASHERS
RA PD 53565
Figure 60—Installing Adjusting Rod Spring and Washers
183
TM 9-747
108
REVERSE
ANCHOR
THRUST BOLT
BRAKE SHAFT
LEVER, LEFT
REVERSE ANCHOR
SEAL
REVERSE ANCHOR
ADJUSTING NUT
BRAKE CROSS
SHAFT LEVER, LEFT
-JAM NUT
EVERSE ANCHOR
STEERING BRAKE
HOUSING COVER
•WRENCH
COVER ATTACHING
SCREW
RA PD 313312
Figure 61—Adjusting Steering Brake
there is %e to %2-inch clearance between the adjusting nut seat and the
cover when the anchor is pulled or pried out. Tighten the jam nut
and install lock wire.
c. Major Brake Adjustment (figs. 56 and 61).
(1) DRAIN OIL FROM FINAL DRIVE HOUSING. Remove the
two plugs on the bottom of the final drive housing with wrench (41-W-
1960-236), and drain out lubricant.
(2) REMOVE REVERSE ANCHOR JAM NUT, ADJUSTING
NUT, AND HOUSING COVER. See paragraph 107 b (3).
(3) ADJUST BRAKE SHOE GUIDE. See paragraph 107 c (6).
(4) INSTALL FINAL DRIVE HOUSING COVER. See paragraph
107 c (8).
( 5 ) FILL FINAL DRIVE HOUSING WITH LUBRICANT. Filler
is located on right side of transmission.
(6) MAKE MINOR BRAKE ADJUSTMENT. See subparagraph
6 above.
d. Steering Brake Linkage Adjustment.

(1) ADJUST STEERING BRAKE CONTROL LEVER STOP
SCREW (fig. 62). Loosen lock nuts and adjust stop screws until the
control levers are 7 to 7 Vi inches from the face of the final drive housing
when in the fully released position, and tighten the lock nuts.
184
TM 9-747
108
-ADJUST BRAICES WHEN LEVERS MUST Bt PULLED
BACK OF VERTICAL FOR MAKING NORMAL TURN.
4-5'/l" MINIMUM FREE TRAVEL
RA PD 318282
Figure 62—Steering Lever Positions
(2) CHECK POSITION OF LEVERS ON CROSS SHAFT AND
BRAKE SHAFT (fig. 63). If marks on the cross shaft and levers do
not line up, unscrew the lever clamp screw, and remove the lever.
Place the lever on the shaft with the marks in line, and tighten the
clamp screw.
(3) ADJUST STEERING BRAKE CONTROL RODS (fig. 63).
Remove pin from yoke at upper end of control rods. With the control
lever against the stop screws, adjust the yoke on the left control rod
so that the yoke pin will pass through the brake shaft lever when the
center of the pin hole is 4Va inches from the machined surface of the
final drive housing. Install the yoke pin and cotter pin. Adjust the
right control rod in the same manner, except that the hole in the rod,
when connected to the cross shaft lever, must be ww inch above the
machined surface of the final drive housing.
US
TM 9-747
109
REFERENCE MARKS
RA PD 318286
Figure 63—Steering Lever Positions
109. STEERING BRAKE CONTROL LEVERS,
a. Removal.
(1) REMOVE DRIVER'S SEAT. Remove the bolts and nuts which
secure the driver's seat to its base, and lift out the seat.
(2) REMOVE SUBFLOOR. Remove the attaching screws and lift
subfloor from its supports.
(3 ) REMOVE STEERING BRAKE CONTROL LEVER. Remove
the clevis pins connecting the steering brake control rods to the steering
brake control levers. Remove the cotter pin at the left end of steering
brake control lever shaft. Drive the shaft out towards the transmission,
186
TM 9-747
109-111
making sure that the spacers between the levers and at either end of
shaft are not lost.
(4) CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING BRAKE CON-
TROL LEVER STOP SCREWS (fig. 62). Loosen lock nut and ad-
just the stop screw until the control lever is 7 to Tl/z inches from the
face of the final drive housing, when in the fully released position.
b. Installation.
(1) INSTALL STEERING BRAKE CONTROL LEVERS. Place
one spacer on the lever shaft, and aline the right lever with hole in
bracket. Insert the shaft through the bracket and lever just far enough
to allow the other lever to be installed on the shaft. Position the left
lever, aline the hole with the shaft, and drive the shaft through the lever
and bracket. Install the outer space on the shaft and the cotter pin in end
of the shaft. Install the clevis pins connecting the steering brake con-
trol rods to the steering brake control levers.
(2) INSTALL SUBFLOOR AND DRIVER'S SEAT. Position the
subfloor on the supports, install the attaching screws, and tighten se-
curely. Place the driver's seat on its base and attach with the bolts and
nuts.
110. PARKING BRAKE.
o. Description. The parking brake mechanism consists of a quad-
rant welded to each steering brake control lever. Two pawls are mount-
ed to a bracket on the hull floor and are operated by a kick pedal. When
the pedal is kicked forward, the pawls engage the quadrants on the
steering brake levers and hold the levers in any set position. Kicking
the pedal to the rear releases the brakes.
b. Replacement of Quadrant. Replace the steering brake control
lever (par. 109).
c. Removal of Pawls and Springs. Remove the subfloor plate to
the right of the control levers. Drift out the pins which hold the pawls
to the rocker shaft and remove the shaft from the pawls and bracket.
Unhook the springs and remove the pawls.
d. Installation of Pawls and Springs. Place the pawls and springs
in place and install the rocker shaft. Install the pins through the pawls
and rocker shaft. Install the subfloor plate.
111. FINAL REDUCTION ASSEMBLIES.

a. Removal (fig. 70).

(1) DRAIN OIL. Remove the two plugs from the bottom of the final
drive housing with wrench (41-W-1960-236), and drain the oil.
( 2 ) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 117.
187
TM 9-747
111-112
(3) REMOVE DRIVE SPROCKET AND HUB. See paragraph
121.
(4) REMOVE FINAL REDUCTION ASSEMBLY. Support the
final reduction assembly with hoist or other means, and remove the cap
screws which attach the cover to the final drive housing. Use a small
pinch bar to pry the unit away from the housing and continue to
manipulate the unit until it is free of the compensating shaft splines.
b. Installation (fig. 70).
(1) INSTALL FINAL REDUCTION ASSEMBLY. Remove all
traces of torn gaskets from the mounting faces of the final drive cover
and housing, and cover the surfaces with sealing compound. Position
gasket on housing and aline all the holes. Lift final reduction assembly
into place with a hoist, or other means, and assemble to the final
drive housing, rotating the final drive shaft slowly to right and left
until the compensating pinion meshes on the compensating shaft
splines. Slide the assembly into place over the locating dowels.
(2 ) INSTALL ATTACHING CAP SCREWS. Install all cap screws
and lock washers except the three for the front fender directly over
the center of the final drive cover. Tighten evenly around the unit.
Fill final drive assembly with lubricant.
(3) INSTALL DRIVE SPROCKET AND HUB. See paragraph
121.
(4) CONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 117.
(5) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 117.
(6) RECORD UNIT REPLACEMENT ON W.D., A.G.O. FORM
NO. 478. If a new or rebuilt final drive assembly has been installed,
make the proper entry on "MWO and Major Unit Assembly Replace-
ment Record."
112. TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER.
a. Removal.
(1) DRAIN TRANSMISSION AND FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY.
Remove the two plugs in the bottom of the final drive assembly with
wrench (41-W-1960-236). Remove the plug in the hull floor beneath
the transmission, remove drain plug and drain lubricant.
(2) REMOVE OIL COOLER. Disconnect the inlet and outlet line
from the top and bottom of the cooler. Unscrew the cooler guard to
hull attaching cap screws, and remove the guard. Remove the cooler
to bracket attaching bolts at each corner, and lift out the cooler.
b. Installation.
(1) INSTALL OIL COOLER. Position the oil cooler in the brackets
and install mounting bolts and nuts. Place the cooler guard in position
in
TM 9-747
112-113
over the cooler, and install cap screws. Screw the oil tube connectors
into the top and bottom connections of the cooler.
(2) FILL FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY AND TRANSMISSION
WITH LUBRICANT. Fill the transmission and final drive assembly
with lubricant, operate the engine with clutch engaged, and inspect
cooler and connections for leaks.
113. TRANSMISSION DIFFERENTIAL.
«. General. Whenever a new transmission is assembled to a differ-
ential carrier, the pinion gear must be removed, and the proper amount
of shims installed between the pinion gear and the pinion bearing of
the transmission. This is necessary to seat the pinion at the correct
INDEX
SCREW
TRANSMISSION
PINION GEAR
PULLER
RA PD 322672
Figure 64—Removing Transmission Pinion Gear with Puller
(41-P-2956-12)
189
TM 9-747
113
PINION SHAFT NUT
T WASHER
SPACER
COTTER PIN PINION GEAR y
PINION BEARING
RA PD 322677
figure 65—Pinion Gear Removed from Transmission
CENTER LINE OF CARRIER TO
"TRANSMISSION MOUNTING FLANGE"
TRANSMISSION MOUNTING
FLANGE TO OUTER END
OF PINION BEARING
-CENTER LINE OF CARRIER
CENTER LINE
OF CARRIER
TO PINION
SHOULDER"
(AS MARKED
ON PINION]
SPACER
THICKNESS"
SHIM THICKNESS -
RA PD 322673
Figure 66—Instruction Drawing tor Determining Shim Thickness
Between Transmission Pinions and Pinion Bearing
190
TM 9-747
113
depth in the teeth of the differential ring gear. NOTE: This operation
is not necessary if a transmission is removed and then installed on the
same differential carrier.
b. Disassembly.
(1) REMOVE TRANSMISSION AND FINAL DRIVE ASSEM-
BLY. See paragraph 114.
(2) REMOVE FINAL REDUCTION ASSEMBLIES. See para-
graph 1lla. NOTE: Omit this step if transmission only is to be re-
placed.
(3) REMOVE TRANSMISSION FROM DIFFERENTIAL.
Thread transmission lifting eye bolts (41-B-1586-350) into bosses on
top of transmission case. Loop a chain through the eye bolts, and take
RING GEAR
TRANSMISSION MOUNTING FLANGE DIMENSION
Figure 67—Dimension on Differential Case
RA PD 322675
191
TM 9-747
113
Maintenance (nstrucfianj
TRANSMISSION MOUNTING FLANGE TO
OUTER END OF PINION BEARING DIMENSION
PINION SHOULDER DIMENSION
PINION
SHAFT NUT
RA PD 322676
Figure 68—Dimensions on Pinion and Transmission Case
up slack with a hoist. Disconnect oil line at transmission and differential
case. Remove stud nuts which secure transmission to differential case,
and lift off the transmission. Remove rubber gasket.
(4) REMOVE TRANSMISSION PINION GEAR (fig. 64). Re-
move cotter pin from end of pinion shaft (fig. 65). Remove pinion shaft
nut (fig. 69) and lift out pinion shaft washer. Install pinion gear puller
(41-P-2956-12) over pinion gear with index screw between gear teeth
192
TM 9-747
113
Transmission and final Drive Assembly
tightened finger-tight only, and pull off the pinion gear. Lift off shims
and spacer.
c. Assembly.
(1) DETERMINE SHIM THICKNESS (fig. 66). Determine the
required thickness of shims to be used between the pinion and pinion
bearing as follows:
(a) Centerline of Carrier to Transmission Mounting Flange. This
dimension is nominally 12 inches. Each carrier will have a figure
stamped somewhere on the machined surface to which the transmission
is attached (fig. 67). This figure may be a decimal figure with a plus or
minus sign, in which case it must be added to, or subtracted from, the
nominal figure (12 inches). Some carriers will be marked with the
actual dimension; for example, "12.005."
(b) Centerline of Carrier to Pinion Shoulder. This dimension is
etched on the toe of the pinion (fig. 68).
(c) Spacer Thickness. Measure spacer thickness with a microm-
eter. (Usually measures 0.020 inch).
(d) Transmission Mounting Flange to Outer End of Pinion Bear-
ing. This dimension is stamped on the transmission case (fig. 68) just
above the pinion bearing bore. NOTE: Figures ranging from 1.012 to
1.052 are stamped on some transmission cases. Such a figure indicates
an early model transmission, and cannot be used for computation of
required shim thickness. If the transmission case is not stamped, if the
figure is not legible, or if the transmission is an early type, obtain the
correct dimension as follows:
1. Hold the short legs of the shim checking gage firmly against
the outer face of the inner bearing race (fig. 69). Using a feeler gage,
measure the space between the long leg of the gage and the trans-
mission mounting flange. Add the thickness of the feeler gage to the
dimension etched on the side of the gage (1.773).
2. In some instances the feeler gage will have to be used between
the short legs of the gage and the inner bearing race. In this case, sub-
tract the thickness of the feeler gage used from the dimension etched
on the side of the gage (1.773).
3. If a feeler gage cannot be inserted under either end of the
gage, the dimension from the transmission mounting flange to the

outer end of the bearing is 1.773 inches as etched on the side of the
gage. CAUTION: When using this gage, make certain that the pinion
bearing cap bolts are tight, holding the pinion bearing securely in place.
(e) Final Computation. The following example shows the method
of determining required shim thicknesses:
193
TM 9-747
113
TRANSMISSION MOUNTING FLANGE
FEELER GAGE
SHIM CHECKING GAGE
41-G-2I7-150
RA PD 322678
INNER BEARIN9 RACE PINION BEARING
Figure 69—Determining Dimension Between Transmission
Mounting flange and Outer End of Pinion Bearing
with Shim Checking Gage (4 l-G-217-150)
Centerline of carrier to transmission mounting flange
(step (a) above and figure 67) 12.005 in.
Minus (~ ) transmission mounting flange to outer end of
pinion bearing (step (d) above and figure 68) 1.767 in.
10.238 in.
Centerline of carrier to pinion shoulder (step (b) above
and figure 68) 10.163 in.
Plus ( + ) spacer thickness (step (c) above) 0.020 in.
10.183 In.
Difference of two sums 10.238—10.183=0.055
* Subtract extra clearance allowance 0.005
Shim thickness required
0.050 in.
* This extra clearance value is constant and is 0.005 in any problem.
194
I
|
o
3
1
113
TM 9-747

TM 9-747
113-114
(2) INSTALL TRANSMISSION PINION GEAR. Slide required
number of shims and the spacer over the heel of the pinion gear. Tap
pinion into bearing. Install washer, pinion, shaft nut, and cotter pin (fig.
65). Spread cotter pin at center (fig. 68).
(3) INSTALL TRANSMISSION TO DIFFERENTIAL. Position
rubber gasket around transmission flange. Lift transmission into posi-
tion against differential case. CAUTION: Pinion and ring gear must be
meshed carefully. Hard bumping is likely to damage the gear teeth.
Install and tighten stud nuts. Connect oil line to fitting on transmission
and differential case.
(4) INSTALL FINAL REDUCTION ASSEMBLIES. See para-
graph 111 6.
(5) INSTALL TRANSMISSION AND FINAL DRIVE ASSEM-
BLY. See paragraph 115.
114. REMOVAL OF TRANSMISSION AND FINAL DRIVE AS-
SEMBLY.
a. Disconnect Tracks on Both Sides. See paragraph 117.
b. Drain Oil from Transmission and Final Drive Assembly.
Remove the two drain plugs with wrench (41-W-1960-236) from the
bottom of the final drive housing and the drain plug (G104-0401365)
from the bottom of the transmission housing, and drain off the oil. Clean
and install the drain plugs.
c. Remove Front Fenders and Sand Shields (Both Sides), Turn
the bayonet-type attaching pins *A turn until the pin alines with the
slot in the hull and lift off the shields. Remove the front fender attach-
ing bolts and cap screws, and remove the fenders.-
d. Open Switches and Disconnect Wires.
(1) Turn the 12-volt and 24-volt battery switches to the "OFF"
position. Disconnect the wires from the generator.
(2) Remove the generator shields.
e. Unscrew Universal Joint Yoke Dust Cap. Screw the retainer
collar off the universal joint hub so that the joint can slide off the pro-
peller shaft.
/. Disconnect Speedometer and Tachometer Cables. Unscrew
the knurled nut which secures the cable housing to the adapter at the
upper right rear of transmission, and separate cable and housing from
the adapter. Disconnect the tachometer cable located on the top left
rear of the transmission in the same manner.
g. Disconnect Transmission to Cooler Oil Tubes. Disconnect
oil hose at transmission. Unscrew connections, to which the oil lines
were connected, from left side of transmission.
196
TM 9-747
114
h. Remove Hatch Hood and Periscope Stowage Rack. Unscrew
the cap screws and the nut at the rear of the rack, and lift off rack.
i. Remove Hand Throttle and Primer. Disconnect the fuel tubes
from the primer. Loosen the lock nuts, and remove the primer and hand
throttle control from the bracket.
/. Loosen Harness. Remove screws from clips clamping harness
to final drive housing.
k. Disconnect Steering Brake Linkage. Remove the two clevis
pins at the top of the steering brake control rods.
1. Disconnect Portable Fire Extinguisher Bracket. Remove the
countersunk head screws attaching the portable fire extinguisher
bracket to the floor and remove the bracket.
m. Remove Front Wire Harness Clamps. Remove the screws
which secure the front harness clamps to the hull, to allow access to
nuts which hold the final drive assembly to the hull.
n. Remove Transmission and Final Drive Assembly. Hold the
nuts inside the hull and remove the two lower bolts (one on each
side) from the side of the hull on the outside. Insert the two smaller
alining pins of power train sling assembly (41-P-647) in the bolt
holes. Thread winch cable chain through the two towing clevises in
the front of the vehicle. Back a wrecker up to the front of the vehicle,
hitch the winch cable to the cable chain, and take up the slack. Remove
all the remaining bolts securing the power train to the hull. Slack off
the winch cable until the top of the power train is tilted away from
the hull far enough for the lifting eye (41-F-2997-220) to be installed.
Bolt the lifting eye to the center top edge of the power train (fig. 71).
(Use extra nuts for spacers.) Hitch the wrecker boom cable to the
lifting eye, lift the front end of the assembly to as nearly normal a
position as is possible, and drive out the alining pins. Carefully remove
the assembly. CAUTION: Guide the assembly from inside the vehicle
to prevent damaging the oil tubes.
o. Remove Generator. Remove the generator belt adjusting bolt,
and the mounting clamp bolts, and remove the generator.
p. Remove Front Universal Joint and Generator Drive Pulley.
Remove the lock wire and the bolts from the universal joint flange, and
remove the joint and pulley.

q. Remove Steering Brake Cross Shaft Assembly. Disconnect

the right end of the steering brake cross shaft lever from the steering
brake control rod. Remove the screws which secure the cross shaft
brackets and lift the cross shaft assembly off the final drive housing.
197
198
114
TM 9-747
LIFTING EYE
ALINING PIN
ALINING PIN
RA PD 32097:
Maintenance Instruction
Figure 71—Removing Transmission and Final Drive Assembly

TM 9-747
115
115. INSTALLATION OF TRANSMISSION AND FINAL DRIVE
ASSEMBLY.
a. Install Generator Drive Pulley and Front Universal Joint.
Insert the flange bolts through the universal joint companion flange.
Place the generator drive pulley and the universal joint flange over
the bolts, install the nuts, and lock wire.
b. Install Generator and Belts. See paragraph 87.
c. Install Brake Cross Shaft Assembly. Position the cross shaft
assembly on the top of the final drive housing, insert the cap screws with
lock washers through the brackets, and tighten securely. Connect the
steering brake control rod to the right side of the steering brake cross
shaft, and secure with a cotter pin.
d. Install Transmission and Final Drive Assembly (fig. 71).
Place the two long spacer shims in position in each side of the hull with
sealing compound, and insert two attaching bolts through the side of
the hull so the threaded ends of the bolts hold the shims in place, and
are flush with the inside face of the shims. Apply sealing compound to
other contacting surfaces. Attach the lifting eye (41-F-2997-220),
chain and wrecker to the power train (fig. 71). Move the wrecker, with
the assembly suspended, to the hull opening and aline the assembly
with the hull. Back the wrecker slowly toward the hull, lowering the
boom cable until the power train is tipped forward slightly at the top,
and carefully guide the lower side into the hull opening. Insert the two
alining pins in the lower holes (one on each side), making sure the pins
pass through the hull and the power train holes to form a hinge. Sus-
pend the weight of the power train from the winch cable which is
hitched to the towing clevises. Slack off the boom cable and remove the
lifting eye. Tilt the power train back until the top edge is fitted into the
hull. Insert the two larger alining pins of power train sling assembly
(41-P-550-600) through two widely separated holes along the top
edge of the hull in order to aline the remaining bolt holes.
e. Install Attaching Bolts. It may be necessary to ream some of
the holes slightly to install the bolts. Install the bolts across the top with
the nuts inside. Install bolt at the lower left end with head outside.
Install the next upper four bolts, with heads inside the hull and the nuts
outside. Then install the remaining bolts at the left end from the out-
side. Install the remaining bolts from the outside of the hull, removing
the alining pins as the bolts are installed. Hold bolts or nuts from the
inside, and tighten from the outside.
/. Install Front Wire Harness. Position the front wire harness
along the front hull slope just above the final drive housing attaching
bolts and nuts, and attach the clamps to the hull.
g. Connect Harness. Replace the screws in clips for clamping
harness to final drive housing.
m
TM 9-747
115
Maintenance Instruction*
h. Install Periscope, Stowage Rack, and Hatch Hood Bracket.
Place the stowage rack and hood bracket in position and install the
attaching cap screws.
L Install Primer and Hand Throttle Control. Place the primer
and hand throttle control in the bracket and tighten the lock nuts. Con-
nect the fuel tubes to the primer.
j. Connect Steering Brake Control Lever Linkage. Position the
right and left steering brake control rods with the clevis over the end of
the steering brake cross shaft lever, insert the clevis pins and secure with
cotter pins.
k. Connect Transmission Oil Cooler Tubes. Screw the two oil
line connections into the openings at the left side of the transmission.
Aline and tighten securely. Attach oil tubes to connections, and tighten
securely.
I. Connect Hand Throttle, Primer Support, and Bracket. Place
the support and bracket in position on the left side of the final drive
housing, insert the cap screws and lock washers, and tighten securely.
m. Connect Speedometer and Tachometer Cables. Place end of
speedometer cable in opening in the adapter at the right rear side of
transmission, and screw the knurled nut onto adapter securely. Con-
nect the tachometer cable in the same manner.
n. Install Fire Extinguisher Bracket. Position the fire extin-
guisher bracket with the clamp away from the transmission, and attach
the bracket to the floor.
o. Connect Generator Wires and Install Shields.
(1) Connect the generator wires (par. 87 ).
(2 ) Install shield at each side of the generator.
p. Fill Transmission and Final Drive Assembly With Lubricant.
Refer to paragraph 26.
q. Install Front Fenders. Remove the three fender attaching cap
screws at the top of the final drive cover. Position fender on hull and
final drive housing, install the cap screws and bolts, and tighten securely.
r. Connect Tracks. See paragraph 117.
s. Adjust Track Tension. See paragraph 117.
f. Record Unit Replacement on W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 478. If
a new or rebuilt transmission and final drive assembly has been in-
stalled, make the proper entry on "MWO and Major Unit Assembly
Replacement Record."
200
TM 9-747
116-117
Horizontal Volutm Spring Suspension
Section XXVII
HORIZONTAL VOLUTE SPRING SUSPENSION
116. DESCRIPTION.
a. Tracks. Two individually driven tracks propel the vehicle
forward and backward. The drive sprockets at the front end of the
vehicle pull the tracks from the rear and lay them down in front of the
advancing suspension wheels. An adjustable idler with dual wheels for
each track is mounted at the rear of the hull for adjusting the tension
of the tracks. The track is 23 inches wide with a center guide that min-
imizes the possibility of throwing the track. The upper portion of each
track is supported on two dual rollers and three single rollers, all of
which are rubber-tired and fitted with adjustable tapered roller bear-
ings.
b. Suspension Assemblies (fig. 79). The vehicle is supported on
six suspension assemblies bolted to the hull. Each suspension has four
rubber-tired wheels, one pair mounted on each suspension arm. The
wheels are of the demountable type, and can be removed from the hubs
and installed without disturbing the adjustable tapered roller bearings
or any part of the suspension and tracks. The tires are molded directly
to the wheels. The suspension wheel support arms are connected to the
suspension by rubber-bushed pins. Two horizontal volute springs in
each suspension are held in position by spring seats that rest on spring
seat pins. The spring seats are free to swivel on the seat pins, allowing
the volute springs to compress in true alinement without distortion.
c. Shock Absorbers (fig. 79). A telescopic-type, hydraulic shock
absorber is connected between the support arms on each of the suspen-
sions. The shock absorbers reduce the pitching action of the vehicle by
stabilizing the vertical movement of the suspension wheels when pass-
ing over rough terrain.
d. Data.
Width of track 23 in.
Weight of track (with 79 shoes) 3,500 Ib
Ground contact area of track (approx.) 7,000 sq in.
Ground pressure (pounds per square inch) 10.2
Length of springs (new) 14 in.
Diameter of suspension wheel 20 Vi in.

Diameter of idler wheel 22 in.

Diameter of dual track roller 13 Vz in.
Diameter of single track roller 10 in.
Number of lubricant fittings 36
117. TRACKS.
a. Description (fig. 72). Only one pin is used in each shoe. Rub-
ber bushings are bonded to a steel track shoe bushing tube. The tube
201
TM 9-747
117
TRACK SHOE •
RA PD 313254
Figure 72—Track Shoe—Disassembled
RA PD 313349
Figure 73—Track Connecting Fixtures (41-F-2997-389)
Installed
TM 9-747
117
Hoiiiontal Volute Spring Suspension
and bushings are pressed into the track shoe. The tubes have two keys
that engage the two keyways milled in the track shoe bushing pin. The
pin is held in position in the shoe by four pins with flat tapered sides
that engage depressions machined in bushing pin.
b. Removal (fig. 73). Place the vehicle on level terrain so that it
can be moved as required. Release the track tension at the idler adjust-
ment (subpar. d (2) below). Disconnect the track between the front
suspension wheel and the sprocket. (If the track has been thrown, dis-
connect the track underneath either the idler or the sprocket, depend-
ing on which end of the track has the least twist.) Install the track con-
necting fixtures. Drive out the lock pins that retain the track shoe bush-
ing pin from the guide side of track shoe. Drive out the shoe bushing
pin. Lay the top half of the track on the ground to the front or rear of
the vehicle, depending on which end of the track has been disconnected.
<•. Installation.
(1) INSTALL TRACK. If a new track is to be installed, lay it in
front of, and in alinement with, the old track. If a thrown track is to be
installed, dig a trench deep enough for the end of the track so that the
suspension wheel can roll directly onto the track. Tow the vehicle onto
the track until about 16 inches of the end of the track protrudes be-
yond the front suspension wheel. Block the suspension wheels in the
track to prevent the vehicle from moving. Place the rear idler wheel
in the extreme forward position and lock the spindle in the bracket to
prevent breakage of the idler bracket. Roll the end of the track over
the idler wheel, and pull the track forward over the support rollers and
sprocket with a cable attached to a towing unit.
(3) CONNECT TRACK SHOES (fig. 73). Attach the track con-
necting fixtures to the ends of the track and draw the ends together.
Install the track shoe bushing pin. Install the bushing pin retaining lock
pins. Drive the pins into the shoe, from the grouser side, until they seat
solidly, and stake the shoe around the head of the pins. Remove the
track connecting fixtures.
(3) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See subparagraph d below.
d. Adjustment of Track Tension.
(1) POSITION TRACK FOR ADJUSTMENT (fig. 74). Place a
wood block % inch thick and 2 inches wide between the track and
each dual support roller.

(2) RELEASE TRACK TENSION (fig. 74). Loosen the two out-
side clamp screws in the idler wheel bracket. Turn the spreader screw
counterclockwise to spread the bracket until the spindle is free.
CAUTION: Excessive spreading will crack the bracket. Place the
adjusting wrench on the hexagon at the end of the idler shaft and turn
the shaft to release the bind on the adjusting collar. Raise the spring
at the end of the bracket and slide the collar off the serrations on the
idler shaft.
WOOD BLOCK
TRACK WOOD BLOCK
DUAL SUPPORT ROLLER
SINGLE SUPPORT ROLLER-
SPREADER SCREW
RA PD 313257
Figure 7*
-Adjusting Track Tension wifh Wrench
(41-W-640-400)
204
TM 9-747
117-118
Horizontal Volute Spring Suspension
(3 ) ADJUST TENSION (fig. 74 ). Use a piece of pipe on the handle
of the adjusting wrench for leverage and raise the handle of the wrench
to tighten the track. Slide the adjusting collar on and off the serrations
on the shaft when changing the wrench position. Tighten the track
until the track just clears the single support roller.
(4) LOCK IDLER ADJUSTMENT (fig. 74). Slide the adjusting
collar onto the serrations of the shaft and lock it in place with the
spring. Back out the center spreader screw by turning it clockwise
until it does not project through the split in the bracket. Tighten both
outside clamp screws securely; then tighten the center spreader screw
until it binds sufficiently to hold itself from working loose. Remove
the idler adjusting wrench.
118. IDLER WHEELS AND BRACKET.
a. General. The outer idler wheel can be removed without dis-
connected the track, by releasing the track tension. The inner wheel
can be removed without disturbing the hub or bearings by removing
the idler shaft from the bracket.
6. Removal and Disassembly (fig. 75).
(1) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 117 b.
( 2 ) REMOVE IDLER WHEEL AND HUB ASSEMBLY. Take out
the attaching cap screws and remove the hub cap and gasket. Pry the
tongue of the nut lock out of the outer bearing nut. Unscrew the outer
bearing nut and remove the nut lock. Unscrew the inner bearing nut
and remove the thrust washer. Pull the wheels and hub off the idler
shaft.
(3) REMOVE BEARING CONES AND SEAL. Remove the outer
bearing cone. Pry the seal out of the hub. Remove the inner bearing
cone.
(4) REMOVE IDLER SHAFT AND BRACKET. Remove the
cotter pin in the hexagon end of the shaft. Slide the collar off the shaft.
Pull the idler shaft out of the bracket. Take out the cap screws that
attach the bracket to the hull and remove the bracket.
c. Cleaning of Parts. Clean all parts thoroughly. Use water under
pressure to loosen foreign matter, and then remove as much of it as
possible. Use a stiff brush and dry-cleaning solvent to remove the re-
maining grease and dirt. Rotate the bearings while immersed in dry-
cleaning solvent until all traces of lubricant have been removed.

CAUTION: Do not spin bearings with compressed air. Oil the bear-
ings immediately to prevent corrosion of the highly polished surfaces,
and wrap them in oiled paper if they are not to be used at once.
d. Inspection of Bearings and Seals (fig. 75).
(1) INSPECT BEARINGS. The condition of a bearing is best de-
termined by the surface condition of the rollers and races. Inspect
200
206
118
TM 9-747
Maintenance Mstructiont
TM 9-747
118
for wear or pits caused by corrosion. Inspect for discoloration of the
rollers or cups, as this is evidence of overheating. Bearings that have
been overheated, pitted, or worn, must be discarded. Spinning a bearing
while holding it in the hands is not an accurate check for its running
qualities, although this test will indicate the presence of dirt or foreign
matter, and that the bearing should be rewashed, lubricated, and
checked again.
(2) INSPECT BEARING SEALS. If a bearing seal is removed
from the hub for any reason, always install a new seal.
(3 ) REPLACE BEARING CUPS. If a bearing cup is to be replaced,
use a drift to drive the cup out of the hub. Keep moving the drift around
the entire circumference of the cup and drive the cup out evenly. Posi-
tion a new cup in the hub. Use a cup drift, and drive the cup into the
hub until it seats against the shoulder in the hub.
e. Assembly and Installation (fig. 75).
(1) INSTALL IDLER SHAFT BRACKET AND SHAFT (fig. 74 ).
Position the bracket on the hull, and install the attaching cap screws.
Enter the idler shaft into the bracket. Slide the collar on the hexagon
end of the shaft, and install the cotter pin.
(2) INSTALL INNER BEARING CONE AND SEAL. Pack the
inner bearing cone with general purpose grease, and install the cone
in the hub. Position the seal in the hub with the flat side of the seal case
out. Using a seal drift, drive the seal into the hub until the flat side
of the seal case is flush with the end of the hub (fig. 78).
(3) INSTALL WHEEL AND HUB ASSEMBLY ON SHAFT.
Slide the hub onto the shaft. Pack the outer bearing cone with general
purpose grease. Install the bearing cone and thrust washer. Screw the
inner bearing nut on the idler shaft until the bearing cones are seated
but not binding.
(4) ADJUST BEARINGS. Turn the wheel by hand to determine
the amount of drag caused by the bearing seal. Tighten the bearing
nut until a slight increase in drag is felt when the wheel is turned. Back
off the bearing nut Vi turn.
(5) INSTALL NUT LOCK, OUTER BEARING NUT, HUB CAP,
AND GASKET. Install the nut lock and bend a tongue into one of the
slots in the inner bearing nut. Screw the outer bearing nut onto the
shaft. Tighten the nut to 200 to 300 foot-pounds torque and bend a
tongue of the lock washer into one of the slots in the outer bearing nut.
If a tongue does not line up with a slot in the outer nut, continue to
tighten (do not back off the nut) until a tongue alines with the slot.
Install the gasket and hub cap with the attaching cap screws. Fill the
hub with grease through the lubricant fitting in the hub cap until grease
appears at the seal or relief fitting in the center of the hub.
(6 ) INSTALL TRACK. See paragraph 117 c.
( 7 ) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 117 d.

I
s
o
a
3
1
0
9
4
1
n
3
W)
118
CO CO
TM 9-747
209
118
ff. -"
TM 9-747

TM >9-747
'119
FLAT SIDE OF SEAL CASE
END OF HUB-
Figure 78—Oil Seal and Hub
119. DUAL SUPPORT ROLLERS.
a. General. Due to the center guide in the track, only the outer
wheel of the dual track support rollers can be removed without discon-
necting the track.
b. Removal and Disassembly.
(1) RELEASE TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 117 d. (2).
(2) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 117 ft.
(3) DISASSEMBLE ROLLERS (fig. 76). Take out the cap screws
that attach the hub cap to the hub, and remove the cap. and gasket. Pry
the nut lock tongue out of the recess in the nut and unscrew the nut.
Remove the nut lock and thrust washer. Pull the hub off the bracket
shaft. Remove the outer bearing cone, seal, and inner bearing cone
from the hub.
c. Cleaning and Inspection. See paragraph 118 c and d.
d. Assembly and Installation.
(1) ASSEMBLE SUPPORT ROLLER (fig. 76). Pack the bearing
cones with general purpose grease and install the inner cone. Position
the seal in the hub with the flat side of the seal case out. Press the seal
into the hub until the flat side of the seal case is flush with the end of
the hub (fig. 78). Slide the hub onto the bracket shaft and install the
outer bearing cone, thrust washer, nut lock and nut. Tighten the nut
210
TM 9-747
119-121
sufficiently to seat the bearing cones in the cups, but not tight enough to
cause a bind in the bearings.
(2) ADJUST BEARINGS. See paragraph 118 e (4).
(3) INSTALL HUB CAP. Bend a tongue of the lock into one of
the slots in the bearing nut. Attach the gasket and hub cap to the hub
with the cap screws. Fill the hub with grease through the lubrication
fitting on the hub cap until grease appears at the seal or relief fitting
in the center of the hub.
120. SINGLE SUPPORT ROLLERS.
a. Removal and Disassembly.
(1) RELEASE TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 117 d ( 2 ).
(2 ) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 117 b.
(3) DISASSEMBLE ROLLER WHEEL (fig. 77). Take out the
cap screws that attach the roller wheel to the hub, and pull off the
roller wheel. Take out the countersunk head screws that attach the
hub cap to the hub and remove the cap and gasket. Pry the nut lock
tongue out of the recess in the nut and unscrew the nut. Remove the nut
lock and thrust washer. Pull the hub off the bracket shaft. Remove the
outer bearing cone, seal, and inner bearing cone from the hub.
b. Cleaning and Inspection. See paragraph 118 c and d.
c. Assembly and Installation.
(1) ASSEMBLE SUPPORT ROLLER HUB (fig. 77). Pack the
bearing cones with general purpose grease and install the inner cone.
Position the oil seal in the hub with the flat side of the seal case out.
Drift the seal into the hub until the flat side of the seal case is flush with
the end of the hub (fig. 78). Slide the hub onto the bracket shaft and in-
stall the outer bearing cone, thrust washer, nut lock and nut. Tighten the
nut sufficiently to seat the bearing cones in the cups, but not so tightly as
to cause a bind in the bearings.
(3) INSTALL ROLLER WHEEL (fig. 77 ). Depress a tongue of the
lock washer into the recess in the nut. Attach the hub cap and gasket
to the hub with the countersunk screws. Position the roller wheel on
the hub and attach with the cap screws. Fill the hub with grease through
the lubricant fitting in the hub cap until grease appears at the seal or
relief fitting at the inner end of the hub.

121. DRIVE SPROCKETS.

a. Description. The drive sprockets are bolted to hubs, which in
turn are attached to the flanged end of the final drive sprocket shaft
with studs, dowels and nuts. The sprockets are interchangeable.
Ill
TM 9-747
121-123
6. Removal.
(1) RELEASE TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 117 d ( 2 ).
(2 ) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 117 fe.
(3) REMOVE SPROCKETS. Remove the nuts that attach the
sprocket hub to the drive shaft. Pull the hub and dowels off the studs.
Remove the nuts and take out the bolts that attach the sprocket to
the hub, and remove the sprocket.
c. Installation.
(1) INSTALL SPROCKETS. Position the sprockets on the hub.
Install the bolts and tighten with 140 foot-pounds of torque. Hold the
heads of the bolts with a wrench, install and tighten the nuts with 100
foot-pounds of torque. Mount the hub and dowels on the drive shaft
studs. Install the attaching nuts and tighten securely.
( 2 ) CONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 117 c ( 2 ).
(3) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 117 d.
122. SHOCK ABSORBERS.
a. Description (fig. 79). A telescopic-type hydraulic shock ab-
sorber is attached to each of the six horizontal suspension assemblies.
A filler hole is provided in the reservoir for adding fluid when required.
The fluid capacity of the shock absorbers is 70 ounces. If the shock
absorbers do not become warm when the vehicle is being operated,
it is an indication that the fluid is low or the shock absorber is not func-
tioning.
b. Removal. See paragraph 123 c (1) in part.
c. Installation. See paragraph 123 c (2) in part.
d. Filling Shock Absorber on Vehicle. Ordinarily the shock ab-
sorbers will not require filling after the vehicle has been put in opera-
tion. If leakage is apparent, replace the assembly. If filling is necessary
as a temporary expedient, proceed as follows:
(1) Place the vehicle so that the shock absorber is approximately
horizontal and near mid stroke. Clean off all mud and dirt at the
reservoir filler plug and remove the plug. CAUTION: Exercise extreme
care to prevent dirt entering the filler plug opening.
(2) Fill the reservoir with shock absorber fluid to the level of the
plug opening (fig. 79) and install the plug, using a new gasket, if nec-
essary.
(3) If the loss of fluid has been excessive, operate the vehicle over
rough terrain to fill the shock absorber cylinder with fluid. Then re-
peat steps (1) and (2 ) above and add more fluid, if required.
123. SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY.
a. Description (fig. 79). The forward support arms on the front
suspensions and the rear arms on the rear suspensions are provided
212
TM 9-747
123
with stops. The stops limit the downward movement of the arms, there-
fore these arms are not interchangeable with the other support arms.
b. Removal and Installation of Suspension Wheels.
(1) REMOVE INNER SUSPENSION WHEEL. Place the vehicle
on level terrain. Lay a block one inch thick on the track ahead of, or
behind, the outer wheel. Move the vehicle until the outer wheel rests on
the block. Take out the mounting screws and remove the wheel. In
some instances, such as when the vehicle is fully loaded, it may be
necessary to place a jack under the hull and raise the hull to provide
the necessary clearance for removal of the inner wheel.
(2) INSTALL INNER SUSPENSION WHEEL. Mount the wheel
on the pilots in the hub. Install the mounting screws and tighten se-
curely. Move the vehicle and remove the block.
(3 ) REMOVE OUTER SUSPENSION WHEEL. Place the vehicle
on level terrain. Lay a block one inch thick ahead of, or behind, the
inner wheel. Move the vehicle until the inner wheel rests on the block.
Take out the mounting screws and remove the outer wheel.
(4) INSTALL OUTER SUSPENSION WHEEL. Follow the pro-
cedure outlined in step (2) above.
(5) REMOVE BOTH INNER AND OUTER SUSPENSION
WHEELS. Remove outer wheel (step (3) above). Place a jack under
the outer hub and raise the suspension arm just high enough to remove
the block under the inner wheel. Take out the mounting screws and
remove the inner wheel. In. some instances, such as when the vehicle
is fully loaded, it may be necessary to jack up the hull to provide clear-
ance for removal of the wheel.
(6) INSTALL BOTH INNER AND OUTER SUSPENSION
WHEELS. Install inner suspension wheel (step (2) above). Place a
block one inch thick under the inner wheel and remove the jack under
the outer hub. Install the outer wheel in the same manner as described
in step (2) above.
c. Replacement of Volute Springs (fig. 80).
(1) REMOVE VOLUTE SPRINGS. Remove the shock absorber
clamp bolts. Remove the shock absorber pins and lift off the shock
absorber. Place a 30-ton jack under arm support, and raise the sus-
pension assembly until the suspension wheels are clear of the lower
portion of track. NOTE: When removing the springs from either front
or rear suspension assembly, place 30-ton jack under center suspension
assembly and release track tension (par. 117 d (2)). Remove one
mounting screw from each suspension wheel, and attach adapters to
wheels. Attach track connecting fixture to adapters and draw the wheels
together. Insert a pry bar between the arm support and large coil end
of the spring, and pry the spring up until it is clear of the seat, then
lift out the spring.
213
!
!
214
123
TM 9-7*7
215
123
TM 9-747

TM 9-747
123
Maintenance Instructioni
PULLER-
SPRING SEAT PIN
CLAMP BOLTS
RA PD 313255
Figure 81—Removing Spring Seat Pin
(2) INSTALL VOLUTE SPRINGS (fig. 80). Enter the small coil
end of each spring on the pilot, and force the other end of each spring
into position in spring seat. Release the tension on the track connecting
fixture, and remove the fixture and adapters from the suspension wheels.
Remove the jack. Position the shock absorber on the suspension arms,
with the reservoir filler plug to the outside, install the pins and tighten
the clamp screws.
Disassembly.
RELEASE TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 117 d (2).
REMOVE SHOCK ABSORBERS, SPRINGS AND SPRING
SEATS. Remove springs (subpar. c (1) above). Lift out the spring
seats. Loosen the spring seat pin clamp bolts. Screw a puller into the
end of the spring seat pin, and remove the pin (fig. 81). Remove the
other spring seat pin in the same manner.
(3) REMOVE SUSPENSION ARMS AND HUB ASSEMBLY.
Take out the suspension wheel mounting screws and remove the
wheels. Remove the four suspension arm pin clamp bolts. Remove the
suspension arm support screws and the support. Pull the inner end of
d.
(1)
(2)'
216
TM 9-747
123
the suspension arm pin out of the bracket and remove the arm and
pin assembly. Remove the other arm in the same manner.
(4) REMOVE SUSPENSION BRACKET (fig. 83). Take out the
cap screws that attach the bracket to the hull and remove the bracket.
(5) DISASSEMBLE HUB (fig. 82). Take out the attaching screws
and remove the hub cap and gasket. Pry the nut lock tongue out of the
wheel outer bearing nut. Remove the nut and the nut lock. Unscrew
the wheel inner bearing nut and remove the thrust washer. Pull the
hub off the wheel shaft. Remove the outer and inner bearing cones and
seal. Disassemble the other hubs in the same manner.
e. Inspection and Repair of Parts.
(1) CLEAN PARTS. See paragraph 118 c.
(2 ) INSPECT BEARINGS AND SEALS. See paragraph 118 d.
(3) INSPECT OTHER PARTS (fig. 82). If a suspension bracket
is cracked or twisted, replace the bracket. Replace the suspension
arm assembly if cracked or twisted. If a suspension arm pin or a wheel
shaft is bent, or loose, in the arm, replace the arm assembly. If the
spring seat plates are worn excessively turn the plates over or install
new plates. Replace the springs if cracked, or broken, or if they measure
less than 13 inches in length. Replace the spring seat pins if badly
worn or bent. If the shock absorber pins or bushings are worn, replace
the bushings and pins.
/. Assembly.
(1) INSTALL INNER BEARING CONE AND SEAL (fig. 82).
Pack the inner bearing cone with general purpose grease and install
the cone in the hub. Position the seal in the hub with the flat side of
the seal case out (fig. 78). Use a seal drift and drive the seal into the
hub until the flat side of the seal case is flush with the end of the hub.
(2) INSTALL HUBS (fig. 82). Slide the hub onto the shaft. Pack
the outer bearing cone with general purpose grease. Install the bearing
cone and thrust washer. Screw the bearing inner nut on the shaft until
the bearing cones are seated, but not sufficiently to cause a bind in the
bearings.
(4 ) INSTALL NUT LOCK, BEARING OUTER NUT, HUB CAP,
AND GASKET (fig. 82). Install the nut lock and bend a tongue into
one of the slots in the bearing inner nut. Screw the bearing outer nut
onto the shaft. Tighten the nut to 200 foot-pounds torque, and bend a
tongue into one of the slots in the nut. If a tongue does not line up with
a slot in the outer nut, continue to tighten (do not back off nut) until
a tongue alines with the slot. Install the gasket and hub cap with the
attaching screws. Fill the hub with grease, through the lubricant fitting
in the hub cap, until grease appears at the seal or relief fitting in the
center of the hub.
117
i
o
1
9
3
&
-e
VI
m
01
CD
218
123
TM 9-747
TM 9-747
123
CLAMP BOLTS .-SUSPENSION ARM
ÂRM SUPPORT
SUPPORT SCREWS'
SUSPENSION WHEEL—*<
RA PD 313336
Figure 83—Suspension Arms and Wheels—Installed
(5) INSTALL SUSPENSION BRACKET (fig. 83). Position the
bracket on the hull. Support the bracket with a jack. Install the at-
taching 1-inch floor bolts, and tighten securely. Then install the at-
taching 3/4-inch side bolts, and tighten securely.
(6) INSTALL SUSPENSION ARMS (fig. 83). Raise the arm into
position on the bracket and insert the rear end of the suspension arm
pin into the bracket. Install the other arm in the same manner. Position
the arm support on the suspension arm pins, and drive the support on
the pins until it seats solidly on the end of the suspension bracket. Be
sure the key on the end of the bracket is properly entered in the keyway
in the arm support. Raise the arm support with a jack until it seats
solidly against the bracket, install the support attaching screws and
tighten securely. Aline the slots in the outer ends of the suspension
arm pins with the slots in the support. Install the clamp bolts, and
tighten the nuts securely.
( 7 ) INSTALL WHEELS. Install the wheels on the hubs, and tighten
the mounting screws securely.
(8) INSTALL SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS (fig. 79).
Install the spring seat pins in the support arms. Be sure the pins are
centered, so that both ends of the pin are an equal distance from the
219
TM 9-747
123-126
arm. Tighten the clamp bolts. Position the spring seats on the spring
seat pins. Install the springs and shock absorber as outlined in subpara-
graph c (2) above.
Section XXVIII
HULL
124. DESCRIPTION.
a. Hull. The hull or body of the vehicle is made of heavy armor
plate for housing and protection for the crew and equipment. Two
lateral bulkheads across the inside of the hull act as firewalls, enclosing
the engine compartment, and also separate the fighting and driver's
compartments. An opening in the forward end of the hull is provided for
the installation of transmission and final drive assembly.
125. PERISCOPES.
a. Description. Periscopes are provided for the driver and assist-
ant driver. The mounting for each periscope includes a revolving plate
which permits the periscope to be aimed in any position. A rotation set
screw can be tightened to hold the periscope in any position desired.
The periscope mount can be tilted to elevate the line of vision, and can
be locked in place by a knurled nut on the back of the periscope. A
safety lock prevents the periscope falling out if the knurled nut be-
comes loosened.
b. Removal and Installation. Slide the safety lock back, loosen
the knurled nut, and remove the periscope. To install, insert the peri-
scope in place, tighten the knurled nut, and secure with safety lock.
126. DRIVER AND ASSISTANT DRIVER'S CUPOLA.
a. Description. Each vision cupola consists of stationary ring,
bolted to the roof, with a door equipped with a periscope mounted on
the cupola. Six direct-vision blocks are mounted, equally spaced,
around the stationary ring. The cupola door periscope is mounted on a
ball bearing race which permits a 360-degree rotation.
6. Removal. Take out the cap screws that hold the hinge tube
caps, drive out the hinge pin and lift off one door section. Repeat the
procedure to remove the other half of door. Take out the cap screws
that hold the block case and remove the case and seal. From inside the
vehicle, unscrew the three block locking screws in each block, and re-
move the blocks. Remove the bolts that attach the vision door to the
turret, and remove the door.
c. Installation. Spread the joint and thread compound around
the ring, and lower the door into position on the turret, using guide pins.
in
TM 9-747
126-128
Vehicle Wiring
Install and tighten all bolts around the door. From inside the vehicle,
push the direct-vision blocks into their respective positions, install the
three block locking screws in each block, and tighten securely. From
outside the vehicle, place the block cases in position over the direct-
vision blocks, using a new gasket, and secure with cap screws. Position
one-half of the door, install the hinge pin and secure the hinge tube caps
at each end with cap screws. Repeat operation for the other half.
127. FENDERS.
a. Removal.
(1) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 117 6.
(2 ) REMOVE FENDER. Remove the bolts that hold the fender to
the leading edge of the sponson. Loosen the three cap screws that hold
the side of the fender to the final drive assembly, and lift off the fender.
b. Installation.
(1) INSTALL FENDER. Place the fender in position over drive
sprocket. Install the three cap screws which secure it to the final drive
assembly. Install the bolts through the rear of the fender and into the
sponson leading edge. Insert the bolts from the under side, and install
self-locking nuts. Tighten all bolts and cap screws securely.
(2) CONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 117 c.
Section XXIX
VEHICLE WIRING
128. DESCRIPTION.
a. The wiring systems in the T83 and T89 gun motor carriages are
identical. All wiring is contained in conduits or flexible shielded cable
for protection of the wires, and to effect adequate suppression of radio
interference. The harnesses are held in place by clamps or clips which
form the necessary bonding to the hull for suppression of radio inter-
ference. Junction blocks are provided in the battery switch box and
bulkhead terminal box for convenience in connecting the various cir-
cuits. Harnesses are fitted with "AN" connectors to join the harnesses
to equipment or fittings. These connectors provide accessible points for
tests to locate grounds, shorts, or to check the continuity of the circuits.
In most instances, several circuits are contained in a single harness, and
failure of any individual circuit within the section of harness necessi-

tates replacement of the section involved.

b. The circuits through the instrument panel are all series con-
nected with circuit breakers for protection of the wiring and equipment.
The circuit breakers are fed from the bus bar in the battery switch box
221
TM 9-747
128-129
by the two wires marked "40." The use of two wires for this purpose
affords ample carrying capacity with more flexibility than a single wire
of equal capacity, and allows the use of a standard "AN" connector. All
circuits are identified by numbers taped on the wires.
129. HARNESSES.
a. Removal, When removing wiring harnesses, refer to the para-
graph pertaining to the equipment involved for information regarding
disconnecting and connecting of the harness and wiring to the unit or
equipment. Remove the clamps and clips which secure the harness in
position, and remove the harness.
6. Installation. Position the harness between the points to be
connected and install. All wiring is identified by a numbered tape
around each wire near the terminal.
PD 342323
Figure 84—Battery Switch Box
222
TM 9-747
129-130
Vehicle Wiring
c. Replacement of Wires. Where practical, faulty wires may be
replaced within the harness by removing the terminal, or by unsolder-
ing the wire from connector plug and attaching a new wire of proper
size and length to the old wire. Pull the new wire into the cable or con-
duit while the old one is drawn out. Solder the wire to the connector or
install the terminal as required. When connecting harnesses fitted with
"AN" connectors, be sure that the index of the plug matches the index
of the receptacle to avoid damage to the connectors and insure proper
connections of the circuits. Install all harness clips and clamps in the
same manner as removed, with plated screws, bolts and toothed lock
washers to insure a positive ground or bond. This is important in order
to provide the necessary bonding for grounding of radio interference as
well as for protection of the harnesses.
130. TERMINAL BOXES.
a. Description. Three terminal boxes and a battery switch box
are used to house the necessary switches, circuit breakers and insulated
terminal blocks for convenience in connecting the wiring. The bulkhead
terminal box is located in the center of the bulkhead in the driver's
compartment (fig. 85 ), and radio terminal boxes are located one on the
right hull wall behind the assistant driver, and two in the fighting com-
partment.
6. Removal. Remove the cover, disconnect the wiring, remove the
conduit fitting lock nuts and pull the wiring out of the box. Remove the
mounting screws which hold the box to the hull.
Figure 85—Bulkhead Terminal Box
RA PD 342317
223
TM 9-747
130-132
c. Installation. Remove the necessary knockout plugs (if so
equipped ) and install the proper fittings as observed when the box was
removed. Use the old fittings if not damaged. Position the box and
secure it with the mounting screws, with toothed lock washers between
the box and the mounting surface. Enter the wires through the proper
fittings and attach the conduits to the fittings. Connect the wires.
Section XXX
RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION
131. INTRODUCTION.
a. Purpose. Radio interference suppression is the elimination, or
minimizing, of the electrical disturbance which would interfere with
radio reception, or would disclose the location of the vehicle to sensi-
tive electrical detectors. The radio set used in the T83 or T89 is de-
signed to meet the requirements of communication under the existing
conditions. The placement of tubes, transformers, coils, and condensers,
in the various circuits of the equipment, automatically suppress many
of the common interferences, and produce a high ratio "signal to noise"
reception. However, because of the type of operation of these vehicles,
many sources of interference are present, and must be considered to
maintain effective suppression. It is important that all vehicles, with
or without radio equipment, be suppressed properly to prevent inter-
ference with radio-equipped vehicles.
6. General. Suppression is accomplished in the T83 and T89
vehicles by the use of condensers, filters, shielding and/or bonding in
all circuits, to confine and dissipate electrical disturbances, that could
affect radio reception. All switch and terminal boxes are mounted with
toothed washers against the mounting surfaces, as well as under the
screw or bolt head, and the covers are securely bonded to the boxes. All
sand shields and fenders are securely bonded by the use of toothed lock
washers in assembly. CAUTION: All bonds must be securely restored
when replacing any equipment treated for radio suppression. The
ground straps on the engine, generator regulator, and instrument panel
are necessary to complete the electrical circuit for proper operation of
the units. While these ground straps may be sufficiently tight for oper-
ation, they may present a source of radio interference if good contact
is not ensured.
132. IGNITION SYSTEM.

a. Description. When the engine is running, the magneto points
make and break contact rapidly to interrupt the primary circuit. This
interruption causes the high-tension circuit to discharge a spark at the
M4
TM 9-747
132-134
Radio Interference Suppression
spark plugs. Both of these conditions set up impulses or frequencies
which could be radiated as radio interference. Suppression of this inter-
ference is accomplished as follows:
(1) MAGNETO. A condenser is used across the contact points in
each magneto to prevent arcing, and to intensify the high-tension spark.
The action of the condenser, in performing its function, also suppresses
the radio interference impulses that would be caused by arcing.
(2) SPARK PLUGS AND WIRES. The spark plug wires are en-
closed in flexible conduits which form a shield over the wires to dissipate
interference.
b. Replacement. The condensers in the magnetos are a part of
the ignition circuit and not purposely intended for radio suppression.
To eliminate interference from this source, replace the magnetos (pars.
64 and 65 ). See paragraph 69 for replacement of spark plugs.
133. STARTING SYSTEM.
a. Description. The starter, cable, solenoid, and starter switch are
shielded, and grounded where necessary to eliminate interference.
When the engine is cranked, a heavy flow of current is drawn over the
cable and through the contacts of the solenoid. Suppression is neces-
sary to minimize the interference set up when the circuit is closed and
opened, and when the starter is operating.
6. Replacement. A bond strap connects the engine mounting to
the hull to ensure a good ground for the engine electrical units. Loose
connections, burned commutator, or faulty brushes would cause radio
interference. For information pertaining to replacement of components
of the starting system, see paragraphs 82 and 83.
134. BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM.
a. Description. The generator and generator regulator are a con-
stant source of radio interference because of the varying frictional con-
tact of the generator brushes on the commutator, and the rapid action of
the contact points in the regulator. Suppression is accomplished as
follows:
(1) GENERATOR. A condenser, which is mounted inside the com-
mutator end housing of the main generator, is connected to the positive
brushes to minimize the interference caused by worn, or faulty, brushes
and commutator. A ground cable connects the generator to the mount-

ing bracket to ensure a good ground for the generator (fig. 38).
225
TM 9-747
134-137
(2) REGULATOR. A filter and a condenser are mounted in the
regulator. A ground strap at the shock mount completes the electrical
circuits of the regulator, as well as ensuring a good electrical bond for
the elimination of radio interference. The filter is connected in series
with the battery lead, and the condenser is connected in parallel with
the armature circuit.
b. Replacement.
(1) GENERATOR AND REGULATOR SUPPRESSION. The
suppression equipment used in the generator and in the generator regu-
lator is an integral part of the units. See paragraphs 87 and 88 for re-
placement of these units.
135. INSTRUMENTS.
a. Description. All instruments enclosed in the instrument box
are bonded to, and shielded by, the box which in turn is bonded to the
sponson by a wire. The utility outlet, which is sometimes used to con-
nect the windshield wiper for the driver's door hood, is suppressed by a
condenser connected in parallel with the outlet inside the instrument
panel.
136. VEHICLE WIRING.
a. Description.
(1) CONDUITS. All wiring is contained in protective conduits which
act as shielding for the electrical circuits. These conduits are secured in
position with clips or brackets fastened to the hull with toothed lock
washers and screws.
( 2 ) RADIO TERMINAL BOXES. Two condensers are used in each
radio terminal box in parallel with the 12-volt and ( + ) 2 5-volt circuits.
The boxes are mounted with toothed lock washers between the hull and
the box, as well as under the mounting screw heads.
b. Replacement. See paragraph 129 for removal and installation
of harnesses. NOTE: It is very important that all harnesses be securely
clamped when installed.
Section XXXI
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
137. FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHER SYSTEM.
«. Description (fig. 86). The two cylinders of the fixed fire extin-
guisher system are located just aft of the battery box on the left spon-
son. A control head assembly, accessible to the driver, is attached to

each cylinder.
nt
TM 9-747
137-138
Auxiliary Equipment
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CONTROL
RA PD 342328
Figure 86—Fixed Fire Extinguisher Cylinders and Controls
b. Removal of Fire Extinguisher Cylinders. Unscrew the con-
trol head swivel nut from the cylinder, and lay the head aside. Loosen
the discharge tubes at the check valve, and disconnect the tubes from
the cylinders. Remove the cylinder clamp bolts and lift out the cylinder.
c. Installation of Fire Extinguisher Cylinders. Place the cylin-
der in position and install the clamp bolts. Connect the discharge tubes
to the cylinder, and tighten the tubes to the check valve. Install the con-
trol head on the cylinder.
138. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS.
a. Description. Two 4-pound CO2 portable fire extinguishers are
carried on the vehicle. They are clamp-mounted, one on the floor to the
right of the transmission in the driver's compartment alongside the as-
sistant driver, and the other below the winch assembly in the left rear
of the fighting compartment.
227
TM 9-747
139-141
PART FOUR—ARMAMENT
Section XXXII
INTRODUCTION
139. SCOPE.
a. This part of the manual contains a brief description of the func-
tioning and operation of the armament mounted on the 155-mm gun
motor carriage T83 and the 8-inch howitzer motor carriage T89 (figs.
1 and 2).
b. It also lists the authorized ammunition for the armament, and
contains information on the sighting equipment.
c. For detailed information on the care, preservation, malfunction,
maintenance, assembly, and disassembly of the 155-mm gun Ml and
the 8-inch howitzer Ml, see TM 9-350 and TM 9-335.
140. CHARACTERISTICS.
a. The armament of the 155-mm gun motor carriage T83 and the
8-inch howitzer motor carriage T89 is employed against emplaced
battery and other ground objectives. The mount for these weapons is
located in the fighting compartment at the rear of the gun motor car-
riage.
b. The 155-mm gun motor carriage T83 possesses the same gen-
eral characteristics as the 8-inch howitzer motor carriage T89. The
only change required when adapting the 8-inch howitzer tube to the
carriage will be to increase the nitrogen pressure in the recoil mecha-
nism from 1,820 pounds per square inch to 2,000 pounds per square
inch, and to decrease the nitrogen pressure in the equilibrators from
1,510 pounds per square inch to 1,355 pounds per square inch. Arrange-
ment of the Belleville springs in the mount to conform with Ordnance
drawing No. B7033103 will also be necessary.
c. These weapons may be elevated to 55 degrees and depressed to
5 degrees. Traverse is 18 degrees to right and 18 degrees to the left of
center. The maximum horizontal range of the 8-inch howitzer is
approximately 18,500 yards and of the 155-mm gun 25,300 yards.
141. DIFFERENCES AMONG MODELS
a. There are no differences among models which will affect troop
use or care of the armament other than those listed in the preceding
paragraphs.
m
TM 9-747
142-143
Introduction
142. WEIGHTS, DIMENSIONS, AND BALLISTICS OF THE 155-
MM GUNS Ml AND M1A1 AND 8-INCH HOWITZER Ml.
155-mm Gun 8-inch Howitzer
Chamber volume 1,596 cu in. 1,485 cu in.
Density of loading 0.63 0.55
Length of bore 45 cal 25 cal
Length of bore 274.5 in. 200 in.
Length (muzzle to face
of breech ring) 277.37 in. 202.5 in.
Maximum powder pressure
permitted 40,000 Ib per sq in. 33,000 Ib per sq in.
Muzzle energy 5,169.5 ft-tons 5,278.4 ft-tons
Muzzle velocity 2,800 ft per sec 1,950 ft per sec
Rate of fire:
For 10-round burst 1 round per min 1 round per min
For sustained fire 1 round per 2 min 1 round per 2 min
Rifling:
Length 230.57 in 164.8 in.
Number of grooves 48 64
Twist Uniform, right Uniform, right
hand, 1 turn for hand, 1 turn for
25 cal 25 cal
Travel of projectile in tube .. 238.315 in. 173.83 in.
Type of breechblock Interrupted screw Interrupted screw
Type of firing mechanism . . Percussion hammer Percussion hammer
Weight of barrel 9,595 Ib 10,240 Ib
143. RECOIL MECHANISM.
155-mm Gun 8-inch Howitzer
Model M3 M4
Maximum recoil 65 in. 70 in.
Recoil at minimum
elevation 58 in. 60 in.
Recoil at maximum
elevation 33 in. 36 in.
Air pressure 1,820 Ib per sq in. 2,000 Ib per sq in.
Type of recoil mechanism . . Hydraulic Hydraulic

Type of counterrecoil
mechanism Hydropneumatic Hydropneumatic
Oil OIL, recoil, heavy OIL, recoil, heavy

TM 9-747
143-145
Armament
155-mm Gun
8-inch Howitzer
Oil reserve in replenisher
lot
1qt
Oil reserve in recuperator
(counterrecoil)
1qt
Iqt
Oil required to fill recoil
mechanism
15 gal
15 gal
Weieht .................
3.925 Ib
Section XXXIII
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
144. PLACING THE WEAPON IN FIRING POSITION.
a. Remove gun or howitzer covers and store them out of the way
in the proper place assigned for them; likewise store the other equip-
ment not required for operation of the weapon.
6. Unlock the tube traveling lock by loosening the nut which
secures the upper half of the traveling lock. Rotate the upper half up
and off the tube; then elevate tube slightly in order to push traveling
lock down in latched position on the hull.
c. Place spade in firing position. Free the top support arms of the
spade assembly by removing the locking pins. Release winch ratchet
arm and brake to lower spade to ground. Back up vehicle to force spade
prongs into ground. When in its proper position, the spade must be
flush with the ground and the spade stops seated against the hull. Apply
vehicle steering brakes and lock in position.
145. INSPECTION BEFORE FIRING.
a. Prior to firing, inspect the bore and breech to see that no dirt
or foreign material has accumulated. If there is foreign matter in the
bore, clean the bore thoroughly and wipe it dry. Normally, the bore
should be wiped or cleaned to remove the coating applied after the

previous firing.
b. Check the replenisher and recuperator oil levels to make cer-
tain that there is sufficient oil in the recoil and recuperator cylinders
(TM 9-335 or TM 9-350).
c. For ease in elevating the piece, adjust the equilibrators to suit
the atmospheric temperature (TM 9-335 or TM 9-350).
d. Inspect to see that there is no leakage of oil, that the howitzer
slides are clean and well lubricated, and that the piston rod nuts are
properly tightened.
230
TM 9-747
145-147
TRAVERSING/
HANDWHEEL (
TRAVERSING
BRAKE HANDLE
RA PD 89777
Figure 87—Traversing Handwhee)
e. Check path of recoil to make sure that it is free from all obstruc-
tions.
146. TO TRAVERSE (fig. 87).
a. When the traversing handwheel, located on the left side of the
top carriage, is rotated in a clockwise direction it traverses the muzzle
of the howitzer to the right. Traverse is limited to an angle of 18 de-
grees right or left by stops assembled on the traversing rack. Recently
a traversing brake was added to the traverse mechanism to prevent the
gun from running down hill if the vehicle is positioned on a side slope.
Use this brake during all firing as the 5 degrees tilt on the carriage tends
to return the gun to zero degrees traverse even when the vehicle is on
level terrain.
147. TO ELEVATE.
a. Turn the elevating handwheel, located on the right side of the
top carriage, in a clockwise direction to elevate the muzzle of the
weapon. However, before the handwheel may be operated, the brake
lever must be pressed down so as to release the brake on the elevating
mechanism (fig. 88). For greatest ease of operation in elevation adjust
the equilibrators for temperature (TM 9-335 or TM 9-350). CAU-
TION: Before grasping the elevating handwheel, release the brake
for an instant to determine if the weight of the gun tube is balanced.
If the weight of the gun tube is extremely unbalanced, it will cause the
handwheel to spin rapidly. It is dangerous to attempt to turn the hand-
wheel when this condition exists.
Ml
TM 9-747
148-149
Armament
ELEVATING HANDWHEEL
ELEVATING ARC ELEVATING MECHANISM BRAKE LEVER
Figure 88—Elevating Handwheel
RA PD 89778
148. OPERATING BREECH MECHANISM (figs. 89, 90, and 91).
a. To Open the Breech.
(1) Remove the firing mechanism.
(2 ) Push down on the breechblock operating lever catch and pull the
breechblock operating lever down to a horizontal position.
(3 ) Swing the operating lever toward the muzzle of the weapon.
b. To Close the Breech.
(1) Pull the breech operating lever toward the breech and then push
it to a vertical position.
(2) Screw the firing mechanism into place.
149. TO LOAD.
a. If the elevation is too great for convenient loading, lower the
weapon to an elevation suitable for easy loading (about 150 mils).
b. Loading the Projectile. A loading tray is furnished to facilitate
the loading and to protect the projectile. Place the projectile in the
loading tray. The tray is lifted by the gun crew, and the front of the
tray placed so that the brass projecting lug rests in a blank portion of
the interrupted breech threading. Ram the projectile part way into the
2*2
I
I
I
1
149
TM 9-747
i
234
149
TM 9-747
Armament
i
i
I
I
235
149
TM 9-747
Opel-cling Instructions
TM 9-747
149-150
Armament
breech by use of the rammer. Then remove the tray and ram the
projectile into position in the forcing cone. It is important that pro-
jectiles be rammed home with a uniform force since variations in the
ramming force will cause slight variations in the range. It is also im-
portant to avoid damage to the rotating bands on a projectile, as such
damage is likely to cause erratic night of the projectile.
c. Loading the Propelling Charge. The loading tray is not re-
quired in placing the powder charge in the breech. Care must be taken
to insure that the igniter end of the powder charge is facing rearward
toward the breechblock.
150. FIRING THE WEAPON.
a. Make certain that the vehicle battery switch is turned off.
6. Remove the firing mechanism from the breechblock and, while
holding the assembly in one hand, slide the primer into the V-shaped
groove. Then place the firing mechanism in the breechblock and screw
it all the way into place. Release the percussion hammer locking pin.
c. Firing is accomplished by a quick pull or snap of the lanyard
attached to the percussion hammer, causing the percussion hammer to
strike the firing pin. While traveling, or for reason of safety, lock the
percussion hammer in a neutral position with the percussion hammer
locking pin. NOTE: The breechblock must be closed before assembling
the firing mechanism, and the firing mechanism must be removed before
the breechblock can be opened.
d. Misfires.
(1) GENERAL. A misfire occurs when the piece fails to fire. Misfire
is caused by:
(a) Failure of the primer to fire.
(b) Failure of the propellant charge to ignite when the primer
fires. When a misfire occurs, all personnel must remain clear of the
path of recoil. The piece must be kept pointed at the target or at a safe
place in the field of fire.
(2) PRIMER FAILURES.
(a) If the primer is not heard to discharge, make at least three
attempts to fire it, the lanyard being pulled with considerable snap.
The primer must not be removed nor the breechblock opened until 10
minutes have elapsed since the last attempt to fire.

(b) When removing the firing mechanism, the operator will note
whether or not the firing mechanism was fully screwed home. (The
primer will not be hit properly unless the firing mechanism is screwed
as far beyond the latch as possible.) If the primer is found to have
fired, proceed as in step 3 below. If the primer has not been fired,
examine the percussion head and:
IN
TM 9-747
150-152
1. If the head has been properly indented, handle the primer
carefully and dispose of it quickly, because of the possibility of a primer
hangfire. Insert a new primer and make another attempt to fire.
2. If the head has not been properly struck, and if the firing
mechanism was properly seated, the firing mechanism should be in-
spected for the following faults: dirty or gummy parts, firing pin or
firing pin spring broken, firing pin housing or primer holder loosened.
After correction of the fault, insert a new primer and make another
attempt to fire.
3. If the primer is heard to discharge but the propelling charge
has failed to explode, no attempt will be made to remove the primer
or to open the breech until 10 minutes have elapsed after the firing of
the primer. After 10 minutes, remove the primer, run a cleaning bit
through the vent, insert another primer and repeat the attempt to fire
the piece. Failure of the propelling charge to ignite indicates an abnor-
mal condition of the charge, such as a missing igniter, igniter end of
charge against the projectile, wet ignition charge, or ignition charge
folded over and not accessible to the flash of the primer.
151. TO UNLOAD.
a. Service Rounds. An unloading rammer is provided with this
materiel for use in unloading service rounds of ammunition when neces-
sary. However, for safety reasons it is advisable to unload the piece by
firing the weapon, after it has been determined that the field of fire is
clear.
b. Dummy Projectile. To unload the dummy projectile, lower
the gun to a convenient elevation (about 150 mils) and with the load-
ing tray in place, remove the projectile with the dummy projectile ex-
tractor. Place the hook of the extractor in the recess in the base of the
dummy projectile, and engage the hook on the shoulder; then jerk
the projectile to release the band stuck in the forcing cone. Push the
projectile forward and repeat if necessary. Use the extractor to guide
the projectile onto the loading tray.
c. To Remove a Fuse from a Shell. If, for any reason, a projec-
tile which has been fuzed is not to be fired, the fuze will be removed.
The operation of inserting the fuze is reversed for fuze removal. CAU-
TION: // the adapter starts to unscrew with the fuze, the unscrewing
must be stopped at once and the shell disposed of as directed by the

executive.
152. TO PLACE WEAPON IN TRAVELING POSITION.
a. Fix Tube Position. Bring the weapon to a horizontal position
in the center of traverse.

TM 9-747
152-154
Armament
b. Clean and Oil Gun. Clean, thoroughly dry, and cover the bore,
powder chamber, breech recess, breechblock, and firing mechanism
with a thin coat of light oil; oil the top and bottom carriages. Lock the
percussion hammer in traveling position.
c. Stow Tools, Equipment, and Ammunition. Return sighting
equipment, firing tools, and accessory equipment to their proper stow-
age position in chests, in brackets, and in clips on the vehicle. Store the
ammunition, and close and store the powder containers.
d. Install Gun Covers. Install the breech, muzzle and sight mount
covers.
e. Fasten Traveling Lock. Unlatch and swing traveling lock up
to a vertical position. Clamp upper half of lock around tube. Tighten
nut. Tighten cradle traveling tie rods.
/. Raise Spade. Move the vehicle forward to free the spade from
the earth. Crank up spade winch, and lift spade to traveling position.
Insert spade support arms through brackets and insert locking pins.
Section XXXIV
SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
153. CHARACTERISTICS.
a. General. The sighting and fire control equipment provided for
the 155-mm gun motor carriage T83 and 8-inch howitzer motor car-
riage T89 differ only in respect to the telescopes supplied for direct
fire missions. Externally these telescopes are identical; however, inter-
nally the reticles differ for the 155-mm gun and 8-inch howitzer. Sight-
ing equipment for the T83 vehicle includes those instruments described
in paragraphs 154 through 161 inclusive.
154. TELESCOPE MOUNT M18A1, PANORAMIC TELESCOPE
M12, AND INSTRUMENT LIGHT M19.
a. Telescope Mount Ml8.41. This mount is identical to that sup-
plied with the field piece; however, spacers have been inserted between
the mount and left cradle trunnion of the top carriage to permit install-
ation of a direct telescope. See figure 92. Telescope mount M18A1 with
panoramic telescope M12 (fig. 92) is the sighting element for laying
the gun in azimuth and forms a part of the two-sight, two-man system
for indirect fire. No provisions are made in .this mount for elevation or
range as this is accomplished by means of a gunner's quadrant on the

right side of the carriage and is discussed in paragraph 157. The pano-
ramic telescope mount is of the azimuth compensating type, which
automatically applies azimuth correction, when the gun is elevated
with the trunnions out of level; such as when the vehicle is sitting on a
238
239
154
TM 9-747
Sighting and Fin Control Equipment

TM 9-747
154
Armament
side slope. Provisions are also made for cross leveling and longitudinal
leveling by level vials and knobs, so that the azimuth scale of the pano-
ramic telescope is in a true horizontal plane. A canvas cover has been
provided to protect the mount when the weapon is not being fired or
when the vehicle is traveling.
6. Panoramic Telescope M12. This telescope has cylindrical lo-
cating surfaces at the top and bottom for centering the telescope in its
socket. The line of sight is elevated or depressed by means of the knob
at the top. Coarse and fine index graduations are provided for the
normal (zero elevations) position. The head is moved in azimuth by
means of the azimuth worm knob, which has a throw-out lever to per-
mit disengagement for rapid movement when required. Azimuth angles
are measured on the azimuth scale and micrometer. The azimuth scale
is graduated in 100-mil intervals, numbered progressively from 0 to 32
LONGITUDINAL
LEVEL VIAL
MOUNT
T-122
TELESCOPE
M69E1
"LONGITUDINAL
ADJUSTING
KNOB
CROSS LEVEL VIAL
CROSS LEVEL KNOB
RA PD 346771
Figure 93—Sighting Equipment on Left Trunnion for 155-mm
Gun Motor Carriage T83—Side View
240
All
241
154
TM 9-747
RA PD 346772
Sighting and Fire Control Equipment

Figure 94—Mount, Telescope, T122—Disassembled

TM 9-747
154
Armament
in two consecutive semicircles. The micrometer indications (1-mil in-
tervals), on the deflection knob, supplement those on the azimuth scale.
A detent causes a click at each 1-mil interval when the deflection knob
is rotated. The panoramic telescope M12 is stowed in case D40871
which is located on the left side of the top carriage below the telescope
mount (fig. 92).
c. Instrument Light, M19. Instrument light M19, consists of a
bracket and battery case, with an electric lead, held firmly against the
telescope socket by clamps in such a position that the horizontal leg
of the telescope fits into the semitrailer notch in the lamp housing.
Illumination is provided for the reticle, azimuth scale, azimuth microm-
eter, and indexes in the telescope and the cross level and longitudinal
level of the mount during night firing. Instrument light M19 is stowed
in chest M21, carried in the gun chest at the rear of vehicle.
RA PO 346773
Figure 95—Reticle Pattern in Telescope, M69E1
242
TM 9-747
155
155. TELESCOPE MOUNT T122, TELESCOPE M69E1
(T117E6), AND INSTRUMENT LIGHT, M36.
a. Telescope Mount, T122. This mount is similar to telescope
mounts provided in tanks and combat vehicles. This mount is located
on the left cradle trunnion shaft of the top carriage between mount
M18A1 and the trunnion bearing (see figs. 92,93 and 94). Mount T122
with straight telescope M69E1 (T117E6) is the sighting element for
laying the gun in azimuth and forms a part of the two-sight, two-man
system for direct fire (see fig. 93). Provisions are made in this mount
for small adjustments in elevation and azimuth during bore-sight (see
figs. 93 and 94). This mount moves in azimuth and elevation with the
tube providing direct sights for moving or stationary targets. A canvas
cover has been provided to protect the mount when the weapon is not
being fired or when the vehicle is traveling.
ft. Telescope M69E1 (Tl 17E6). This is a straight telescope simi-
lar to types on field carriages, and weighs 3 pounds. The reticle pat-
tern for the 155-mm gun in this telescope is shown in figure 95. Tele-
scope M69E1 is stowed in carrying case M70 (T16) (fig. 96) which is
located on the left gunner's shield near mount T122.
c. Instrument Light, M36. Instrument light M36 consists of bat-
tery case, switch with electrical lead and lamp held firmly to the tele-
scope mount by clamps. When mounted the light is positioned between
CARRYING CASE M10 (T-16)
TELESCOPE M69E1 (TU1E6)
RA PD 346774
Figure 96—Telescope, M69E1, with Carrying Case, TI6
243
TM 9-747
155-156
,CLAMP FOR INSTRUMENT LIGHT M36
-ADJUSTING SCREW
RA PD 346775
Figure 97—Mount, Telescope, T124 with Bracket Arranged for
Mounting Telescope in Front of Trunnion
the mount and trunnion bearing. Illumination is provided for the tele-
scope reticle during night firing. Instrument light M36 is stowed in
chest M21 carried in the gun chest at the rear of the vehicle.
156. TELESCOPE MOUNT M71 (T124) AND ELBOW TELE-
SCOPE M16A1F (T135).
a. Telescope Mount Mil (T124). This mount is identical to that
supplied with the field piece and permits the use of an elbow telescope
for elevation control during direct fire missions (fig. 97). Mount M71
is attached to the right cradle trunnion shaft and moves in azimuth
and elevation with the tube (fig. 98). On the T83 and T89 the bracket
mounting is positioned so that elbow telescope M16A1F (T135) is
located behind the trunnion bearing. On the field piece the bracket
mounting is rotated forward so that the elbow telescope is positioned
244
TM 9-747
156
Sighting and Fin Control Equipment
CLAMP FOR INSTRUMENT
LIGHT M36
MOUNT TELESCOPE
M71 (T-124) M16A1F (T-135)
RA PD 346776
Figure 98—Elbow Telescope, T135 on Mount, T124 with Mount
Rotated so that Telescope Is in Rear of Trunnion
ahead of the trunnion. Mount M71 with telescope M16A1F is the sight-
ing element for laying the gun in elevation and completes the part of
the two-sight, two-man systems for direct fire (fig. 98). A canvas cover
has been provided to cover this mount when the weapon is not in use.
b. Elbow Telescope M16A1F (T135). This elbow telescope was
developed to permit direct fire of the weapon and is also being issued
for the field piece (fig. 99). The reticle pattern for the 155-mm gun in
this telescope is shown in figure 100. The elbow telescope is stowed
in case D40871 which is located on the left side of the top carriage be-
low mount T122.
c. Instrument Light, M36. This light, described in paragraph
155 c, is used to illuminate the reticle in telescope M16A1F during
night firing (fig. 99).
245
TM 9-747
157
Armoment
RA PD 346777
Figure 99—Elbow Telescope, M16A1F (T135) and Light,
Instrument, M36
157. QUADRANT MOUNT Ml, GUNNER'S QUADRANT Ml,
AND INSTRUMENT LIGHT M12.
a. Quadrant Mount Ml. This mount is identical to that supplied
with the field piece; however, it attaches to telescope mount M71 on
line with the right cradle trunnion shaft (figs. 97 and 98). Quadrant
mount Ml is used in conjunction with a gunner's quadrant for laying
the gun in elevation and forms the sighting equipment for the second
man for indirect fire. Any motion of the weapon in elevation causes
the mount to rotate a like amount about the trunnion axis. A cross
leveling mechanism is provided to keep the mount continuously cross
leveled during operation.
6. Gunner's Quadrant Ml. This quadrant includes a sector-
shaped frame to which is pivoted an arm carrying a level. Notches on
the frame engaging with a plunger in the arm permit rapid setting of
246
TM 9-747
157-158
RA PD 346778
Figure 100—Reticle Pattern in Elbow Telescope, M16A1F (T135)
the arm in 10-mil steps. The quadrant is used for laying the weapon
in elevation during indirect fire. The quadrant Ml is carried in gun-
ner's quadrant carrying case M18 which is stowed on the right gunner's
shield near the quadrant mount.
c. Instrument Light Ml 2. The instrument light M12 is a compact
light complete with battery, switch, and a hand light connected to the
battery by means of a rubber-covered wire. This instrument light pro-
vides illumination for the cross level on the mount and gunner's quad-
rant during night firing. Instrument light M12 is stowed in chest M21
at the rear of the vehicle when not in use.
158. AIMING POST Ml, AND AIMING POST LIGHT M14.
a. Aiming Post Ml. Two of these aiming posts are furnished with
each vehicle. Each aiming post consists of two tubular sections, each
approximately 4 feet long. The lower section has a metal point for
247
TM 9-747
158-161
Armament
embedding in the ground. The posts are painted with alternate 4-inch
red and white bands. A canvas cover holding both sections is provided
and stowed vertically near the right shell rack.
6. Aiming Post, Light Ml4. The lights consists of a battery case
for two BA-30 batteries with a lamp housing and a toggle switch. A
metal hood is provided for the lamp, which is carried around the battery
case when not in use. A reflector is mounted in the back of the lamp and
a color filter can be attached to the front of the lamp housing. These
lights are clamped to the aiming post for use during night firing. A
chest is provided to carry a section set comprised of two aiming post
lights; one with red, one with green filters; eight BA-30 batteries, and
two spare lamps. The batteries should always be removed from the
battery case when not in use, in order that their deterioration on long
standing will not damage the light. When not in use, the various parts
of the light should be kept in the chest M21. The chest M21 is stowed
in the gun chest at the rear of the vehicle.
159. BORE SIGHT.
a. The bore sighting equipment consists of: a breech bore sight
RF-ll-BB and muzzle bore sight RF-ll-GD, designed for insertion in
the corresponding parts of the gun. The purpose of bore sighting is to
test the alinement of the sighting equipment for parallelism with the
bore of the weapon. With the two elements in place, look through one
of the large holes in the breech bore sight and move the gun until the
aiming point can be seen through the muzzle bore sight, then look
through the small hole and move the gun until the object appears in
the opening at the center of the straightedge.
160. TESTING TARGET.
a. The testing target is used during the bore sighting operation for
for the alinement of sights and subcaliber equipment with the axis
of the bore of the gun. The aiming points are plainly designated. It is
essential that the proper aiming points are selected for the materiel and
sights employed, and that the target is positioned vertically when in
use. The normal distance from the gun at which the target should be
located is about 50 yards.
161. BORE SIGHTING (EMERGENCY).
a. For expediency bore sighting, position the vehicle on level ter-

rain and sight on a well-defined object at least 2,000 yards distant. Re-
move the firing mechanism from the breechblock and while looking
through the barrel aline the weapon with the distant object. Cross-level
mounts M18A1 and Ml, then observe through telescopes M12,
248
TM 9-747
161-162
Ammunition
M16A1F, and M69E1 to see if the respective lines of sight fall on the
distant object. If they do not, adjust as follows:
(1) TELESCOPE M69E1 IN MOUNT T122. If the vertical or
zero range lines do not fall on the distant object, loosen the clamping
bolts in the mount which secure these adjustments. Turn the lateral
and vertical adjusting knobs until coincidence is obtained. Tighten
clamping bolts and note that coincidence is not lost.
(2) PANORAMIC TELESCOPE M12 IN MOUNT M18A1. With
the azimuth worm knob, place the vertical line (optical center) of the
reticle on the distant object. Likewise position horizontal cross hair on
distant object. The azimuth scale and micrometer scale should both
register zero. If either the azimuth scale or the micrometer scale do not
register zero they may be brought to zero by loosening the locking
screws and slipping the scales into coincidence. Tighten all locking
screws securely.
(3) TELESCOPE M16A1F IN MOUNT M71. Correction of this
sight is similar to directions outlined for telescope M69E1.
(4) QUADRANT MOUNT Ml. Set the gunner's quadrant Ml to
zero elevation and cross level the mount. The motion of the cross level-
ing mechanism is limited by stops in the segment and no attempts
should be made to force the mechanism beyond its limits. Place the
quadrant on the mount pads. If the bubble is centered turn it end for
end to verify the accuracy of the quadrant. If the bubble is not centered,
determine the elevation or depression angle necessary to center the
bubble. One-half of this angle is the error and a corresponding correc-
tion should be applied to all future settings. Adjustments to the quad-
rant or mount are not permitted by the using arm.
Section XXXV
AMMUNITION
162. AUTHORIZED ROUNDS.
a. Authorized rounds for the 155-mm guns Ml and M1A1 are
listed in Table I below. Authorized rounds for the 8-inch howitzer Ml
are listed in Table II. It will be noted that standard nomenclature,
which completely identifies the ammunition, is used in the listing. The
use of standard nomenclature is mandatory for purposes of record
except where use of Ammunition Identification Code (A.I.C.) symbols

is prescribed to expedite requisitioning and reporting. Identification is

provided for by painting and marking on each of the components, and
on packing in accordance with the basic scheme described in TM
9-1900. In addition to the projectile, charge, and fuze listed in Table I
or II, the Mk. IIA4 17-grain percussion primer is required for each com-
plete round.
249
TM 9-747
162
TABLE I—AUTHORIZED ROUNDS FOR 155-MM GUNS Ml AND M1A1
Fig.
No.
Fill* for Which
Adopted
Propelling
Projectile
Charge
SERVICE AMMUNITION
103
ARMOR-PIERCING
PROJECTILE, AP, 100-lb.
M112, w/FUZE, BD, M60,
155-mm guns
CHARGE, propel-
ling, NH powder,
155-mm guns Ml
and M1A1
94
103
CHEMICAL
SHELL, gas, persistent, H,
M104, unfuzed, 155-mm
guns
SHELL, smoke, FS, M104,
unfuzed, 155-mm guns
FUZE, PD, M51 series,
w/BOOSTER M21 se-
ries*
SHELL, smoke, phos-
phorus, WP, M104, un-
fuzed, 155-mm guns
SHELL, illuminating,
M118B1, w/o fuze,
155-mm guns, all mods.,
or how. Ml
FUZE, TSQ, M54

SHELL, smoke, HC, BE,

M117, unfuzed, 155-mm
guns
CHARGE, propel-
ling, NH powder,
155-mm guns Ml
and M1A1
HIGH EXPLOSIVE
SHELL, HE, M101, un-
fuzed, 155-mm guns
w/BOOSTER M20 or
M21 series*
or
FUZE, TSQ, M55 series,
w/BOOSTER M21 se-
ries f
or
FUZE, time, mechani-
cal, M67 series, w/
BOOSTER M21 series!
or
FUZE, CP, M78 and
BOOSTER M25
*FUZE, PD, M51, w/BOOSTER M20A1 or M21; M51A1, w/BOOSTER M20A1 or M21A1;
M51A3, w/BOOSTER M21A2; or M51A4, w/BOOSTER M21A4.
The following limitations apply to the M51 fuze, and modifications:
FUZE, PD, M51 or M51A1, w/BOOSTER M20A1, for service use until a sufficient supply of
MS1A3 fuzes with M21A2 boosters or M51A4 fuzes, with M21A4 boosters are available; for
practice.
FUZE, PD, M51, w/BOOSTER M21, or MSI Al, w/BOOSTER M21A1, for emergency combat
TM 9-747
162
TABLE UNAUTHORIZED ROUNDS FOR 8-INCH HOWITZER Ml
NO-
NO.
Fuze for Which
Adopted
Propelling
Charge
Projectile
SERVICE AMMUNITION**
HIGH EXPLOSIVE
FUZE, PD, MSI series,
w/BOOSTER M20 or
M21 series*; FUZE,
time, mechanical, M67
series, w/BOOSTER
M21 series t
or
FUZE, CP, M78 and
BOOSTER M25
104
SHELL, HE, 200-lb., Ml 06,
unfuzed, 8-in. how. Ml
SHELL, HE, 200-lb., M106,
w/modified fuze cavity,
unfuzed, 8-in. how. Mlt
FUZE, PD, T76E6t
CHARGE, propel-
ling, Ml (green
bag), 8-in. how. Ml
or
CHARGE, propel-
ling, M2 (white
bag), 8-in. how. Ml
w/BOOSTER M21 se-

ries*
or
FUZE, time, mechani-
cal, M67 series, w/
BOOSTER M21 series t
SHELL, HE, 200-lb., M106,
w/modified fuze cavity and
supplementary charge, un-
fuzed, 8-in. how. Ml ft
FUZE, PD, M5I series,
w/BOOSTER M21 se-
ries*; FUZE, time, me-
chanical, M67 series,
w/BOOSTER M21 se-
ries f
or
FUZE, CP, M78 and
BOOSTER M25
105
SHELL, HE, 200-lb., Mk.
IA1, unfuzed, 8-in. how.
Ml
>,
*FUZE, PD, M5I, w/BOOSTER M20A1 or M21; M51A1, w/BOOSTER M20A1 or M21A1;
M51A3, w/BOOSTER M21A2; or M51A4, w/BOOSTER M21A4.
The following limitations apply to the MSI fuze, and modifications:
FUZE, PD, M51 or M51 Al, w/BOOSTER M20A1 for service until a sufficient supply of M5I A3
fuzes with M21A2 boosters or M51A4 fuzes with M21A4 boosters are available for practice.
FUZE, PD, M51, w/BOOSTER M21 or M51A1, w/BOOSTER M21A1, for emergency combat
use only; must be drop-tested prior to use.

TM 9-747
163
Armament
MODEL OF SHELL
A.I.C SYMBOL-
KIND OF FILLER
\CALIBER AND
TYPE OF CANNON
RA PD 26822
Figure 101—!00-tb AP Projectile Ml 12 for 155-mm Guns
163. PREPARATION FOR FIRING.
a. Projectiles. Aside from removal of grommet and lifting plug, it
is only necessary to fuze those shells which are shipped uncrated and
unfuzed. The armor-piercing shell need only be taken from its box and
the grommet removed to prepare it for firing.
b. Propelling Charges. After the charge has been removed from
its moisture-proof container, it is only necessary to remove the igniter
protector cap and data tag. However, in the case of the propelling
charge for the 155-mm guns Ml and M1A1, it is necessary to assemble
A.I.C. SYMBOL
[i
KIND OF FILLER
LOT NUMBER
MODEL OF SHELL
(CALIBER AND
TYPE OF CANNON
(WEIGHT ZONE
•/MARKING
OLIVE DRAB (MARKING IN YEUOWJ
RA PD 26824
Figure 102—HE Shell Ml01 tor 155-mm Guns
252
TM 9-747
163
Ammunition
the flash reducer M1 to the charge for night firing. The charge must be
loaded into the weapon with the igniter (cloth dyed red) toward the
breech. When it is desired to fire less than the full charge, the tying
straps are tied over the base charge.
c. Primers (fig. 97). To prepare a primer for firing it is only neces-
sary to insert it into the firing mechanism.
A.I.C. SYMBOL
LOT NUMBER,
MODEL OF SHELL ,
GREEN BANDS >
\CALIBER AND
(TYPE OF CANNON
KIND OF FILLER
\WEIGHT ZONE
"MARKING
RA PD 65117
Figure 103—H Filled Gas Shell Ml04
OLIVE DRAB (MARKING IN YELLOW)
DRAB
RA PD 80819
Figure 104 — 200-lb HE Shell Ml 06 for 8-inch Howitzer Ml
OLIVE DRAB (MARKING IN YELLOW)
RA PD 80820
Figure 105—200-lb HE Shell MK. IA1 for 8-inch Howitzer M1
253
TM 9-747
164
Armament
•LOADER'S INITIALS AND LOT NUMBER
,MODEL OF PRIMER
'YEAR OF LOADING
RA PD 69092A
Figure 106—17-Grain Percussion Primer MK. IIA4
164. FUZES.
a. FUZES, PD, M51, w /BOOSTER M21; M51 Al, w/BOOSTER
M21A1; M51A3, w/BOOSTER M21A2; M51A4, w/BOOSTER
M21A4*.
(1) GENERAL. The fuzes and boosters making up these assemblies
are essentially the same in principle, but differ in various respects due to
modifications of either the fuze or the booster, as follows: The M51A1
differs from the M51 only with respect to the booster; the M21A1
booster has a Vi-inch flash hole in its rotor cover as compared with a
Vs-inch flash hole in the M21 booster. In the M51A3 and M51A4, the
delay action is further modified to provide for a 0.15-second delay in-
stead of 0.05-second as in the earlier models. The M21A1 booster as-
sembled to the M5 1 A3 fuze is also a modification of the earlier boosters,
adding a set-back pin for additional insurance against premature or
accidental functioning. The M21A4 is a further modification of the
M21A2.
(2) DESCRIPTION. In all of the fuzes (fig. 98) the booster is per-
manently attached to the fuze at the time of manufacture. Thereafter,
the fuze with booster is handled as a unit. The fuze contains two actions,
superquick and delay. Although both actions are initiated on impact,
the functioning of the shell depends upon the setting of the fuze. When
the fuze is set "DELAY," the superquick action is so interrupted that
the projectile functions with delay action. It should be noted, however,
that if the superquick action malfunctions when the fuze is set "SQ,"
the projectile will function with delay action rather than become a dud.
On the side of the fuze near the base is a slotted "setting sleeve" and two
*FUZE, PD, M51, w/BOOSTER M21; and the M51A1, w/BOOSTER M21A1
are authorized for emergency combat only and must be drop-tested before use.
The M5I or M51A1, w/BOOSTER M20A1 is authorized for service use until sup-
plies of M51A3, w/BOOSTER M21A2 and M51A4, w/BOOSTER M21A4 become
available.
254
TM 9-747
164
Ammunition
SETTING SLEEVE
A5 INDICATED — 5ET FOR 5UPER
QUICK ACTION, AT HGHT ANGLE5
IPEtrENDICUiA* TO AXI5 OF
FUZEl FOU DEIA1 ACTION,
".15 5EC." INDICATES LENGTH OF DEUY
SAFETY COTTER PIN IN «oosff« REMOVED «EFORE A55EMBLY TO SHEU
RA PD 15053
Figure 107—PD Fuze M51 A3 w/Booster M21A2
registration lines; the one parallel to the axis is marked "SQ," the other
"DELAY." As shipped, the fuze is set "SQ." To set the fuze for delay
action it is only necessary to turn the setting sleeve so th'at its slot is
alined with "DELAY." A delay pellet, 0.15-second in the M51A3 and
M51A4, and 0.05-second in the M51 and M51A1 fuzes—incorporated
in the delay action train provides for the delay action. The setting may
be made or changed at will with a screwdriver or some other similar
tool any time before firing. This can be done even in the dark by noting
the position of the slot—parallel to the fuze axis for superquick action,
at right angles thereto for delay. A cotter pin with pull ring is assem-
bled to the booster to prevent accidental movement of the detonator
during shipment. This cotter pin is to be withdrawn just prior to assem-
bling the fuze with booster to the projectile.
(3 ) PREPARATION FOR FIRING. To fuze the projectile, proceed
as follows:
(a) Remove eye bolt lifting plug from projectile.
(b) Inspect fuze cavity and threads. They should be free of foreign
matter which would interfere with the proper assembly of the fuze.
(c) Remove cotter pin from booster.
(d) Screw fuze with booster into projectile by hand. Tighten with
fuze wrench.
(e) Set fuze. If delay action is required, aline slot in setting sleeve
with "DELAY"; if superquick, aline slot with "SQ" setting as shipped.
Fuze may be reset as required.
255
TM 9-747
164
Armament
6. FUZE, TSQ, M54.
(1) DESCRIPTION. This fuze is a combination time and super-
quick type. A safety pull wire extends through the fuze to secure the
time plunger during shipment. The fuze contains two actions, time and
superquick. The superquick action is always operative and will func-
tion on impact unless prior functioning has been caused by time action.
Therefore, to set the fuze for superquick action, it is required that the
time action be set either at safe (S) or for a time longer than the ex-
pected time of flight. The time-train ring of pressed black powder is
graduated for 25 seconds. To prevent extremely short time action, an
internal safety feature prevents the time action from functioning should
the fuze be set for less than 0.4 second. Therefore, when setting for
time action, the setting should always be greater than this minimum of
0.4 second. The fuze as shipped is set safe (S); prior to firing, fuze is set
for required time by means of a fuze setter.
(2) PREPARATION FOR FIRING. After assembly of the fuze to
the projectile and prior to firing, the safety pull wire must be with-
drawn from the fuze for either superquick or time setting. To do this,
pull lower end of the wire from the hole and slide wire off the end
of the fuze. If superquick action is required, the graduated time-train
ring can be left as shipped (set at safe (S) ), or set for a time greater
STAMPED ON REVERSE SIDE -
LOADER'S LOT NUMBER
LOADER'S INITIALS AND
MONTH AND YEAR LOADED
TYPE AND MODEL OF FUZE
MANUFACTURER'S INITIALS
RA PD 1032A
Figure 108—TSQ Fuze M55A1 w/Booster M21A1
256
TM 9-747
164
Ammunition
LOADER'S LOT NUMBER
(-STAMPED ON REVERSE SIDE-
MANUFACTURER'S INITIALS &
LYEAR OF MANUFACTURE
TYPE AND MODEL OF FUZE
5.93 MAX. .
RA PD 7209
Figure 709—Mechanical Time Fuze M67A1 w/Booster M21A1
than the expected time of flight. If time action is required, the graduated
time-train ring is set for the required time of burning by means of a
fuze setter. NOTE: //, after setting the fuze preparatory to firing, the
round is not fired, the fuze will be reset "safe" (S) and the safety pull
wire replaced in its proper position before the round is returned to its
packing container.
c. FUZE, TSQ, M55, w /BOOSTER M21; M55A1, w/BOOSTER
M21A1; M55A2, w/BOOSTER M21A2; M55A3, w/BOOSTER
M21A4. This fuze (fig. 99) functions in the same manner as the M54,
with the one exception that the M55 series is issued with booster. The
body of both the M54 and M55 fuzes are of identical design. The
boosters are of the M21 series described in subparagraph « above.
d. FUZE, Time, Mechanical, M67 or M67A1, w/BOOSTER
M21A1, M67A2, w/BOOSTER M21A2: M67A3, w/BOOSTER
M21A4.
(1) DESCRIPTION. The M67 and its modifications (fig. 100) are
essentially alike, and are intended to provjde a means of high-burst
adjustment at longer ranges when firing the high-explosive shell. The
primary differences occur in booster modifications as described in sub-
paragraph a above. The fuze is of the mechanical (clockwork) time
type, and is similar to the M43 type fuze in contour and in design ex-
cept that the escapement mechanism has been modified to give a longer
257
TM 9-747
164
Armament
burning time. There is no impact element. The upper and lower caps
are staked together and turn as a unit when setting the fuze. A set or
register line is stamped on the rim of the lower cap. A safety line with
"S" below it, and time graduations to 75 seconds with 0.5-second in-
tervals, are stamped on the body. The graduations run counterclock-
wise viewed from the point of the fuze. Two setting grooves, one each
on the lower cap and body, are provided for setting the fuze. A safety
feature incorporated in the fuze is designed to prevent functioning
should the fuze be set for 3 seconds or less. As shipped, the fuze is set
"safe," that is, the set line in the lower cap is in alinement with the
safety line "S" in the body.' A pull wire is fitted to the fuze to secure the
firing pin prior to firing. A cotter pin with pull ring is assembled to the
booster to prevent accidental movement of the detonator during ship-
ment. The booster is assembled to the fuze at the time of manufacture
and handled thereafter as a single unit with the fuze, in shipment and
assembly to the projectile. The cotter pin is to be withdrawn just prior
to assembling the fuze with booster to the shell.
( 2 ) PREPARATION FOR FIRING. To fuze the projectile proceed
as follows:
(a) Remove the eye bolt lifting plug from the projectile.
(b) Inspect the fuze cavity and threads. They should be free of
foreign matter which would interfere with the proper assembly of the
fuze.
(c) Remove the cotter pin from the booster.
(d) Screw the fuze with booster into the projectile by hand.
Tighten with the fuze wrench.
(e) Remove the safety pull wire. This can be done readily by
pulling the end of the wire from the hole in the lower cap and sliding
the wire off the end of the fuze.
(f) Set fuze by means of fuze setter, the lower cap being turned in
a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the point of the fuze. The
torque required to set the fuze is between 80 and 100 inch-pounds.
e. FUZE, CP, M78 (T105) and BOOSTER M25 (T1E1)
(1) DESCRIPTION. The M78 (T10S) concrete-piercing fuze and
M25 (T1E1) booster (fig. 101) are used to convert the HE shell M101
or Mk. IIIA1 into a concrete-piercing shell. In this case both the fuze
and booster are shipped in the same container, but as separate com-
ponents. The fuze is a solid hardened steel nose plug which contains
a detonator assembly in its base. It is shorter and heavier than the
fuzes described in paragraphs above. The fuze M78 is fitted with either
a 0.025-second delay or nondelay element; the amount of delay is as
indicated by the stamping on the body of the fuze. NOTE: All fuzes
T105 were equipped with 0.05-second delay detonator assemblies dur-

TM 9-747
164
Ammunition
RA PD 26821
Figure 110—Booster M25 and CP Fuze M78
ing the early development of this fuze. Nondelay fuzes are designed
primarily for spotting purposes. Fuzes with 0.025-second delay ele-
ments are designed to be used for firing for effect. The booster M25
(TlEl)isa modified M21A2 booster containing approximately 3 ex-
ternal threads rather than 6. A cotter pin with pull ring, which is located
FUZE END
BOOSTER END
Figure 111—Wrench for M78 Fuze
RA PD 26820
TM 9-747
164-165
Appendix
in the booster body, must be removed prior to assembly of the booster
to the shell. This booster is intended for use only with FUZE, CP, M78
(T105).
(2) PREPARATION FOR FIRING. After removal of lifting plug
from projectile, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove the safety pin from the M25 booster and screw the
booster into the booster cavity in the shell. Tighten booster firmly with
the booster end of the wrench (fig. 102) which is issued with the M78
fuzes.
(b) Screw the M78 fuze into the fuze cavity and tighten securely
with fuze end of wrench. Be sure that the fuze shoulder seats firmly
against the nose of the shell—there should be no space between
shoulder of fuze and shell. Do not stake fuze to the shell.
APPENDIX
Section XXXVI
REFERENCES
165. PUBLICATIONS INDEXES.
«. The following publications indexes should be consulted fre-
quently for latest changes to or revisions of the publications given in
this list of references and for new publications relating to materiel
covered in this manual:
Introduction to Ordnance Catalog (explains SNL
system) ASF Cat
ORD-1 IOC
Ordnance publications for supply index (index to
SNL's) ASFCat.
ORD-2 OPSI
Index to ordnance publications (lists FM's, TM's, TC's
and TB's of interest to Ordnance personnel, MWO's,
OPSR's, BSD, S of SR's, OSSC's and OFSB's. In-
cludes alphabetical listing of Ordnance major items
with publications pertaining thereto) OFSB 1-1
List of publications for training (lists MTP's, TR's,
TC's, FM's, TM's, WDTB's, Firing Tables and
Charts and Lubrication Orders) FM 21-6
List of miscellaneous publications (lists MFs, MWO's,

SB's, RR's and War Department Pamphlets) WD Pam-

phlet 12-6
260
TM 9-747
165-166
References
List of training films, film strips and film bulletins
(lists TFs, FS's and FB's by serial number and sub-
ject) FM 21-7
Military training aids (lists graphic training aids,
models, devices, and displays) FM 21-8
166. STANDARD NOMENCLATURE LISTS.
a. Ammunition.
Ammunition, fixed and semifixed, including subcaliber,
for pack, light and medium field, aircraft, tank and
antitank artillery, including complete round data. . SNLR-1
Ammunition instruction material for antiaircraft, har-
bor defense, heavy field, and railway artillery, in-
cluding complete round data SNLP-8
Ammunition instruction material for grenades, pyro-
technics, and aircraft bombs SNL S-6
Ammunition, revolver, automatic pistol, and sub-
machine gun SNL T-2
Ammunition, rifle, carbine, and automatic gun SNLT-1
Charges, propelling, separate loading, 6-inch to 240-
mm, inclusive, for harbor defense, heavy field, and
railway artillery SNL P-2
Fuzes, primers, blank ammunition, and miscellaneous
items for antiaircraft, harbor defense, heavy field,
and railway artillery SNL P-7
Grenades, hand and rifle, and fuzing components.... SNL S-4
Packing materials used by field service for small arms
service ammunition SNL T-5
Projectiles, separate loading, 6-inch to 240-mm, in-
clusive, for harbor defense, heavy field, and railway
artillery, including complete round data SNL P-l
Service fuzes and primers for pack, light, and medium
field artillery SNL R-3
b. Armament,
Carbine, cal. .30, Ml SNL B-28
Gun, 155-mm Ml or M1A1 SNLD-24
Howitzer, 8-in. Ml SNL D-29

Launcher, grenade, M8 SNL B-39

Ml
TM 9-747
166-167
Appendix
c. Sighting Equipment.
Lights, instrument SNL F-205
Mount, quadrant, Ml (for 155-mm gun carriage Ml
and 8-inch howitzer Ml) SNL F-180
Mount, telescope, M12 SNL F-86
Periscopes, telescopes for periscopes, and direct sight-
ing telescopes for use in tanks SNL F-235
Post, aiming SNL F-35
Quadrant, gunner's, Ml (mils) SNL F-140
d. Maintenance.
Antifriction bearings and related items ORD 5 SNL H-12
Cleaning, preserving and lubricating materials: recoil
fluids, special oils, and miscellaneous related items,
ORD 5 SNLK-1
Elements, oil filter, ORD 5 SNLK-4
Lubricating equipment, accessories, and related dis-
pensers, ORD 5 SNL K-3
Soldering, brazing and welding materials, gases and
related items, ORD 5 SNL K-2
Standard hardware, ORD 5 SNL H-l
Tool-sets for maintenance of sighting and fire control
equipment SNL F-272
Tools, maintenance, for repair of automatic guns, anti-
aircraft materiel, automatic and semiautomatic can-
non, and mortars, ORD 6 SNL A-35
Tools, maintenance, for repair of automotive and
semiautomotive vehicles:
ORD 6, Tool-sets (special) automotive and semi-
automotive SNL G-27
(Section 1)
ORD 6, Tool-sets (common) specialists' and or-
ganizational SNL G-27
(Section 2)
167. EXPLANATORY PUBLICATIONS.
«. Fundamental Principles.
Automotive electricity TM 10-580

Ammunition, general TM 9-1900

Auxiliary fire-control instruments (field glasses, eye-
glasses, telescopes and glasses) TM 9-575
262
TM 9-747
167
References
Basic maintenance manual TM 38-250
Browning machine gun, cal. .50, HB, M2 (mounted in
combat vehicles) FM 23-65
Driver's manual TM 10-460
Driver's selection and training TM 21-300
8-inch howitzer materiel TM 9-335
Electrical fundamentals TM 1-455
Field artillery and field mortar ammuniton OFSB 3-3
Fuels and carburetion . TM 10-550
Firing tables for:
Gun, 155-mm, Ml and M1A1
Shell, H.E. M101, w/fuze, P.D., M51 and mod's.,
w/fuze, time mech., M67 and M67A1
Shell, chemical, M104, w/fuse, P.D., M51 and
mod's FT 155-S-2
Firing tables for:
Howitzer, 8-inch, M1
Shell, H.E., 200-lb M106 w/fuze, P.D., M51 and
mod's., w/fuze, time mech., M67 and M67A1 FT 8-J-l
Instruction guide, small arms data TM 9-2200
Military motor vehicles AR 850-15
Motor vehicle inspections and preventive maintenance
service TM 9-2810
155-mm gun materiel TM 9-350
Ordnance service in the field FM 9-5
Precautions in handling gasoline AR 850-20
Qualifications in arms and ammunition training allow-
ances AR 775-10
Range regulations for firing ammunition for training
and target practice AR 750-10
Small arms ammunition TM 9-1990
Small arms ammunition OFSB 3-5
Standard military motor vehicles TM 9-2800
Targets, target materials, and rifle range construction TM 9-855
U. S. Carbines, cal. .30, Ml and M1A1 FM 23-7

It. Maintenance and Repair.

Cleaning, preserving, lubricating and welding mate-
rials and similar items issued by the Ordnance De-
partment TM 9-850
263
TM 9-747
167
Appendix
Maintenance and care of pneumatic tires and rubber
treads TM 31-200
Ordnance Maintenance: Accessories for Wright R975-
EC2 engines for Medium Tanks M3 and M4
(Scintilla magnetos) TM 9-1750D
Ordnance Maintenance: Auxiliary generator (Home-
lite Model HRUH-28) for Medium Tanks M4 and
modifications TM 9-173 IK
Ordnance Maintenance: Ordnance engine model
R975-C4 (Continental) TM 9-1725
Ordnance Maintenance: Electrical equipment (Auto-
Lite) TM 9-1825B
Ordnance Maintenance: Fuel pumps TM 9-1828A
Ordnance Maintenance: Power train unit, one-piece
differential case, for Medium Tanks M3, M4 and
modifications and related gun motor carriages. . . . TM9-1750B
Ordnance Maintenance: Tank, Medium, M4 and
modifications, horizontal volute suspension TB 9-1750K-
Ordnance Maintenance: Speedometer, tachometers,
and recorders TM 9-1829A
c. Protection of Materiel.
Camouflage FM 5-20
Decontamination TM 3-220
Decontamination of armored force vehicles FM 17-59
Defense against chemical attack FM 21-40
Explosives and demolitions FM 5-25
d. Storage and Shipment.
Ordnance company, depot FM 9-25
Ordnance storage and shipment chart, group G—
Major items OSSC-G
Registration of motor vehicles AR 850-10
Rules governing the loading of mechanized and motor-
ized army equipment also major caliber guns, for
the United States Army and Navy, on open top
equipment published by Operations and Mainte-

nance Department of Association of American

Railroads.
Storage of motor vehicle equipment AR 850-18
264
TM 9-747
INDEX
Page No.
operation instructions 230
recoil mechanism 229
sighting and fire control equip-
ment 238
weights, dimensions, and ballistics
of the 155-mm guns Ml and
M1A1 and 8-inch howitzer Ml. 229
Armament and ammunition stowed
in the vehicle 16
Army motor vehicle operator's per-
mit, description 5
Assembly
dual support rollers 210
idler wheels and bracket 207
single support rollers 211
suspension assembly 217
transmission differential 193
Authorized rounds of ammunition. 249
Auxiliary equipment
fixed fire extinguisher system. . . 226
portable fire extinguisher system 227
A Page No.
Accelerator, foot, description
and location 27
Accelerator linkage, maintenance
operation 77
Accessories and belts, preliminary
service upon receipt of equipment 23
Adjustment
breaker points
Bosch magneto 121
Scintilla magneto 126
clutch release linkage 163
engine idling speed 136
governor 135
idle cut-off and degasser 139

idle fuel mixture 136
pressure relief valve 114
steering brake linkage 184
track tension 203
valve clearance 110
Aiming post light M14, description 248
Aiming post Ml, description 247
Air cleaners (and breathers)
after-operation service 62
at-halt service 60
cleaning and servicing 133
description 133
lubrication 47
maintenance 133
maintenance operation 74
operation under unusual condi-
tions 38
preliminary service upon re-
ceipt of equipment 23
Air inlet shutter
installation 106
removal 99
Air intake tubes, operation under
unusual conditions 38
Ammeter
before-operation service 56
description and location 33
road test 67
service upon receipt of equip-
ment 25
TM 9-747
Appendix
B—Cont'd
Page No.
Bore sight, description 248
Bore sighting 248
Brakes, parking and steering
description 29, 187
during-operation service 58
preliminary service upon receipt
of equipment 24
removal and installation of pawls
and springs 187
road test 67
run-in test 25
Breech (and firing) mechanism
lubrication 47
operation 232
Carburetor
adjustment
engine idling speed
idle fuel mixture
data
description
installation
maintenance operation
removal
Characteristics:
armament
sighting and fire control equip-
ment
Circuit breakers, description and
location
Cleaning
air cleaners
fuel filters
idler wheels and bracket parts. .
Clutch
clutch pedal
description
installation
removal
clutch pilot bearing
installation
removal
clutch release bearing
installation
removal
clutch release linkage
adjustment
description
clutch throw-out bearing shoes
installation
removal
description
136
136
136
136
138
74
138
228
238
32
133
134
205
166
TM 9-747
Index
D Cont'd Pag* No.
Description—cont'd
horizontal volute spring suspen-
sion 201
horn 172
hull 220
idle cut-off and degasser 139
ignition system 121
instruments and horn 167
motor carriage 8
oil cooler 119
oil filter 118
oil supply tank 120
oil pressure and suction pump. . 114
oil temperature control valve. . . 120
periscopes 220
portable fire extinguishers 227
propeller shafts and universal
joints 172
shock absorbers 212
starting system 142
steering brake shoes 174
terminal boxes 223
transmission and final drive
assembly 173
valve rocker assembly and push
rods 108
vehicle wiring 221
Determining shim thickness 193
Differences among models of
armament 228
Differences between models of
motor carriages 8
Differential, maintenance operation 70
Disassembly

idler wheels and bracket 205

Dome lights
description ; 154
replacement 154
Doors, hatch and emergency escape,
description 9
Draining and filling lubrication
system Ill
Drive sprockets
description 211
installation 212
removal 212
Driver and assistant driver's cupola
description 220
installation 220
removal 220
Page No.
Driver's report-—accident, motor
transportation, description 5
Driver's trip ticket and preventive
maintenance service record, de-
scription 5
Driving precautions 36
Dual support rollers
assembly and installation 210
removal and disassembly 210
Duty roster, description 7
Elbow telescope M16A1F

TM 9-747
Page No.
Fuel shut-off valves, description
and location 27
Fuel tanks and gage
description 140
removal and installation of verti-
cal and horizontal tanks 140
Fuel tubes and valves, replacement 138
Fuel valves, maintenance operation 77
Fuzes 254
Gage sending units
description 116
replacement 118
Gages, description and location. . . 33
Gear cases, lubrication 47
Gearshift lever, removal and instal-
lation 174
Generator
data 148
description 148
installation 148
lubrication 52
removal 148
trouble shooting 94
Generator drive pulley and front
universal joint
installation 199
removal 197
Generator regulator
data 150
description 150
installation 150
removal 150
Generators and starting motor,
Governor
adjustment 135
checking setting 135

removal and installation 136

Grousers and spare track blocks,
preventive maintenance services. 81
Gun
on-vehicle equipment 15
on-vehicle spare parts 21
on-vehicle tools 14
Gin, tarpaulin, and bows, prelimi-
nary service upon receipt of
equipment . 24
Gun bore, lubrication 52
Gunner's quadrant Ml, description 246
Appendix
E Cont'd Page No.
Exchange part or unit identification
tag 8
Exhaust manifolds
installation 141
removal 141
Exhaust pipes (and tail pipes)
installation 106, 142
removal 102, 141
Fenders, removal and installation. 221
Field replacement of magnetos
and emergency adjustments 131
Final drive
lubrication in cold weather. ... 39
maintenance operation 70, 78
trouble shooting 95
Final reduction assemblies

TM 9-747
Index
H—Cont'd
Page No.
Headlights
description 15O
replacement of blackout marker
lamp 153
replacement of lamp unit 151
Horizontal volute spring suspension
description 201
drive sprockets 211
shock absorbers 212
tracks 201
Horn
description 172
replacement 172
Hull
description 220
driver and assistant driver's
cupola 220
fenders 221
periscopes 220
Hull floor cover and engine support
bolts
installation 108
removal 102
Hydrometer test 145
Page No.
removal 99
Inspection
bearings and seals (idler wheels
and bracket) 205

Instrument light M12, description. 247

Instrument light M19, description. 242
Instrument light M36
description 243
functioning 245
Instrument panel
description 167
installation 170
removal 167
replacement of instruments.... 167
Instruments
of equipment 24
replacement 226
Instruments and gages, run-in test. 25
Instruments and horn
horn 172
instrument panel 167
Lamps and reflectors, service upon
receipt of equipment 25
Lever, transmission gearshift, de-
scription and location 27
Levers, steering, description and
location 29
Light, low oil pressure warning,
Lighting system, trouble shooting 92

TM 9-747
Appendix
M Cont'd Pag. No.
Magnetos—cont'd
lubrication 52
removal (engine out of vehicle)
Bosch 121
Scintilla 126
Maintenance
air cleaners 133
batteries 145
engine
push rod guide housing and
adapter 110
valve rocker assembly and
push rods 108
Manifolds, maintenance operation. 74
MWO and major unit assembly re-
placement record, description. . . 7
Oil cooler, transmission
description 119
installation 119
removal 119
Oil filter
data 118
description 118
installation 119
removal 118
Oil pressure and suction pump
description 114
oil pressure relief valve
adjustment 114
replacement 114
Oil pressure gage

road test 66
ment 24
Oil pressure relief valve
adjustment 114
replacement 114
Oil suction strainer, description,
removal, and installation 119
Oil supply tank
description 120
installation 120
removal 120
Oil temperature control valve
description 120
replacement 120
Oilcan points 52
Page No.
On-vehicle equipment
armament and ammunition 16
communications 18
fire extinguishers 19
gun 15
publications 18
rations 20
sighting equipment 17
On-vehicle spare parts
gun 21
vehicle 21
On-vehicle tools
gun 14
TM 9-747
Index
P Cont'd Pag. No.
Power train, data 11
Primer
preparation for firing 253
Primer and fuel pump
description 134
pump replacement 135
Priming pump, description and
location 27
Preventive maintenance service and
technical inspection work sheet for
full-track and tank-like wheeled
vehicles 8
Preventive maintenance services
after-operation and weekly
service 60
at-halt service 58
crew maintenance (first echelon) 54
organizational maintenance (sec-
ond echelon) 64
Projectile, loading 232
Projectiles, preparation for firing. 252
Propeller shafts and universal
joints
description 172
of equipment 24
propeller shaft assembly
installation 173
removal 172
trouble shooting 95
weekly service 62
Propelling charges, preparation for

firing 252
Push rod guide housing and adapter
installation 110
removal 110
replacement of adapter and seal 111
Quadrant mount Ml, description. 246
Radio interference suppression
battery charging system 225
ignition system 224
instruments 226
starting system 225
trouble shooting 93
vehicle wiring 226
Page No.
Ramp, spade, and winch, prelimi-
nary service upon receipt of equip-
ment 23
Rations stowed in vehicle 20
Recoil mechanism, data 229
Regulator, trouble shooting 94
Regulator units, maintenance
operation 77
Reports and records of lubrication 53
Revolution counter
road test 67
Rollers, track support, lubrication
in cold weather. 39
Service ammunition, tables of. 250, 251
Service upon receipt of equipment
run-in test 25
TM 9-747
Appendix
S Cont'd Pag. No.
Sprockets, idlers, and flange nuts,
of equipment 23
Springs and suspension
at-halt service 59
of equipment 24
Starter and magneto switch assem-
bly, description and location. ... 29
Starting system
description 142, 225
replacement 225
starter 142
starter solenoid 143
trouble shooting 86
Starting the engine 34
Steering brake adjustments 182
Steering brake control levers
installation 187
removal 186
Steering brake cross shaft assembly
installation 199
removal 197
Steering brake linkage
at-halt service 59
Steering brake shoes
description 174
installation 178
removal 174
-»pping the engine 36
ension assembly
wembly 217
data 11
description 212
disassembly 216
inspection and repair 217
removal and installation of
wheels 213
replacement of volute springs. . 213
Switches, description and location
battery 29
emergency stop 32
fuel cut-off 32
main light 32
panel light 32
Tachometer
road test 67
Page No.
ment 25
trouble shooting 84
Taillights
description 153
Telescope, panoramic, M12,
description 240
Telescope M69E1 (T117E6),
description 243
Telescope mount M18A1, descrip-
tion 238
Telescope mount M71 (T124),

TM 9-747
Page No.
Upper shroud
installation 106
removal 99
Valve mechanism, maintenance
operation 72
Valve rocker assembly and push
rods
description 108
installation 110
removal 108
valve clearance adjustment 110
Valves, fuel shut-off, description
and location 27
Variable recoil gears, lubrication. . 53
Vehicle tools 11
Vehicle wiring
description 221, 226
harnesses 222
replacement 226
terminal boxes 223
Vertical and horizontal fuel tanks,
Vision devices
description 9
of equipment 24
Volute springs, replacement 213
Index
T Cont'd Page No.
Transmission and final drive
assembly—cont'd
gearshift lever 174
installation 199
parking brake 187
removal 196
steering brake adjustments 182

steering brake control levers. ... 186

steering brake shoes 174
transmission oil cooler 188
Transmission differential
assembly 193
disassembly 191
Transmission oil cooler
installation 188
removal 188
Traversing gear handwheel shaft
bearing, lubrication 53
Traversing gear pinion shaft lower
bearing, lubrication 53
Trouble shooting
battery charging system 90
clutch 94
engine 82
engine lubricating system 85
fuel system 84
ignition system 87
lighting system 92
propeller shaft , 95
radio interference suppression. . 93
starting system 86
tracks and suspension 96
transmission and final drive. ... 95
Unsatisfactory equipment report. . 8
Unusual conditions, operation under 37
War Department Lubrication
Order, description 5

TM 9-747 (1945)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 9-747 (1945)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 9-747 (1945)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

,V

T83 AND 8-INCH HOWITZER

155-MM GUN MOTOR CARRIAGE

T83 AND 8-INCH HOWITZER

MOTOR CARRIAGE T89

WAR DEPARTMENT 26 FEBRUARY 1945

RESTRICTED DISSEMINATION OF RESTRICTED MATTER NO person is entitled solely

by virtue of his grade or position to knowledge or possession of classified matter. Such

possession. (See also paragraph 23b, AR 380-5, 15 March 1944.)

Washington 25, D. C., 26 February 1945

TM 9-747, 155-mm Gun Motor Carriage T83 and 8-inch Howitzer

Motor Carriage T89, is published for the information and guidance of

[A.G. 300.7 (23 Feb. 45)]

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF

J...1, \'\ G. C. MARSHALL,

The Adjutant General.

(2); PC & S (1); PE (ORD O) (5); Dist O, 9 (5); Dist Br O, 9

(3); Reg O, 9 (3); Establishments, 9 (5); Decentralized Sub

O, 9 (3); Gen & Sp Sv Sch (10); USMA (20); A (10); CHQ

(3), 9-328 (3), 9-377(3).

(For explanation of symbols, see FM 21-6).

PART ONE— GENERAL

SECTION I. Introduction ............. 1-2 5-8

II. Description and data ....... 3-5 8-11

III. Tools, spare parts, and ac-

cessories .............. 6-9 11-21

PART TWO— OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION IV. General ---- ............ 10 22

V. Service upon receipt of

equipment ............ 11-13 22-27

VI. Controls and instruments ... 14-15 27-33

VII. Operation under ordinary

conditions ............. 16-17 34-37

VIII. Operation under unusual

conditions ............. 18-21 37-41

IX. Demolition to prevent

enemy use ............. 22-23 41-42

PART THREE— MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION X. General ................ 24 43

XI. Special organizational tools

and equipment ......... 25 43-45

XII. Lubrication .............. 26-27 46-53

XIII. Preventive maintenance

services ............... 28-34 53-82

XIV. Troubleshooting .......... 35-47 82-97

XV. Engine description and data . 48-49 97-99

XVI. Engine removal and

installation ............ 50-51 99-108

XVII. Engine maintenance ....... 52-53 108-111

XVIII. Engine lubrication system. . 54-62 111-120

XIX. Ignition system ........... 63-69 121-132

XX. Fuel and air intake and

exhaust systems ........ 70-80 133-141

PART THREE—MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS (Cont'd)

SECTION XXI. Starting system 81-83 142-143

XXII. Battery and lighting system. 84-93 143-154

XXIII. Clutch 94-100 154-167

XXIV. Instruments and horn 101-102 167-172

XXV. Propeller shaft and universal

joints 103-104 172-173